Posco E&c - Manual of Seismic Steel Connections v1.1

POSCO E&C CO.
, LTD
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL

CONNECTIONS
By:
Hernn Santa Mara O., Ph.D.
Associate Professor
Department of Structural and Geotechnical Engineering
Pontificia Universidad Catlica de Chile
Camilo De la Barra B.
Civil Engineer, Pontificia Universidad Catlica de Chile
Juan Jos Uribe M., MS.
Civil Engineer, Pontificia Universidad Catlica de Chile
April 2012
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The publication of this Manual was made possible by the financial support of
POSCO E&C. The authors greatly appreciate all the advice by Mr. Jae-Heung
Kim, Mr. Jang Ho Choi and Mr. Rodrigo Garca, all of them from POSCO E&C.
We wish to thank Javiera De la Barra for her valuable collaboration in
improving the quality of the drawings.
DISCLAIMER
The information presented in this Manual is based in design codes from Chile
and United States, engineering principles, and current construction and design
practice, and is for general information only. Under no circumstances does
DICTUC S.A. warrant or certify that the information contained here is free of
errors or deficiencies of any kind.
All the examples solved in this Manual refer to specific codes and standards.
Codes are often modified, so the users of this material have to be aware of the
codes that are in force at the time the Manual is used. Any reader of this
Manual assumes all the responsibility that comes from its use.
This manual may be changed at any time. Staff is encouraged to review this
manual periodically and suggest changes to keep the manual current and to
minimize differences between the manual and actual practices.
The origin of all the specific information, figures, and tables is properly
referenced inside this Manual. Before publishing a hard copy of this Manual, it
shall be verified that the use of the referenced information does not infringe
copyright.
Manual of Seismic Steel Connections Vs. 1.0

April 2012
ii
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. General information
2.1. Design Codes.
2.2. Material Properties.
2.3. Comments on the performance of steel structures during the
February 27th Chile Earthquake.
2.4. Bolted Connections.
2.5. Welded Connections.
2.6. Notation used on the manual.
2.7. Units used on the manual.
3. Base Plate Connections

3.1. Design Requirements.
3.2. Recommendations from AISC Manual of Steel Construction (13th Ed.).
3.3. Example.
3.4. References.
4. Brace Connections
4.1. General Description of Seismic Braced Frames.
4.2. Code Requirements for Braced Frames Connections, Design Forces
and Recommendations.
4.3. Discussion of some typical bracing connection cases.
4.4. References
4.5. Example: Brace to Beam-Column Connection.
4.6. V-brace to Beam Connection (at Beam Midspan).
iii
5. Shear Connections
5.1. Shear tab beam-to-column connection (single plate connection).
5.2. Shear single angle beam-to-column connection.
5.3. Shear double angle beam-to-column connection.
5.4. Shear single angle beam-to-beam connection.
5.5. Shear double angle beam-to-beam connection.
5.6. Shear Stiffened Seated beam-to-column connection.
5.7. Shear Unstiffened Seated beam-to-column connection.
6. Moment Connections
6.1. Bolted Extended End-Plate Moment Connection (unstiffened case).
6.2. Bolted Extended End-Plate Moment Connection (stiffened case).
6.3. Reduced Beam Section (RBS) Moment Connection.
6.4. Bolted Flange Plate Moment Connection.
6.5. Welded Unreinforced Flange-Welded Moment Connection.
6.6. Welded Connection Commentary for Continuity Plates and Doubler
Plates.
7.Columns Splices
7.1. Bolted Column Splice for SBCF.
7.2. Bolted Column Splice for SMF.
7.3. Welded Column Splice for SCBF.
7.4. Welded Column Splice for SMF.
8. Beam Splices
8.1. Beam Parallel Splice All Bolted Splice Plates.
8.2. Beam Parallel Splice Bolted End Plate.
iv
9. Stoppers
9.1. Up-lift Clamps.
9.2. Lateral Stoppers.
10. Support of Equipment

10.1. Calculation of Seismic Forces on Equipment.
10.2. Skid-Mounted Equipment.
10.3. Post-Installed Anchor Bolts.
11. Expansion Joints

12. Cranes
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
vi
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
1. INTRODUCTION
The response of steel structures subjected to loads and deformations produced
by earthquakes is strongly dependant on the behavior of the connections. The
ductility of the structure, the total strength of the system, the deformation
capacity, the easiness of identifying damage and later repairing, the level of
inelastic incursions (or having a completely elastic response) are
characteristics highly dependent of the solution given to the connections of the
steel members.
The intention of this manual is to present the current design procedures for
connections for different members of steel buildings and to show the minimum
design checks that must be done for a correct design of those connections.
The currently available design methods are the Allowable Stress Design (ASD)
method and the Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) method. The LRFD
method has been used in Europe, Canada and United States for a number of
years. Also, the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), the
organization that prepares the specifications for structural design of steel
buildings, has decided to favor LRFD over ASD. Therefore, in this Manual all
examples are developed using LRFD.
It was preferred to use the International System of Units (SI) because it is
mandatory in the current Chilean standards.
1.1 Contents
The manual is organized into 12 chapters. The first two chapters present a
general description of the design standards and the materials used. Chapters 3
through 8 show the description of different types of connections and design
procedures. Examples are developed for each case, using the international or
the Chilean standards. In Chapters 9 to 12 special cases are discussed, but no
examples are solved.
All the chapters with solved examples of connections have a similar structure:
first, the requirements from international and Chilean design codes are
discussed; then, the design of a connection is proposed and solved; the design
is performed using an international design code, but the effects of the Chilean
code in the final design are always included for discussion; finally, the resulting
design is summarized. In some examples the design forces are taken from the
most stringent conditions between Chilean and international design provisions.
1-1
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
The chapters are as follows:

Chapter 1
Introduction.
Chapter 2
General information.
Chapter 3
Base plates.
Chapter 4
Brace connections.
Chapter 5
Shear connections.
Chapter 6
Moment connections.
Chapter 7
Column splices.
Chapter 8
Beam splices.
Chapter 9
Stoppers, which includes up-lift clamps and lateral stoppers.
Chapter 10
Support of equipments.
Chapter 11
Expansion Joints.
Chapter 12
Cranes.
In Chapter 2, general information about current international and Chilean

design standards, properties of typical steels used in construction, and a
description of the performance of steel structures during the February 27th,
2010 Chile earthquake, using available public information, are provided.
In Chapter 4, besides examples of brace connections, a discussion of the load
paths through the connection is made and is pointed out the attention that
have to be paid on several topics when designing these connections.
In Chapter 6, five moment beam-to-column connections are described and
examples are solved using international standards. Also, the discussion for a
typical moment beam-to-column connection (Bolted Flange Plate) is shown,
based in the requirements of the Chilean standard.
1-2
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
2. GENERAL INFORMATION
In this chapter is summarized general information needed to design
connections in steel structures. The information corresponds to a brief
description of the structural design codes that are used along this manual, a
description of the Chilean and international standards that are used to
characterize the main types of steels used for structural steel construction, and
a summary of the observed performance of steel structures during the 2010
Chile earthquake. Also, brief sections containing information of bolts and welds
for connections, as well as two sections for the general notation and units used
in this manual, are included.
The international codes refer to the standards used in the United States. Those
were chosen because important parts of the Chilean codes are based in the
specifications written by the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).
2.1 Design codes
2.1.a.
International codes
The main specifications used for steel design in the United States, and that are
widely used in many countries, are the following:
ANSI/AISC 360-05 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings
This standard sets criteria for the design of structural steel buildings and other
structures, which are designed, fabricated, and erected with vertical and
horizontal members that are typical of buildings. It combines the Allowable
Stress Design (ASD) and Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) methods
by defining the way in which the strength is calculated for a given limit state,
and the corresponding values of the safety factor and the resistance factor .
ANSI/AISC 341-05 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings

This standard addresses the design and construction of structural steel
buildings located in high risk seismic zones.
2-1
ANSI/AISC 358-05 Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel

Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
This Standard specifies design and detailing criteria for connections in
accordance with the AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings for
use with special moment frames (SMF) and intermediate moment frames
(IMF). All these connections are prequalified, meaning that the connections
can provide the required inter-story drifts that SMF and IMF systems may
sustain. Other connections can be used if satisfactory evidence of adequate
performance is provided, in accordance with Appendix S of the AISC Seismic
Provisions.
2.1.b.
Chilean codes
The Chilean codes related to seismic design of steel constructions are the
following:
NCh427.cR1977 Construction Specifications for the design of steel structures
for building
This standard specifies the procedures for the design of steel structures for
buildings and also specifies the minimum resistance that the members and
connections must meet. Being a very old standard, is in a review process, and
it is not currently used in building design.
NCh433.Of1996 Modified in 2009 Earthquake resistant design of buildings
This standard defines the requirements for the design of earthquake-resistant
buildings, equipments and other secondary buildings. It is not applied to
industrial.
Appendix B specifies that, while there is no official version for the design and
construction of steel buildings, the following standards must be used:
2-2
a)
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, American Institute of Steel

Construction 2005 (ANSI/AISC 360-05), for the design of the steel
members.
b)
Regarding seismic design, the Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel

Buildings, American Institute of Steel Construction 2005 (ANSI/AISC
341-05), must be used. To apply this standard, the R and R o values
taken from Table 5.1 of NCh433 should be the ones corresponding to
Special Moment Frames (SMF) or Special Concentric Brace Frames

(SCBF). Those R and Ro values can be used only in steel structures
designed according to ANSI/AISC 341-05 and ANSI/AISC 341-05.
In 2011, as a result of modifications due to the effects of the 2010 Chile
earthquake in buildings, new regulations for earthquake-design were adopted.
The new regulations introduced modifications in the definition of the
geotechnical parameters, the design spectra and the calculation of seismic
deformations. For all other requirements NCh433.Of1996 Modified in 2009
must be used.
NCh2369.Of2003 Earthquake-resistant design of industrial structures and
facilities
This standard defines the requirements for the earthquake-resistant design of
industrial structures and facilities. It must be applied to the structures as well
as ducts and pipes and mechanical and electrical equipment, including their
anchors. It also applies to buildings structured by columns fixed to the base.
The basic objectives of the code are:
a)
Life must be protected: protect life by avoiding the collapse of the

structure during earthquakes more severe than the design
earthquake; by preventing fires, explosions, or gas leaks; by
protecting the environment; and by guaranteeing the safe operation
of escape routes.
b)
Maintain the continuity of operation of the industry: keep the

essential processes and services; minimize the stoppage time of the
industry; facilitate the inspection and repair of the damaged members
and connections.
To avoid collapse, the structures should have large strength and/or large
capacity to absorb energy, beyond the elastic limit of the material. To achieve
the former the structural system should be able to:
a)
Ensure ductile behavior of elements and connections, and avoid

failures due to instability or brittle behavior, or ensure elastic
response of the structure.
b)
Provide redundancy to the earthquake resistant system.
2-3
c)
Avoid asymmetry and unneeded complexity of the structure.
To avoid stoppage of operation of the industry, the structure must also meet
the following requirements during an earthquake more severe than the design
earthquake.
d)
Limit incursions in non-elastic behavior, if those are going to stop

operation of the industry.
e)
All damage must occur at places that are visible and accessible.
f)
Emergency and control equipment shall be properly qualified

according to international standards, with the approval of the process
engineers and specialists.
Chapter 8 of the standard defines special requirements for steel structures.

While there is no official version of a standard for the design and construction
of steel buildings, the following standards must be used in addition with
NCh23609.Of2003 design provisions:
a)
Load and Resistance Factor Design Specifications for Structural Steel

Buildings, American Institute of Steel Construction 1999 (AISC 36099), for the design of the steel members.
b)
Regarding seismic
Buildings, Part 1:
Steel Construction
all provisions from
used.
design, the Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel

Structural Steel Buildings, American Institute of
1999 (AISC 341-99), must be used. Alternatively,
chapter 8 and Annex B of NCh2369.Of2003 can be
NCh3171.Of2010 Structural design - General dispositions and combinations

of load
This standard defines the load combinations that must used for calculating the
required resistances of structural members. This standard has to be used
together with NCh433.Of1996 Modified in 2009. The load combinations for
designing industrial facilities are defined in NCh2369.Of2003.
2-4
2.2 Material properties

Steel is an alloy composed mostly of iron and small quantities of carbon.
Changes in the amount of carbon produce changes in strength, ductility and
hardness of steel. Properties of steel can also be changed by including copper,
chromium, manganese, nickel, silicon, vanadium, among others. Carbon steels
contain no more than 1.7% of carbon, and copper, manganese and silicon in
limited quantities. Structural steels for buildings are of the mild carbon type,
which is defined as carbon steel with a carbon content of 0.30 to 0.59%.
Other types of steels used for construction are high-strength low-alloy steels
and alloy-steels. These steels have larger amounts of additional chemical
elements such as chromium, molybdenum, nickel, titanium, vanadium, in
order to, for example, obtain better corrosion resistance, higher strength and
higher toughness.
The chemical composition of the steel, as well as mechanical properties such
as yield strength, ultimate strength, deformation capacity, are defined in
various standards. The American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) has
defined several types of steel for use in buildings:
A36
A242
A529
A572
A514
A588
A992
A1043
A1077
Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel
Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of
Structural Quality
Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy ColumbiumVanadium Structural Steel
Standard Specification for High-Yield-Strength, Quenched and
Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding
Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel,
up to 50 ksi [345 MPa] Minimum Yield Point, with Atmospheric
Corrosion Resistance
Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes
Standard Specification for Structural Steel with Low Yield to Tensile
Ratio for Use in Buildings
Standard Specification for Structural Steel with Improved Yield
Strength at High Temperature for Use in Buildings
The most commonly used steel is A36. The yield and tensile strengths of some
of the steels mentioned above are shown in Table 2.2-1.
2-5
Minimum
yield
strength (Fy)
(ksi)
Tensile
strength (Fu)
(ksi)
32
58 to 80
36
58 to 80
A529 Gr42
42
60 to 85
A529 Gr50
50
70 to 100
A572 Gr42
42
60
A572 Gr50
50
65
A572 Gr60
60
75
A572 Gr65
65
80
A242
42
63
High-strength
low-alloy steel
A588
42
63
High-strength
low-alloy steel
A992
50 to 65
65
High-strength
low-alloy steel
Designation
A36
Steel type
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
High-strength
low-alloy steel
Table 2.2-1: Structural steels defined by ASTM.

In Chile only one standard defines the steel for building construction,
NCh203.Of2006 Structural steel - Requirements. This standard defines the
requirements that the different types of steels for building (carbon steel, alloysteels, or high-strength low-alloy steels) must meet. Two general types of
steels are defined: structural steel for general construction and structural steel
for constructions subjected to dynamic loads. A dynamic load refers to seismic
loading or any other type of dynamic loads. The yield and tensile strengths of
steels defined in Chile are shown in Table 2.2-2.
2-6
Designation
Minimum
yield
strength (Fy)
(MPa)
Tensile
strength (Fu)
(MPa)
Steel type
A240ES
240
360 to 460
Carbon steel
A270ES
270
410 to 510
Carbon steel
A345ES
345
510 to 610
Carbon steel
M345ES
345
510 to 610
Alloy-steel
Y345ES
345
480
High-strength
low-alloy steel
A250ESP
250 to 350
400 to 550
Carbon steel
A345ESP
345 to 450
450
Carbon steel
Table 2.2-2: Structural steels defined in NCh203.Of2006.

Additional requirements for steel are defined in NCh2369.Of2003, Section
8.2.1.
Only A250ESP and A345ESP steels can be used for seismic design. These
steels must meet some special requirements:
-
The maximum allowable value of the ratio Fy/Fu is 0.85.

Yield strength less than 450 MPa.
A minimum elongation in 50 mm of 20%.
Minimum toughness of 27 J at 21C, with the Charpy test, ASTM6.
Guaranteed weldability.
ASTM A36 and ASTM A572 Gr 50 are steels similar to A250ESP and A345ESP,
respectively. This does not mean that are equivalent. Equivalency must be
checked, taking into account the requirements listed above. Table C.1 of
NCh203.Of2006 presents a list of verifications that must be performed to
verify equivalency. ASTM A992 (Gr50) complies with the requirements from
the Chilean standards.
2-7
2.3 Comments on the performance of steel structures during the

February 27th Chile Earthquake
On February 27th, 2010, the large Maule earthquake (Mw = 8.8) that affected
Chile was strongly felt at least from Temuco to La Ligua (USGS, 2010), in a
length of about 700 km. The area subjected to large ground shaking is
occupied by 75% of the total country population and three of the largest
population and industrial centers: Santiago, Concepcin-Talcahuano, and
Valparaso-Via del Mar. About 370.000 houses were damaged or destroyed;
25 bridges collapsed (Hube et al. 2010); ports were damaged due to
liquefaction and lateral spreading (EERI, 2010).
Most of the steel structures in Chile are industrial facilities. Steel buildings for
other uses, like office space or parking garages, which must be designed using
NCh433, are rare. Therefore, most of the structures designed after 2003 were
designed using the seismic design code for industrial facilities, NCh2369,
rather than using NCh433.
Even though access to industrial facilities was limited, the observations by
Cruz and Valdivia (2011) and by Herrera et al. (2012) allow drawing
conclusions regarding the performance of steel industrial structures during the
2010 Chile earthquake.
A significant number of different types of industrial structures were located in
the affected area. The damage described by Cruz and Valdivia (2011) shows
that in power plants fragile components of electrical substation equipment
failed, but were promptly replaced; damage in under-designed or poorly
detailed connections; damage in older structures, like large deformations of
the stoppers; some rotation of shallow foundations of equipment.
Most of the large steel structures that support heavy equipment, like a steam
generating boiler or a large diameter pipe, showed very little damage.
Evidence was found of large displacements at seismic stoppers of large heavy
equipment.
Some mechanical or electrical equipment, with anchors with no adequate
seismic design, suffered of a bad performance. Also, an often found damage
occurred at concrete pedestals with poor design and detailing.
It is very important to notice that, in general, engineered steel structures
designed according to the latest design codes, and constructed using standard
2-8
construction practices, performed well. Damage was limited mostly to older

structures or to structures that did not comply with the current seismic codes.
Also, it is proposed that the adequate performance of steel structures was the
result of over strength rather than ductility, which is a consequence of the
application of the seismic code provisions used to design those structures.
References
Cruz, E. F., and Valdivia, D., (2011). Performance of industrial

facilities in the Chilean earthquake of 27 February 2010, Structural
Design Tall Special Buildings, 20, pg. 83101.
Earthquake Engineering Research Institute (EERI), (2010). EERI

Special Earthquake ReportJune 2010. EERI Newsletter Suppl.
Herrera, R. A., Beltran, J.F., Aguirre, C., and Verdugo, A., (2012).
Seismic performance of steel structures during the 2010 Maule
earthquake, STESSA 2012, Edited by Federico Mazzolani and Ricardo
Herrera, CRC Press 2011, Pages 3743.
Hube M., Santa Mara H., Villalobos F., (2010) Preliminary analisys of
the seismic response of bridges during the Chilean 27 February
earthquake. Obras y Proyectos,N8, p. 48-57.
USGS. Magnitude 8.8 Offshore Bio-Bio, Chile. Retrieved April 15th,

2012, from:
http://earthquake.usgs.gov/earthquakes/eqinthenews/2010/us2010tf
an/
2-9
2-10
2.4.
Bolted connections
In bolted connections, the transmission of forces is made by the action of the

bolts, through shear action of the shank, bearing of the bolt against the
connected steel plates, or by friction induced by pretension of the bolts. The
typical configuration of a bolt is shown in Figure 2.4-1.
Figure 2.4-1: Bolt parts.

2.4.a.
Commonly used bolts
AISC360-05 authorizes the use of ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 high-strength

bolts.
1.
Bolt sizes
AISC360-05 gives the size of bolts in United States and S.I. units.
AISC Bolts: North American and metric bolts
North American bolts
Metric bolts
Dimension
(in)
Approx.
Diameter
(mm)
Approx.
Gross Area
(mm2)
Dimension
Diameter
(mm)
Approx.
Gross Area
(mm2)
13
127
5/8
16
198
M16
16
201
19
285
M20
20
314
7/8
22
388
M22
22
380
25
507
M24
24
452
1 1/8
29
641
M27
27
573
32
792
M30
30
707
1 3/8
35
958
M36
36
1018
38
1140
Table 2.4-1: Gross section area for commonly used bolts.

United States and S.I. units.
2-11
2.
Holes
The following table for Nominal Hole Dimensions in mm for various bolt
diameters is taken from AISC 360-05 Specification, table J3.3M.
Nominal Hole Dimensions (mm) - Table J3.3M of AISC 360-05 Specification
Hole Dimensions
Bolt diameter
Standard
(Dia.)
Oversize
(Dia.)
Short-Slot
(Width x Length)
Long-Slot
(Width x Length)
M16
18
20
18 x 22
18 x 40
M20
22
24
22 x 26
22 x 50
M22
24
28
24 x 30
24 x 55
30
27 x 32
27 x 60
M24
27
(a)
M27
30
35
30 x 37
30 x 67
M30
33
38
33 x 40
33 x 75
>= M36
d+3
d+8
(d + 3) x (d + 10)
(d+3) x 2.5d
(a) Clearance provided allows the use of a 1-in. bolt if desirable
Table 2.4-2: Nominal Hole Dimensions (mm) for several bolt diameters (mm).
Re. AISC360-05 Specification, table J3.3M
These standard hole-diameters are used for all hole related limit states, except
tear out.
For the use of standard holes, oversized holes, short-slotted holes and longslotted holes; see AISC360-05 Specification, chapter J, section J.3. Bolts and
threaded parts, sub-section 2. Size and Use of Holes.
2-12
3.
Minimum Bolt Pretension:
According to AISC360-05 Specification, table J3.1M:
Minimum Bolt Pretension (kN) - Table J3.1M of

AISC 360-05 Specification
Bolt size (mm)
A325M Bolts
A490M Bolts
M16
91
114
M20
142
179
M22
176
221
M24
205
257
M27
267
334
M30
326
408
M36
475
595
Table 2.4-3: Minimum Bolt Pretension (kN) for several bolt diameters (mm).
Re. AISC360-05 Specification, table J3.1M.
Note: this pretension is equal to 70% of the minimum tensile strength of bolts,
rounded off to nearest kN, as specified in ASTM specification for A325M and
A490M bolts with UNC.
4.
Nominal Strength of bolts:
According to AISC360-05 , table J3.2, for bearing and slip-critical connections:

A325-High-Strength Bolts:
Nominal Tensile Stress:
= 620
Nominal Shear Stress in Bearing-Type Connections (threads not excluded from

shear planes):
= 330
Nominal Shear Stress in Bearing-Type Connections (threads excluded from
shear planes):
= 414
2-13
A490-High-Strength Bolts:
Nominal Tensile Stress:
= 780
Nominal Shear Stress in Bearing-Type Connections (threads not excluded from

shear planes):
= 414
Nominal Shear Stress in Bearing-Type Connections (threads excluded from
shear planes):
= 520
Tip
It is always conservative to consider for bearing type connections threads not
excluded from shear planes.
2.4.b.
Bolt detailing
1.
Minimum Spacing
According to AISC360-05 Specification, J.3.3,the distance between centers of

standard, oversized or slotted holes, shall not be less than
8
3
, = nominal
diameter of the fastener. It is preferred to use a distance of 3.

2.
Minimum Edge Distance
According to AISC360-05 Specification, J.3.4, the distance from the center of a

standard hole to an edge of a connected part in any direction shall not be less
than, either the applicable value from table J3.4M or, as required in Section
J3.10.
2-14
Minimum Edge Distance(a), mm, from center of standard hole(b) to edge of

connected part.
Table J3.4 M of AISC 360-05 Specification
Bolt Diameter (mm)
At sheared edges
At rolled edges of plates,

shapes or bars,
or thermally cut edges(c)
16
28
22
20
34
26
22
38
(d)
28
24
42(d)
30
27
48
34
30
52
38
36
64
46
Over 36
1.75d
1.25
Notes: (a) Smaller edge distances are permitted to be used provided section J3.10 of AISC 360-05, as
appropriate, is satisfied. (b) For oversized or slotted holes, see table J3.5M of AISC 360-05. (c) All edge
distances are permitted to be reduced by 3 mm when the hole is at a point where required strength does
not exceed 25 percent of the maximum strength in the element. (d) It is permitted to have 32 mm at the
ends of the beam connection angles and shear end plates.
Table 2.4-4: Minimum edge distance (mm) from center of standard hole to
edge of connected part, for several bolt diameters (mm). Re. AISC360-05
Specification, table J3.4M.
3.
Maximum Spacing and Edge Distance
According to AISC360-05, J.3.5, the maximum distance from the center of any
bolt or rivet to the nearest edge of parts in contact shall be 12 times the
thickness of the connected part under consideration, but shall not exceed 150
mm. The longitudinal spacing of fasteners between elements that are in
continuous contact consisting of a plate and a shape or two plates shall be as
follows:
a) For painted members or unpainted members not subject to corrosion,
the spacing shall not exceed 24 times of the thickness of the thinner
plate or 305 mm
b) For unpainted members of weathering steel subject to atmospheric
corrosion, the spacing shall not exceed 14 times the thickness of the
thinner plate or 180 mm.
2-15
4.
Usual Minimum Free Distances
Taking into account the previous information and Chilean practice, the
following table shows the minimum spacing between bolts centers and
minimum edge distances:
Typical minimum bolt spacing and edge distances (Chilean
Practice)
e3
e1
3d
e4
e2
3d
1,75d
1,5d
1,25d
1,5d
1,25d
1,25d
Table 2.4-5: Usual minimum distances between bolts and plates edges
(Re. ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures, Table 3-1)
Where
a = edges cutted with scissors or torch,
b = parts with edged plates mill and with brushed edges,
c = parts with edged plates mill.
A scheme to be used with the table above is presented:
Ru
2-16
Usual gage and other recommended dimensions:

(Re. ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures):
Flanges
Cold Formed Angles
Gage
Diameter
emx
(mm)
g
(mm)
g1
(mm)
g2
(mm)
dmx
(mm)
d1mx
(mm)
g
(mm)
dmx
(mm)
25
15
15
30
19
19
35
22
40
3,5
25
25
10
45
4,5
30
50
30
10
30
10
55
35
10
60
35
12
65
40
14
35
16
70
40
16
75
50
16
80
50
16
45
22
90
55
20
100
10
60
24
55
27
125
12
70
60
40
24
14
150
14
80
70
50
27
18
175
16
90
80
60
27
20
200
18
100
90
70
30
24
H or B
(mm)
Thickness
Gages
Rolled Angles
Diameters
Table 2.4-6: Gages: Angle cross sections Cold formed and Rolled Shapes.
(Re. ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures, Table 3-1-a)
2-17
The following figures show the terms used in Table 2.4-6 (cold formed and
rolled angles respectively):
Cold formed sections, stiffened flanges:

Gage type
Recommended gages
Maximum diameter of bolt
Simple (1 hole)
g >= 3e + 1,5d.
Preferably use g = B/2
B/3 -2e
Double (2 holes)
Multiple (n holes)
g1>= 3e + 1,5d. g2 >= 2,67d.

Preferably use g2 >= 3d
(B-6e)/5,67
3(B-6e)/(8n +1)
Table 2.4-7: Recommended gages for folded shapes with stiffened flanges.
(Re. ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures, Table 3-1-b)
Following figures show the terms used in Table 2.4-7:
2-18
5.
Entering and tightening clearance (in) for conventional bolts

(Re. AISC Manual of Steel Construction, 13th Ed. Table 7-16)
When an impact wrench is used, the following minimum clearances are

required:
Aligned bolts:
Entering and tightening Clearance (in.) - Aligned ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts
C3
Nominal Bolt
Dia.
Socket Dia.
5/8
1 3/4
25/64
1 1/4
3/4
2 1/4
15/32
1 3/8
7/8
2 1/2
35/64
2 5/8
1 1/8
H1
H2
C1
C2
Circular
Clipped
1 11/16
11/16
9/16
1 1/4
3/4
3/4
11/16
1 1/2
1 3/8
7/8
7/8
13/16
39/64
1 5/8
1 7/16
15/16
7/8
2 7/8
11/16
1 7/8
1 9/16
1 1/6
1 1/8
1 1/4
3 1/8
25/32
1 11/16
1 1/8
1 1/4
1 1/8
1 3/8
3 1/4
27/32
2 1/8
1 3/4
1 1/4
1 3/8
1 1/4
1 1/2
3 1/2
15/16
2 1/4
1 7/8
1 5/16
1 1/2
1 5/16
Table 2.4-8: Entering and tightening clearance for aligned ASTM A325 and
A490 Bolts.
The following figure shows the terms of Table 2.4-8:
H1
C1
H2
C1
C2
C2
H2
fillet
C3
2-19
Staggered bolts:
Stagger P (in.)
F
5/8
3/4
Nominal Bolt Diameter (in.)

7/8
1
1 1/8
1 1/4
1 3/8
1 1/2
1 5/8
1 1/8
1 1/2
1 1/4
1 1/2
1 15/16
1 3/8
1 7/16
1 7/8
2 3/16
1 1/2
1 1/4
1 13/16
2 1/8
2 5/16
1 5/8
1 1/4
1 3/4
2 1/16
2 5/16
2 9/16
1 3/4
1 3/16
1 11/16
2 1/4
2 9/16
2 13/16
1 7/8
1 1/8
1 9/16
1 15/16
2 3/16
2 1/2
2 3/4
3 3/4
1 1/2
1 13/16
2 1/8
2 7/16
2 3/4
2 15/16
3 1/4
2 1/8
13/16
1 3/8
1 11/16
2 3/8
2 11/16
2 15/16
3 3/16
2 1/4
1 1/4
1 9/16
1 7/8
2 1/4
2 5/8
2 7/8
3 3/16
2 3/8
1 1/8
1 1/2
1 3/4
2 1/8
2 1/2
2 13/16
3 1/8
2 1/2
7/8
1 3/8
1 5/8
2 7/16
2 3/4
3 1/16
2 5/8
1 3/16
1 1/2
1 15/16
2 5/16
2 7/8
2 3/4
15/16
1 3/8
1 7/8
2 1/8
2 1/2
2 7/8
2 7/8
1 3/16
1 3/4
2 1/16
2 3/8
2 13/16
7/8
1 5/8
2 1/4
2 11/16
3 1/8
1 1/2
1 7/8
2 1/8
2 1/2
3 1/4
1 1/4
1 3/4
2 3/8
3 3/8
15/16
1 5/8
1 15/16
2 1/4
3 1/2
1 3/8
1 3/4
2 1/8
3 5/8
1 1/16
1 9/16
1 5/16
1 7/8
3 3/4
3 7/8
1 11/16
1 3/8
Table 2.4-9: Entering and tightening clearance for staggered ASTM A325 and
A490 Bolts.
2-20
Where
H1: height of the head.
H2: maximum shank extension (based on the use of one ASTM F436 washer).
C1: clearance for tightening.
C2: clearance for entering.
C3: clearance for fillet (based on the use of one ASTM F436 washer).
P: bolt stagger.
F: clearance for tightening staggered bolts.
The following figure defines the terms of Table 2.4-9:
C1
P
F
Cf = tightening
clearance
standard
socket
2.4.c.
Limit States in Bolted Joints
1.
Shear and Tensile Strength
See AISC360-05 Specification, J3.6.

2.
Combined Shear and Tension
a) In Bearing Type Connections: see AISC360-05 Specification, J3.7.

b) In Slip-Critical Connections: see AISC360-05 Specification, J3.9.
2-21
3.
Bearing

4.
Slip Resistance

5.
Connected elements (or plates)
For affected elements of members and connecting elements, see J.4 of

AISC360-05 Specification. In that case the limit states are:
-
Strength of Elements in Tension (J.4.1)
Strength of Elements in Shear (J.4.2)
Block Shear Strength (J.4.3)
Strength of Elements in Compression (J.4.4)
2.4.d.
Seismic Requirements for Bolted Joints:
1.
AISC341-05 Seismic Provision Requirements
For bolted joints, see section 7.2:
All bolts shall be high-strength bolts.

All bolts shall meet the requirements for slip-critical faying surfaces
(class A).
Standard or slotted-short holes perpendicular to the force action shall
be used.
See section 7.2 for special provisions for braces and prequalified
moment connections
The available shear strength of bolted joints using standard holes,
shall be calculated according to AISC360-05 J.3.7 and J.3.10 (bearing
type), except that the nominal bearing strength at bolt holes shall not
be taken greater than 2.4 .
Important: Bolts and welds shall not be designed to share force in a joint or
the same force component in a connection.
2-22
2.
NCh2369.Of2003 Code Requirements
For bolted joints, according to section 8.5.1, bolts for seismic constructions
shall be type ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 (or equivalent).
According to section 8.5.6, bolts for seismic constructions shall have the
adequate pretension for slip-critical type union. However, the strength of
bolted connections can be calculated as the strength corresponding to bearing
type unions.
2.4.e.
References
Arze, Recin y Asociados, Ingenieros Consultores, 2000. Manual de
Diseo para Estructuras de Acero (ICHA Manual for the Design of
Steel Structures). Instituto Chileno del Acero (ICHA), Santiago, Chile.
2-23
2-24
2.5.
Welded Connections
2.5.a.
Fillet welds
Fillet welds are used for joining parallel plates or T shapes. Fillet welds are
always PJP type.
T joint
Traslaped joint
Figure 2.5-1: Commonly used fillet welds.

1.
Effective Area
(Re. AISC 360-05, J2.2a)
The effective area of a fillet weld shall be the effective length multiplied by the
effective throat. The effective throat of a fillet weld shall be the shortest
distance from the root to the face of the weld.
=
the effective throat in a fillet weld (for FCAW, GMAW, SMAW processes) is
shown in the following figure:
teff = 0,707 t
Figure 2.5-2: Effective width in the fillet weld for FCAW, GMAW, SMAW
processes. =leg dimension (named also ), = effective throat of a fillet
weld.
Note: in SAW process for < 3/8" = , and for 3/8" = + 0.11"
2-25
For fillet welds in holes and slots, the effective length shall be the length of the
centerline of the weld along the center of the plane through the throat.
In case of overlapping fillets, the effective area shall not exceed the nominal
cross-sectional area of the hole or slot, in the plane of the faying surface.
2.
Limitations
(Re. AISC 360-05, J2.2b)
Minimum fillet weld size:

The minimum size of the fillet welds shall not be less than the size required to
transmit calculated forces, nor the size shown in table J2.4 (see
Table 2.5-). These provisions do not apply to fillet weld reinforcements of PJP
or CJP groove welds.
Minimum Size of Fillet Welds - Table J2.4 AISC 360-05 Specification
Material of the Thinner Part Joined (mm)
Minimum Size of Fillet Weld
To 6 inclusive
Over 6 to 13
Over 13 to 19
Over 19
(mm)
(a) Leg dimension of fillet welds. Single pass welds must be used
Table 2.5-1: Minimum size of Fillet Welds. (Re. AISC 360-05, Table J2.4).
Maximum fillet weld size:
According to the following figure for fillet welds along edges (Re. AISC 360-05,
J2.2b):
tp
tw
Figure 2.5-3: Maximum fillet weld size. =thickness of the plate,

=fillet weld size.
2-26
If < 6 =
If 6 = 2 (See exception in AISC 360-05, Section J2-2b)
Minimum length of fillet welds:
The minimum effective length of fillet welds designed on the basis of strength
must meet:
= 4
If longitudinal fillet welds are used alone in end connections of flat-plate
tension members, the length of each fillet weld shall be not less than the
perpendicular distance between them. For the effective area in this case, see
AISC 360-05, Table D3.1.
Figure 2.5-4: Longitudinal fillet welds. It is required that L>w.

(Re. AISC 360-05 Commentary, Fig. C-J2.2)
For end-loaded fillet welds:
If L= length of the weld<100 : it is permitted to take =
If L= length of the weld >100 take = , = 1.2 0.002
1.0 .
When the length L of the weld exceeds 30 times the leg size , use
= 0.6.
Lap joints:
The lap shall be five times the thickness of the thinner part (plate) joined, but
not less than 25 mm.
For lap joints joining plates or bars subjected to axial stress that use
transverse fillet welds only, see AISC 360-05, section J2.2b.
2-27
Fillet welds terminations:

Fillet welds are permitted to be stopped short or extend to the ends or sides of
parts or be boxed except as limited by the following:
1.
For lap joints in which one connected part extends beyond an edge of
another connected part that is subject to calculated tensile stress,
fillet weld shall terminate not less than the size of the weld from that
edge.
Figure 2.5-5: Fillet welds near tension edges.

According to AISC 360-05 Commentary, where framing angles extend beyond
the end of the beam web to which they are welded, the free end of the beam
is subject to zero stress; thus, it is permissible for the fillet weld to extend
continuously across the top end, along the side and along the bottom end of
the angle to the extreme end of the beam.
Figure 2.5-6: Fillet welds details on framing angles.

2-28
2.
For connections where flexibility of the outstanding elements is

required, when end returns are used, the length of the return shall
exceed neither 4 times the nominal size of the weld nor half the width
of the part.
Figure 2.5-7: Flexible connection returns optimal unless subject to fatigue.

Note: W = weld size. The use of returns is optional.
3.
4.
Fillet welds joining transverse stiffeners to plate girder webs 19 mm

thick or less shall end not less than four times nor more than six
times the thickness of the web from the web toe of the web-to-flange
welds, except where the end of stiffeners are welded to the flange.
Fillet welds that occur on opposite sides of a common plane, shall be
interrupted at the corner common to both welds.
Figure 2.5-8: Details for fillet welds that occur on opposite sides of a common
plane.(Re. AISC 360-05 Commentary, Fig. C-J2.9)
Note: According to AISC 360-05 Commentary, End returns are not essential
for developing the capacity of fillet welded connections and have a negligible
effect on their strength.
2-29
2.5.b.
Groove welds
Groove welds are used for attach top plates. They can be CJP (complete joint
penetration groove welds) or PJP (partial joint penetration groove welds). See
the following figure:
CJP
PJP
Figure 2.5-9: Commonly used groove welds.

1.
Effective Area
(Re. AISC260-05, J2.1a)

The effective area of groove welds shall be considered as the length of the
weld times the effective throat thickness.
The effective throat of PJP Groove welds is shown on the following table:
Effective Throat of PJP Groove Welds - Table J2.1 of AISC 360-05 Specification
Welding
Process
Shielded Metal
Arc (SMAW)
Gas Metal Arc
(GMAW)
Flux Cored Arc
(FCAW)
Submerged Arc
(SAW)
Gas Metal Arc
(GMAW)
Flux Cored Arc
(FCAW)
Shielded Metal
Arc (SMAW)
Gas Metal Arc
(GMAW)
Flux Cored Arc
(FCAW)
Welding Position F(flat),

H(horiz.), V(vert.),
OH(overhead)
All
All
All
F
Groove Type
(AWS D1.1,
Figure 3.3)
J or U Groove
60 V
J or U Groove
60 V
J or U Groove
60 V
J or U Groove
60 Bevel or V
Effective Throat
Depth of Groove
Depth of Groove
Depth of Groove
Depth of Groove
F,H
45 Bevel
Depth of Groove
F,H
45 Bevel
Depth of Groove
All
45 Bevel
Depth of Groove Minus 3 mm
V,OH
45 Bevel
V,OH
45 Bevel
Table 2.5-2: Effective throat of PJP groove welds.

(Re. AISC 360-05, Table J2.1)
2-30
For flare groove welds, see AISC 360-05, section J2-1a.
2.
Limitations
(Re. AISC260-05, J2.1b)
Minimum effective throat thickness for PJP groove weld shall not be less than
the size required to transmit calculated forces, nor the size shown in the
following table. Minimum weld size is determined by the thinner of the two
parts joined.
Minimum Effective Throat Thickness of PJP Groove Welds- Table J2.3 AISC
360-05 Specification
Material of the Thinner Part Joined (mm)
Minimum Effective Throat

Thickness (mm) - See table J2.1
To 6 inclusive
Over 6 to 13
Over 13 to 19
Over 19 to 38
Over 38 to 57
10
Over 57 to 150
13
Over 150
16
Table 2.5-3: Minimum effective throat thickness of PJP groove welds.

2.5.c.
Plug and slot welds
See AISC 360-05, section J2-3.

2.5.d.
Strength of weld
(Re. AISC 360-05, J2.4)

The design strength of welds shall be the lower value of the base material
and the weld metal strength, determined according to the limit states of
tensile rupture, shear rupture or yielding as follows:
2-31
Base metal:
=
= nominal strength of the base metal, per unit area (MPa)
= cross-sectional area of the base metal (mm2)
Weld metal:
=
= nominal strength of the weld metal, per unit area (MPa)
=effective area of the weld (mm2)
For fillet welds loaded in longitudinal shear, for example, we have the following
shear planes:
Figure 2.5-10: Shear planes for fillet welds loaded in longitudinal shear.
(Re. AISC 360-05, Fig. C-J2.10).
Values of , , , and limitations:
(Re.Table J2.5, AISC 360-05)
CJP Groove Welds:
For these welds, the strength of a joint made by CJP groove welds, whether
loaded in tension or compression, is dependent upon the strength of the base
metal, and no computation of the strength of the CJP groove weld is required.
See Table J2.5.
Note that for CJP welds, the limit state of weld metal strength will never
control since both the welds and the base metal have the same effective area,
and the filler metal is constrained to be stronger than the base metal.
Therefore, only the capacity of the base metal is of concern.
2-32
For tension applications, matching strength filler metal is required, as

defined in AWS D1.1 Table 3.1. For compression applications, up to 70 MPa
decrease in filler metal strength is permitted, which is equivalent to one
strength level.
CJP groove welds loaded in tension or compression parallel to the weld axis,
such as for the groove welded corners of box columns, do not transfer primary
load across the joint. In such cases, no computation of the strength of the CJP
groove weld strength is required.
PJP Groove Welds:
For PJP groove welds, the effective areas for the weld and base metal differ,
with the weld effective area being less than the base metal. If the welds
effective throat is small enough, then the weld will control over the base metal
strength. Refer to table J2.5.
Fillet Welds:
Refer to table J2.5, the shear strength of fillet welds is equal to 0.60FEXX and
the resistance factor is 0.75. The strength of the base metal is governed by
J4 and has to be checked.
As an alternative, for fillet welds loaded in plane:
is permitted to be determined as follows:
(Re. AISC 360-05, J2.4)
= 0.75
a)
For a linear weld group loaded in-plane through its center of gravity:
=
= 0.60 (1.0 + 0.50 sin1.5 )
=electrode tensile strength (MPa)
= angle of loading measured from the weld longitudinal axis,
degrees.
=effective area of the weld (mm2)
2-33
Note: a linear weld group is one in which all elements are in a line or are
parallel
Figure 2.5-11: Angle of loading for a linear weld group loaded in plane through
the center of gravity.
b)
For weld elements within a weld group that are loaded in-plane and
analyzed using and instantaneous center of rotation method, see
J2.4.
c)
For fillet weld groups concentrically loaded and consisting of elements

that are oriented both longitudinally and transversely to the direction
of the applied load, the combined strength of the fillet weld group
shall be determined as the greater of:
= + and = 0.85 + 1.5
Where:
= the total nominal strength of longitudinally loaded fillet welds, as
determined in accordance with Table J2.5 (N).
= the total nominal strength of transversely loaded fillet welds, as
determined in accordance with Table J2.5 (N).
2.5.e.
Combination of welds
(Re. AISC 360-05,J2.5)

If two or more of the general types of welds (groove, fillet, plug, slot) are
combined in a single joint, the strength of each shall be separately computed
with reference to the axis of the group in order to determine the strength of
the combination.
2-34
2.5.f.
Filler metal requirements:

(Re. AISC 360-05, J2.6)
For CJP subject to tension normal to the effective area shall comply with the
requirements for matching filler metal given in AWS D1.1. See Table 2.5-1.
Table 2.5-1: User note Table for filler metal requirements.

(Re. AISC 360-05, J2.6).
Filler metal with a specified Charpy V-Notch (CVN) toughness of 27 J at 4C
shall be used in the following joints:
1.
2.
2.5.g.
CJP groove welded T and corner joints with steel backing left in place,
subject to tension normal to the effective area, unless the joints are
designed using the nominal strength and resistance factor or safety
factor as applicable for PJP weld.
CJP welded splices subject to tension normal to the effective area in
heavy sections, as defined in A3.1c and A3.1d of the Specification.
Electrodes (AWS):
Commonly used electrodes are E60 and E70. EXX means that = XX
ksi.(electrode tensile strength).
2.5.h.
Symbology and common used welds:
Typically the use of prequalified welded joints is recommended because with

this type of weld, there is no need of doing the prequalification tests as
2-35
required by AWS codes. The regular nomenclature and the characteristics of

prequalified welds are shown in the following summary table:
Figure 2.5-12: Common prequalified used welds: symbology and typology.

(Re. Table 4-53 AWS D1.1 code).
2-36
2.5.i.
Detailing and Chilean Practice:
Geometry of weld access hole and cope:
tbf
6
4
5
5
4
1
3/4 MIN.
tbf
2
Figure 2.5-13: Geometry of access holes and beam copes.

(Re. FEMA 350 Recommended Seismic Design Criteria for New Steel MomentFrame Buildings).
Notes for the figure above:
1. Bevel as required for selected groove weld.
1
2.
Larger of or 13 mm (plus or minus ).
3.
4.
5.
10 mm minimum radius (plus not limited, minus 0).

3 ( 13 mm).
6.
See FEMA 353.
to , minimum ( 6 mm).
Also see section J1.6 of AISC 360-05: Beam copes and weld access holes
2-37
2.5.j.
Seismic Requirements for Welded Joints:
1.
NCh2369.Of2003 Code Requirements:
The electrodes and solder flux for SMAW process, must meet with AWS A5.1,
A5.5, A5.17, A5.18, A5.23 and A5.29.
(Re. NCh2369.0f2003, 8.5.1)
The electrodes must have a minimum tenacity of 27 J at -29C on Charpy
essay, according to ASTM A-6.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.1)
Groove welds in seismic-resistant unions must be CJP type. (Re.
NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.5).
Important:
Bolts and welds shall not be designed to share force in a joint or the same
force component in a connection.
2.
AISC 341-05 Seismic Provisions Requirements:
Demand critical welds are generally CJP welds, or are those welds where the
failure would result in significant degradation in strength and stiffness of the
SRLS. See AISC 341-05 Code, section 7.3 Welded Connections and the user
table for examples of welds designated as demand critical.
AISC 341-05 Commentary:
For desirable details that avoid shared forces between welds and joints see
Fig. C-I-7-1a on the commentary and for problematic bolted/welded
connections see Fig. C-I-7-1b on the commentary.
2-38
2.6.
Notation used in the manual
The following terms listed below are the most commonly used on the examples
of this Manual. Other terms not described in here will be properly defined on
each specific example.
2.6.a.
Loads
, , :
Dead (permanent) axial, shear and moment loads.
, , :
Live axial, shear and moment loads.
, , :
Seismic axial, shear and moment loads.
, , :
Special operation axial, shear and moment overloads;

defined on NCh2369.0f2003, section 3.1.15.
, , :
Accidental operation axial, shear and moment overloads;

defined on NCh2369.0f2003, section 3.1.16.
, , :
Factored axial, shear and moment loads; according to the

applicable building code (unless otherwise stated).
, , :
Required axial, shear and moment forces to be transferred

by the connection (unless otherwise stated.)
, , :
Nominal axial, shear and moment strength.
Plastic moment.
Nominal strength.
Factored required strength.
Note:
Sometimes, or are also used to define axial loads.
2.6.b.
Dimensions and others
Gap between structural elements.
2-39
Eccentricity, unless otherwise stated.
Distances for bolt positions, unless otherwise stated.
Stress, unless otherwise stated
Buckling or critical stress.
Elastic buckling stress.
Story height.
Coefficient of buckling length.
Distance between braces.
Clear distance of a structural element, as a column or beam.
R:
Modification factor of the structural response.
0 :
Horizontal seismic over strength factor.
Compact slenderness. See AISC 360-05 Specification.
Non-compact slenderness. See AISC 360-05 Specification.
2.6.c.
H built-up Chilean steel shape sections
bf
tf
y
s
tw
y
Figure 2.6-1: Chilean H-Shape section.
2-40
Notation: , where = ; = ; =weigth in

1.
Dimensions of the steel shape
Flange width.
Flange thickness.
:
0 :
:
:
:
Free distance between flanges.

Distance between flange centroids.
Section depth.
Web thickness.
Weld fillet used for building the shape.
Note:
In many examples these terms have subscripts to indicate the structural
element such as beam, column, brace, etc.
2.
Geometric properties of the steel shape
:
:
:
Section gross area.

Inertia moment about X axis.
Inertia moment about y-axis.
:
:
:
:
Torsional constant.
Warping constant.
Radius of gyration.
Thickness of the element.
=
=
: Web slenderness.
: Flange slenderness.
:
Plastic modulus.
= : Area of one flange.
= : Web area.
:
Bending elastic modulus.
Note:
In many examples there are subscripts joining this terms to indicate the
element (beam, column, brace, plate, etc.) property.
2.6.d.
Material notation
:
:
Young modulus of the material.

Yield strength of the material.
2-41
:
:
Tensile rupture stress of the material (tensile strength).

Factor to account for increase in stress due to strain hardening.
Expected yield stress of the material ( 1.0).
2.6.e.
Bolted connections
Gross area of a connector element.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Nominal area of a connector element.

Effective area of a connector element.
Bolt area.
Diameter for calculating .
Bolt diameter.
Nominal hole diameter.
Nominal hole diameter.
Nominal tensile stress from table J3.2.
Nominal shear stress from table J3.2.
Number of bolts in a connection, unless otherwise stated.
Number of bolts rows (for bolted connections aligned), unless
otherwise stated.
Number of slip planes.
:
=
Number of bolts per rows (for bolted connections aligned), unless
otherwise stated.
Number of bolts, unless otherwise stated.
2.6.f.
Welded connections
:
:
:
:
:
Electrode classification number (electrode strength).

Cross sectional area of the base metal.
Nominal stress strength of the base metal.
Effective area of the weld.
Nominal stress strength of the weld metal.
1.
Fillet welds
:
:
Fillet weld size.

Effective fillet weld throat size.
:
Fillet weld length.
or : Length of the weld, unless otherwise stated.
2-42
2.
Groove welds
CJP:
PJP:
Complete joint penetration groove weld.

Partial joint penetration groove weld.
2.6.g.
LRFD Design
Resistance factor. In LRFD design it is required that
2-43
2.7.
Units used on the manual
Posco E&C. uses principally the SI system, using Newton (N) or Kilo-Newton
(kN) for forces and millimeters (mm) for distances. For helping in calculations,
a conversion table between the SI unit system and customary United States
unit system is given.
Dimension
United States Units
SI Units
Distance
1 in (1)
25.4 mm
Force
1 kip
4.448 kN
Stress
1 ksi (1kip/in2)
6.894 N/mm2
Distance
1 ft (1)
12 in (12) = 317.5 mm
Force
1 lb.
0.00444 kN
Stress
1 MPa
1 N/mm2
Table 2.7-1: Units conversion table.
2-44
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
3. BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS

3.1.
Design requirements
3.1.a.
NCh2369.Of2003
Comply material specifications for steel and anchor bolts.

(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.2.1 and 8.2.2)
Note that careful inspection and reparation of these anchoring

systems should be performed after the occurrence of a major
earthquake. Also, anchor bolt deformation during strong seismic
events shall be allowed. These requirements imply that the use of
double base plates in columns is mandatory.
8d or 350 mm
Anchor bolts subjected to tension shall have chair (double base plate)
and must be visible to allow for inspection and repair, and the thread
shall have sufficient length to enable retightening of the nuts.
Therefore, anchors shall have a projection of at least 8 diameters and
no less than 250 mm measured from the base plate. The length of
the thread under the nut must be greater than 75 mm. See Figure
3-1.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.6.2)
75 mm (thread)
Shear key
Figure 3-1: Typical detail for the double base plate connection. Adapted from
NCh2369.Of2003; Figure A.1.
3-1
The exception to the previous requirement can be made when the bolts have
enough capacity to resist load combinations in which the seismic forces have
been amplified by 0.5R (but no more than 1.5 times) with respect to the value
indicated on sections 5 and 7 of the Chilean code.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.6.2)
Base plates of columns and equipment in general must be provided

with shear keys or seismic stoppers designed to transmit the 100% of
the base shear.
(Re. NC23609.Of2003, 8.6.3)
According to subsection a) of section 8.6.3, supports with shear force
less than 50 kN can resist this force with the anchor bolts but
considering that only two of the anchor bolts are active and using the
corresponding tension-shear interaction equations with the maximum
tension and shear calculated.
Grout resistance (and also thickness) must not be considered in the

design of the base plate.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.6.4)
The design of the shear anchor systems shall not take into account
the friction between the base plate and the foundation.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.6.5)
3-2
The strengths of the shear keys and the anchor bolts cannot be
added.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.6.6)
Ductile design: the concrete of the foundation must be designed to

resist the vertical and horizontal forces transmitted by the steel
anchor elements. The strength of the concrete and its reinforcements
must be such that the eventual failure occurs on the steel anchor
elements and not on the concrete.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.6.8)
3.1.b.
AISC 341-05
(Re. AISC 341-05, 8.5: Column Bases section)
1.
Required strength of the column bases and their attachments to the

foundation
Required Axial Strength:

(compression axial strength) and (tension axial strength) should be the
summation of the vertical components of the required strengths of the steel
elements that are connected to the column base (i.e. the column axial required
resistance according to section 8.3 of AISC341-05, depending on the type of
system, and the vertical components of the required strengths of the arriving
braces).
Required Shear Strength:
(required shear strength) shall be the summation of the horizontal
component of the required strengths of the steel elements that are connected
to the column base:
For a single column, 8.5b(2) applies:
min
(2 /, )
Where is the story height and is the shear load calculated using the
combinations of the applicable building code, including the amplified seismic
load.
Required Flexural Strength:
(required flexural strength) shall be the summation of the required
strengths of the steel elements that are connected to the column base:
For a single column, 8.5c(2) applies:
min
(1.1 , )
Where is the moment calculated using the combinations of the applicable
building code, including the amplified seismic load.
3-3
Note:
To understand the hypotheses and origin of these design forces, and how do
the base plate connections work, it is important to read the commentary of
section 8.5 of AISC341-05.
2.
Available strength of the anchor bolts
According to AISC 341-05, this strength shall be determined from AISC 36005 J3 section, for bolt and threaded parts in connections. Appendix D of
AIC318 code also shows expressions for the tensile and shear strength of the
anchor bolts.
3.
Available strength of the concrete elements (including anchor rod

embedment and reinforcing steel)
Refer to Appendix D of ACI 318 Code. This is not presented on this example.
3.1.c.
AISC 360-05
Column Bases and Bearing on Concrete

(Re. AISC 360-05, J8)
There are formulas to be used (in absence of code regulations) for calculating
the design bearing strength of the concrete for the limit state of concrete
crushing (with = 0.6). The nominal bearing strength is determined as follows:
a)
On the full area of a concrete support:

= 0.85 1
b)
On less than the full area of a concrete support:

= 0.85 1 2 /1 1.7 1
Where 1 = are of steel concentrically bearing on a concrete support, and 2 =

maximum area of the portion of the supporting surface that is geometrically
similar to and concentric with the loaded area.
Anchor rods and embedments
(Re. AISC 360-05, J9)
-Anchor rods shall be designed to provide the required resistance to loads on

the completed structure at the base of columns including the net tensile
components of any bending moments that may result from load combinations.
3-4
-Anchor rods shall be designed in accordance with the requirement for

threaded parts in table J3.2.
Note: In the case of the following numerical example, the design of the anchor
bolts will be made according to ACI 318, Appendix D.
- Hole sizes and washer dimensions for anchor rods: from the AISC Manual of
Steel Construction.
3.2.
Recommendations from AISC Manual of Steel Construction (13 th

Edition)
(Re. Part 14 of the AISC Manual of Steel Construction)
Holes for anchor rods and grouting:

-An adequate washer plate should be provided for each anchor rod.
-When large base plates are used (and also when shear keys are used), there
should be grout holes to prevent air pockets (except when the grout is drypacked). These grout holes must be placed near the center of the plate.
-Recommended anchor rod holes are presented on table 14-2 of the Manual:
Recommended Maximum Sizes for Anchor-Rod Holes in Base Plates

Anchor Rod
Max. Hole
Min. Washer
Min. Washer
diameter (in)
Diameter (in)
Size (in)
Thickness (in)
1 5/16
7/8
1 9/16
2 1/2
5/16
1 13/16
3/8
2 1/16
2 5/16
3 1/2
2 3/4
5/8
3 1/4
3/4
3 3/4
5 1/2
7/8
Table 3-1: Recommended Maximum Sizes for Anchor-Rod Holes in Base Plates.
Adapted from Table 14-2 of AISC Manual of Steel Construction, 13th Ed.
3-5
Notes for Table 3-1:

1. Circular or square washers meeting the washer size are acceptable
2. Clearance must be considered when choosing an appropriate anchor rod
hole location, noting effects such as the position of the rod in the hole with
respect to the column, weld size and other interferences.
3. When base plates are less than 1 in thick, punching of holes may be an
economical option. In this case, 3/4 in anchor rods and 1 1/16 in diameter
punched holes may be used with ASTM F844 (USS Standard) washers.
Anchor rods:
-Cast-in place anchor rods are generally made from unheaded rod material or
headed bolt material. There are three common types of cast-in-place anchor
rods as seen on Figure 14-8 of the Manual (hooked, headed and headed with
nut).
-Minimum edge distances, embedment length and the design of the anchorage
into the concrete are covered on ACI 318 code.
-When anchor rods are required for a calculated tensile force T (probably due
to large seismic forces), a better anchorage is made with headed anchor rods
(see Figure 14-8b of the Manual).
Washer plates:
-Because base plates typically have holes larger than the oversized holes to
allow for tolerances on the location of the anchor rod, washers are usually
made from ASTM A36 steel plate. They may be round, square or rectangular
and they have holes that generally are 1/16 in larger than the anchor rod
diameter. The thickness must be suitable for the forces to be transferred. See
Table 14-2 of the manual for minimum washer sizes.
3.3.
Example: fixed column double base plate subjected to various

types of loads.
Design a base plate connection for the connection shown in Figure 3-2.
Suppose that bending is about the strong axis for the wide flange column
shown. The column is a H 350 x 350 x 165.6 Chilean shape.
Use A345 ESP steel, required for constructions subjected to dynamical loading,
according to NCh203.Of2006 code, Table 3. Anchor rods are ASTM F1554 Gr
36. Concrete of the foundation is H30.
3-6
The column is located such that no free edges of concrete foundation are
near its position. Story height is = 5 .
Suppose that the column has been properly designed for resisting the forces
given by the load combinations of the applicable building code including the
amplified seismic load (in this case, the NCh2369.Of2003 Load Combinations
unless otherwise noted). These loads, at the base of the column and about the
major axis of the column are (convention is that compression loads are
positive sign):
Combination 1 (uplift):
= 0 , = 1000
Note for combination 1:
The uplift combination will typically control de design of anchor bolts since
they take the total of the tensile force and transmit it to the concrete
foundation. The design of the anchor bolts includes the anchorage to concrete.
The reference for that design is Appendix D of ACI 318 Code. Then, the
combinations for determining the uplift force should be taken from ACI 318
Code (or similar). In order to determine the maximum uplift force, typically
the combination 0.9D 1.4(EH + EV) controls. EH is the horizontal earthquake
action and EV the vertical earthquake action.
Combination 2:
= 500000 , = 1000
Check immediately the AISC 341 requirements for determine the design forces
for combination 2:
= 1.1 for A345 steel, similar to ASTM A572 Gr50 steel:
(Re. AISC 341-05, Table I-6-1)
1.1 = 1299939
Therefore the design loads for combination 2 are:
2 min 1.1 , = 500000 2 = 1000
Combination 3:
= 200000 , = 2000
3-7
Check immediately the AISC 341 requirements for determine the design forces
for combination 3:
1.1 = 1299939
Therefore the design loads for combination 3 are:
3 min 1.1 , = 200000 3 = 2000
Shear force:
= 150
Check immediately the AISC 341 requirements for determine the shear design
force (the story height is 5000 mm):
Therefore:
2
= 473
min 2 /, = 150
Notes:
1. For this example, the design of the anchorage to the concrete foundation
(regarding to anchor bolts) will not be taken into account For that topic
refer to Appendix D of ACI 318-05 and ACI 318-11 codes, and make a
ductile design.
2. This example will consider the detailing requirements of NCh2369.Of2003
and the design forces will be taken from the provisions of AISC 341-05
code, as shown above. Note that when NCh2369.Of2003 is used for the
determination of the design forces, appropriate load combinations from
that code shall be used.
3-8
3.3.a.
General view of the connection

Mu
A
Pu
A-A section
B-B section
Vu
Figure 3-2: Connection to be designed.

3.3.b.
Section and materials properties
H 350 x 350 x 165.6

= 350 , = 350 , = 25 , = 12 , = 6
= 21100 2 , = 3114000 3 , = 152 , = 92 , = 3830000 4
(Re. ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures, Table 2.1.1)
A345 ESP:
(Re. Table 3, NCh203.Of.2003)
= 345 , = 450
ASTM F1554 Gr36 (anchor bolts):
= 250 , = 400
Note: To provide ductility, the anchor bolts must be made from a ductile
material. ASTM F1554 Gr36 bolts have a minimum ultimate elongation of 23%.
3-9
3.3.c.
1.
Design procedure
Uplift forces
= 1000
Determine the number of bolts and bolt area needed. From ACI 318-08 the
anchor bolt tensile strength is:
= ,
(Re. ACI 318-08 Code, Eq.D-3).
Where:
= number of bolts, , = effective cross-sectional area of an anchor bolt in
tension.
= 400 min 1.9 , 860 = 475 (Re. ACI 318-08 Code, D.5.1.2)
Use a reduction strength factor = 0.75 (anchorage supposed to be controlled
by the resistance of a ductile element, ACI 318-08, section D4.4). =
250 is the specified tensile yield stress of the anchor steel. The , term
can be obtained from table 7-18 of AISC Manual of Steel Construction :
Threading Dimension for High Strength and Non-High Strength Bolts. For more
information, seeAISC Design Guide N1.
Try anchor rods of 1 in (38 mm). Therefore, , = 1.405 2 = 906 2 . The
required number of bolts is:
=
Notes:
3-10
= 3.7 = 4
,
According to the AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13th Ed., use at

least 4 bolts.
The design of the upper base plate and vertical stiffeners (see Figure
3-2) shall be carried out for the anchor bolt tension capacity
computed according to ACI 318 Appendix D. Note that the ductile
behavior requirement implies that the anchor bolt shall be the first
element to reach the nominal strength. Also, ACI 318 code considers
and additional 0.75 factor for reducing the nominal anchor tensile
strength associated with concrete brittle failure modes (not developed
on this example).
For 1 in (38 mm) anchor rods, the corresponding hole size is 2

5/16 in (59 mm) according to Table 3-1 of this chapter. Also, the
corresponding washer plate size is 3 in (89 mm).
Consider the following figure to place the anchor bolts:

sedge
s edge
bedge
g
bf
B
Figure 3-3: Base plate configuration.

Place the anchor bolts complying with the minimum distances as said on ACI
318 Code, App. D:
-Center to center distance between anchor bolts: 4 = 152 , with =
anchor bolt diameter (suppose untorqued cast-in anchor rods).
Use = . Also:
=
=
=
Therefore, base plate dimensions are:
= + + =
= + =
Note:
No minimum edge distance is considered, because in this example the column
is supposed to be away from pedestal edges.
3-11
Design of upper plate:

It is designed as a continuous beam. Consider the following model:
( =
= 175 , = = 175 ):
Y
M2
X
A
X
R
M1
M1
Figure 3-4: (a) Model for the design of the upper plate and vertical stiffener,
(b) Moment diagram due to anchor rods capacity on the upper plate.
From the previous figure, the reactions are ( = , = 363 ):
11
=
= 499
8
5
=
= 113
16
Maximum moment values are:
1 =
5
32
= 9914 and 2 =
3
16
= 11897
Dimensions of the upper plate are:

Use thickness: = and width: = + =
Check the flexural yielding limit:
= 0.9
2
4
= 13274 > = 11897
OK
Design of vertical stiffeners:

Design the vertical stiffeners as columns. Use an effective length factor k=1.0
(conservative):
The maximum reaction is = 499
Try height, thickness
requirements):
and
width
(comply
with
NCh2369.Of2003
= max 8 , 250 = 304

3-12
code
OK
=
= + =
Therefore (refer to Chapter E of AISC 360-05):
/ =
3

12
12
= 7.22 . Then,
= 42.3 < 4.71 / = 113.4
= 0.658 = 303 = 0.9 = 1294 > = 499
OK
Notes:
Note that vertical stiffeners shall also be checked for the compression
on the base plate for (M,P) combinations (see following sections in
this chapter), therefore the value shall be checked after again.
The welded connections of the vertical stiffeners and upper plates

shall be designed considering the anchor bolt capacity. The design of
these welds will not be made on this example.
3-13
2.
M,N combinations
The anchor bolts shall be designed for resisting also the tensile forces coming
from the moment on the base and, if present, the uplift force T (see previous
section). For the calculation of the bearing stress distribution under the base
plate and the forces acting on the anchor bolts, refer to the following figure:
N
d
bf
bedge
P
M
(N/2 -bedge)
(N/2 - A/3)
fp
Notes:
N'
Figure 3-5: Definition of variables for M,N action on a base plate.

Adapted from AISC Design Guide # 1. Figure B.3.
There are many different ways of assuming the distribution of bearing
stresses under the base plate (e.g. uniform, linear, parabolic). In this
example it has been assumed a linear distribution as on AISC Design
Guide # 1. For more information see the AISC Design Guide # 1 (2nd
Ed), sections 3.3, 3.4 and Appendix B.
The triangular (linear) distribution does not in and of itself represent
an elastic design.
Static equilibrium gives:

2

: + =

2
3
(distance between the tension force and the column center).
: + =
3-14
Solve both equations to obtain a quadratic expression for the bearing distance:

6

3
2 4
( +)
(minimum of the positive real roots).
Where:
=
(as a supposition of the design method, to calculate use the
expression for the available bearing strength of AISC 360-05, section J8).
The resulting tensile load on the anchor bolts is =
. Check it against
the tensile capacity of the bolts. Note that if the distance is equal or greater
than , the bolts are not subjected to tension and mostly all the base plate is
under compression. In that case, it is possible to neglect the action of the
bolts.
For the cases when there is mainly compression between the base plate and
the foundation, the Guide proposes a different method of analysis:
If =
<
the base plate is a small base plate and no tension exists. For that
case, the base pressures can be evaluated as:

=
1+
0.85 = 0.6 0.85

(Full area of a concrete support. AISC 360-05, Eq. J8-1)
After evaluating the compression over the base plate and the tension
on the bolts, check the bending behavior on the base plate (i.e. check
the thickness of the base plate) considering an appropriate critical
section. Also, tension on the bolts shall be checked.
Combination 2:
2 = 500000 , 2 = 2 = 1000
Base plate dimensions from previous section (bending about the strong axis of
the column):
= 730 , = 375
3-15
First, determine the available bearing strength:

= 0.60 0.85 1
2
1
0.60 1.7 1
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J8-2)
1 = area of steel concentrically bearing on a concrete support.

2 =maximum area of the (concrete) portion of the supporting surface that is
geometrically similar and concentric with the loaded area. Assume
Therefore, =
= 0.60 0.85
2
1
2
1
=4
= 25.5 0.60 1.7 = 25.5
The eccentricity of the loads is:

=
= 500 > = 122
= = 295
2

=
= 3156
2
= = 660
The bearing distance is then = 296

The resulting tensile load on the anchor bolts is then (only 2 bolts are
working):
=
1
2
2 = 208 , = 272 , = 0.75
OK
Check the base plate at an appropriate critical section:
ly
lx
Figure 3-6: (a) Section for bending analysis of the base plate (vertical
stiffeners shown), (b) Slab Model (three fixed and one free edges)
Use any reasonable method to solve the maximum moments on the Slab
Model.
3-16
Using tables for calculating the slab moments per mm of width (Stiglat &
Wippel book) for the case shown in the figure above.
= 175 , = 1.09 = 12.7

2
= = 848 =
= 67
= + = 190 , =
(Assume conservatively that the critical value of is constant all over the
slab).
The design condition is that: = 0.9 (
2
4
) > .
4
= 29.3 =
0.9
Check the vertical stiffeners with the force produced by the concrete pressure:
Assume conservatively that is uniform in all the length of the upper plate
projection on the base plate. The model is the following:
f
X
Figure 3-7: Determination for the concrete pressure reaction on the vertical
stiffeners.
= + = 4.85
The reactions are:
, = = 175
= 1.25 = 1060 , = 2 = 636 .

Then:
max , = 1060 < = 1294
OK
3-17
Combination 3:
3 = 200000 ,
3 = 3 = 2000
Base plate dimensions from previous section (bending about the strong axis of
the column):
= 730 , = 375
The eccentricity of the loads is:
= = 100 < = 122
6
=
1+
= 13.31 > = 0.60 0.85 = 12.8
Increase the width of the base plate: use = = + =

. With this new width, all the verifications for combination 2 are OK.
Now:
6
=
1+
= 12.64 < = 12.8
Check the base plate at an appropriate critical section. See Figure 3-6.
Using tables for the determination of this slab moments (Stiglat & Wippel
book):
= + = 190 , = 175 , = 1.09 = 12.7
= = 420 =
= 33
(Assume conservatively that the critical value of is constant all over the
slab).
The design condition is that: = = 0.9 (
=
2
4
) > .
4
= 21 =
0.9
Check the vertical stiffeners with the force produced by the concrete pressure:
Assume conservatively that is uniform in all the length of the upper plate
projection on the base plate. The model is the same shown in Figure 3-7.
= + = 2.40 /, =
3-18
= 175
2
The reactions are: = 1.25 = 525 , = 2 = 315

Then:
max , = 525 < = 1294
3.
OK
Shear
= 150
Discussion:
When shear keys are used (see limit of 50 kN on the NCh2369.Of2003 code),
the anchor rods are supposed not to resist in shear. The shear is only carried
out by the shear key; and therefore it is necessary to separate the axialmoment design from the shear design.
The shear key design shall be made considering a uniform stress due to
bearing with concrete (for transferring from the column to the concrete
foundation). For ductile behavior, the shear key must yield before the concrete
crushes in bearing.
If designing a shear key corresponding to a single plate (fixed to the base
plate), the plastic flexural behavior (if the plate has the adequate slenderness)
will be concentrated near the fixed en (plastic hinge region). Then, the
strength of the shear key corresponds to the plastic strength of the single
plate.
When large earthquakes are expected; the direction of the shear loading is not
known. Therefore, there is the need for a shear key which resists in two
perpendicular directions, and its capacity should be verified in this both
directions.
An example of one of those shear keys is the cruciform shape. In this case it is
not so clear that the plastic behavior under a uniform load will occur near the
fixed edge. The reason is that, there is a very stiff element at the middle of the
face of the plate. Although at both sides of the middle stiff element it can
occur yielding of the plates (ductile behavior), the stiff element can carry more
much load leading to a non-ductile global behavior.
For this case, the capacity of the shear keys shall be determined considering
appropriate boundary conditions and considering the minimum load being able
to be transferred, according to the failure mechanism.
3-19
For example, the capacity of the shear key can be estimated

assuming various yield lines paths:
t1
t2
Hsk
G (grout)
1
4
3
2
5
Bsk
Figure 3-8: Assumed yield lines for shear key cruciform shape.
Elevation view.
It is known that =
2
4
= (
22
).
4
It is possible to determine
on an assumed yield line its length . With this nominal moment,

it is possible to determine the required total shear to produce a
hinge on the corresponding yield line assuming that this
concentrated force is applied at the gravity center of the geometric
shape that is located within the yield line; the stiff perpendicular
element and the grout line (the distance between the yield line and
the gravity center of this shape could be easily estimated, and
therefore =
).
Another alternative is to assume that the behavior of the shear key

will not be ductile, and assume that the connection has been designed
in general for forces reduced by an R factor (response modification
factor); for the shear key case, those design forces could be amplified
by a factor that reflects the assumption of non-ductile behavior
(this is similar to using an R* response modification factor so that
R*<R. Therefore it is possible to use =
). This alternative is
going to be used on this example.

For example, assume that presented on the example has not been already
amplified by this factor.
Therefore use a new = 150 =
3
2
150 = 225 . (Suppose that
came from a shear force reduced by R=3, and for the shear key it has been
considered R*=2<3). The use of an amplification factor like this shall be
discussed within project specifications.
3-20
Trial sizes of the shear key:

The shear key will be located at the center of the base plate. Consider the
following figures:
B
Bsk
t1
Nsk
G
t2
N
Hsk
Vu
Figure 3-9: Shear key dimensions. Plan and elevation view.

= , = , = , = , =
= =
= = , = =
The uniform load acting on the face perpendicular to is =
(grout thickness is discounted).

Using only one side of the shear key face, the corresponding model is the
following:
Figure 3-10: Slab model for one side of the shear key face. Two embedded
sides and two free sides.
=
= 125 , = = 220
2
3-21
Note:
If the grout thickness is discounted, then the correct slab model is with a
loaded area in the height on the above figure, and not loaded near the
upper fixed edge. In this case, a conservative model has been used
considering all the loaded area in all the height .
From tables (Stiglat & Wippel book), use / = 1.76 = 3.81
Therefore the relation between the slab moment and the shear is:
Assuming a plastic behavior in bending (

= =
= 5.21 < 0.38
= 9.15),
2
= 50
4
It is expected that > . In the critical case: = and then solving for :
=
2
= 264

And therefore, the previous is the estimated capacity of the shear key.
Check that = 264 > 225
OK
Check the concrete strength:

For ductile behavior, the capacity of the shear key must be lesser than the
concrete bearing strength.
Note: The concrete bearing strength shall be calculated discarding the grout
thickness.
= 0.60 0.85 1
2
0.60 1.7 1
1
(Re. ACI 318-05, 10.14.1 Section)
Assume conservatively that 2 = 1 , therefore:
3-22
1 = 1 = 38420 2
= 490 > 264
OK
Weld of the shear Key to base plate

Consider the shear key capacity to design this connection. Assume that the
shear is carried out principally by the portion of the cruciform shape that it is
parallel to the action . Use fillet welds.
Determine the minimum required welding size. Assume that at each side of
the cruciform shape portion, there is a length of fillet weld (refer to Figure
3-11):
= = 0.75 0.6 0.707 2 > = 264
Use E70 electrode (0.6 = 289.5 /2 ) and L=150 mm to obtain:
>
= 5.74 = 6
0.75 0.6 0.707 2
Check with the minimum fillet weld size: Minimum thickness of the parts
joined= 1 , 2 , = 24 = 8 = .
Because can act in any direction, repeat the same fillet weld on the
perpendicular plate of the cruciform shape.
3-23
Figure 3-11: Fillet welds scheme on the cruciform shape for a vertical .
Check rupture of the base metal to develop weld strength for the shear key to
base plate weld
For shear keys:
= 0.75 0.6
= 0.75 0.6 1 = 1215 > = 0.6 0.707 2 = 491
With = 150 .
For base plate:
= 0.75 0.6 = 0.75 0.6 2
Base plate is thicker than the shear key, therefore this verification is OK.
Base plate to column weld
The connection of the column to the base plate is a bearing type one. As one
alternative, double sided fillet welds are used on a portion of the column web,
and single side fillet welds on the column flanges. Consider the following
figure:
3-24
Figure 3-12: Column to base plate fillet welds.

The uplift force acting on the first combination is supposed to be resisted by
the flange welds. Each fillet weld on the flanges shall be capable to resist:
1 =

= 500
2
Assume as an initial trial that the length of the flange fillet welds is = =
350 . The angle between weld axis and load is = 90.
= 0.75 = 0.75 1.5 0.6 0.707 > 1
6.2 =
For the load combinations with moment (2 and 3), the fillet welds on the
flanges shall be capable of transfer:
2 =
max
( )
= 1538

With max
( ) equal to the maximum moment from combinations 2 and 3.
The angle between weld axis and load is = 90.
= 0.75 = 0.75 1.5 0.6 0.707 > 2
19.1 =
Because of the shear force acting on the column (assumed to be resisted by
the web welds), the fillet welds on the column web shall be capable to transfer
the capacity of the shear key:
= 264
3-25
Assume as an initial trial that 2 = 200 . The angle between weld axis and
load is = 0.
= 0.75 = 0.75 0.6 0.707 2 >
8.6 =
Check the minimum fillet weld size: min , = 12 = 5
OK.
Check also that the fillet welds on the column flange are capable to transfer
the shear capacity of the shear key:
= 0.75 = 0.75 0.6 0.707 2 = 2149 kN > = 264
Check rupture of the base metal to develop weld strength:

Base plate to column welds (flanges)
For base plate:
= 0.75 0.6
= 0.75 0.6 2 = 4253 > = 0.6 0.707 2 = 2865
For column:
= 0.75 0.6
= 0.75 0.6 = 1771 > = 0.6 0.707 2 = 2865
Base plate to column welds (web)
For base plate:
= 0.75 0.6
= 0.75 0.6 2 = 1215 > = 0.6 0.707 2 = 409
For column:
= 0.75 0.6
= 0.75 0.6 ( 2 ) = 729 > = 0.6 0.707 2 = 409
3-26
3.3.d.
Designed connection
Notes:
1) Anchorage to concrete has not been designed.
2) Anchor Bolts: 4 bolts ASTMF 1154 Gr. 36 38 mm.
3) Connections for vertical stiffeners and upper plate
are not designed.
A - A plan
A
Upper plate
PL 350x190x30 (typ).
Column
H350x350x165.6.
Stiffener plate
PL 305x190x25 (typ).
grout
C
C
(typ)
20
Exterior of
flange
B - B plan
C - C plan
(Shear key)
10
10
Base plate
PL 730x395x30
Shear key to
base plate
L=150 mm
(typ)
10
10
20
Column web
to base plate
L=100 mm
10
10
Shear key to
base plate
L=150 mm
Exterior of
flange
3-27
3.3.e.
Additional Discussion
Design forces when a concentric brace is connected to the base plate

This is a special case that is only mentioned for general purposes and is not
included in the numerical example.
If a brace is coming to a base plate connection, the design verifications of the
elements of the base plate and their attachments do not change with respect
to a connection without a brace. However the forces from the brace must be
considered.
Special and Ordinary Concentrically Braced Frames systems are discussed:
a) Special Concentrically Braced Frames (SCBF)
Axial Force
The required strength for the brace connection in SCBF systems is given by
section 13.3 of AISC 341-05, which says that:
Tensile forces
For tensile forces, the required strength shall be the lesser of the following:
-
The expected yield strength of the brace in tension, determined as

.
The maximum load effect, according by the analysis of the forces that
can be transferred to the brace by the overall system.
Then,
= min(R y Fy Ag , Tu analysis )
According to the commentary C13.3a of the AISC 341-05 specification, there
are several ways to compute the maximum loads effect that can be transferred
to the bracing, for example a Pushover analysis; a determination of how much
force can be resisted before causing uplift of the foundation and an inelastic
time history analysis; between many others. However is not a common
practice on design projects to do these detailed analysis. In most cases there
is the need to provide a capacity large enough to ensure yielding of the brace.
3-28
Furthermore, according to the commentary C13.3a the upper limit of the

expected yield strength is included for elements where the limit of the system
strength is not given by the bracing, which is the case of foundations that are
designed in system base on the application of load combinations using the
amplified seismic load 0 .
Considering the latter discussion, it is recommended to consider in a
conservative way that the tensile required strength of the brace for the base
plate design is:
=
Then, if the angle of the brace with respect the horizontal line at the level of
the base plate is (see Figure 3-13), the tensile force acting over the base
plate is:
= sin
()
Where, as has seen before in this manual, the axial solicitation for the column
is determined according to the load combination that gives the greater axial
tension, generally this combination is 0.9D 1.4(EH + EV). Note that the
connection for the axial loads is positive on compression.
Brace
Base Plate
Figure 3-13: Angle between brace and base plate.

Compressive forces
For compressive forces, the required strength shall be at least equal or greater
than 1.1 , where is the compressive nominal strength of the brace. Then,
for the base plate the compression force is:
=
+ 1.1 sin
3-29
Where in this case, is determined according to the load combination that

gives the greatest compressive force for the column.
Shear Force
According to section 8.5b of AISC 341-05, the required shear strength for the
base plate connection is given by the summation of the required strength of
the steel elements at the base plate connection.
For the case of the column at the base plate, the required strength is already
known from the above example. For the braces, the axial tensile required
strength of the brace is:
=
Then:
=
Notes:
cos
()
It is possible to also consider the compression force in order to

project it and obtain shear force, but since the compression force will
always be less or equal than the tensile required strength of the
brace, generally it is only needed to consider the tensile case.
It is important to also consider the direction of the forces on the brace
and on the base of the column for the proper signs.
Flexural Strength
According to section 8.5 of AISC 341-05, the required flexural strength for
column bases is given by the summation of the required strengths of the steel
elements at the connection.
According to section 13.3b, the required flexural strength of the brace is:
= 1.1
Then, the required strength for the connection is:
=
+ 1.1
The required flexural strength for braces may be neglected if the brace is
detailed in order that it can accommodate the inelastic rotations associated to
the post buckling deformations (braces will develop buckling that eventually
will generate plastic hinges at the ends of the brace). The accommodation of
3-30
the inelastic rotations is accomplished using single gusset plate with the brace
terminating before the line of restraint. For more information see Chapter 4 of
this Manual.
b) Ordinary Concentrically Braced Frames (OCBF)
Axial Force
The required strength for the brace connection in OCBF systems is given by
section 14.4 of AISC 341-05, which says that:
-
For the limit state of bolt slip, the required strength of the bracing
connection shall be determined according to the load combinations
stipulated by the building code, not including the use of the amplified
seismic load. This is because the bolt slip failure does not constitute
a connection failure, and the dissipation of energy that occurs product
of the bolt slip reduces the seismic response.
For all the other limit states, the required strength is the expected
yield tensile strength of the brace . The required strength needs
not exceed either of the following:
- The maximum force that the structural system can develop.
- A load effect that considers the effect of the amplified seismic load.
Therefoe the axial uplift design force for the base plate connection, considering
the brace is:
=
sin
()
Where is given by the combination for the column that produces the
maximum uplift effect on the base plate and is the angle between the brace
and the horizontal line on the base plate.
Shear Force
According to section 8.5b of AISC 341-05, the required shear strength for the
base plate connection is given by the summation of the required strength of
the steel elements at the base plate connection.
3-31
For the case of the column that arrives to the base plate, the required strength
is already known from the above example. For the braces, the axial required
strength of the brace is:
=
Then:
=
cos
()
Note:
It is important to consider the direction of the forces acting on the brace and
on the base of the column.
Flexural Strength
According to section 8.5 of AISC 341-05, the required flexural strength for
base plates is given by the summation of the required strengths of the steel
elements at the connection. However, for OCBF it is expected that the brace
will develop limited inelastic deformations. For this reason, it is not necessary
to consider the flexural strength of the brace that arrives to the base plate
connection.
3.4.
References
Plates and slabs:
Stiglat & Wippel,1968, Placas. Instituto Eduardo Torroja de la

Construccin y el Cemento. Madrid.
References for base plate connections design:
3-32
William Honeck and Derek Westphal, Forell Elsesser Engineers Inc,

1999, Steel tips: Practical Design and Detailing of Steel Column Base
Plates. Structural Steel Educational Council.
James Fisher and Lawrence Kloiber, 2006, AISC Steel Design Guide
# 1: Base Plate and Anchor Rod Design 2nd Ed. American Institute of
Steel Construction, USA.
American Institute of Steel Construction, 2005, AISC Manual of Steel
Construction. 13th Edition. AISC, USA.
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
4.
BRACE CONNECTIONS
4.1.
General Description of Seismic Braced Frames
Steel systems that contain braced frames are very efficient and economical
systems, because they resist lateral forces and displacements trough the axial
strength and stiffness of the brace members, with little or no bending until the
compression braces buckle.
Concentrically braced frames:
In concentrically braced frames, the centerlines of braces, beams and columns
intersect, or nearly intersect, minimizing flexural behavior. They are almost
similar to vertical trusses. According to AISC 341-05 Code, there are two
principal systems: Ordinary Concentrically Braced Frames (OCBF) and Special
Concentrically Braced Frames SCBF.
These structures tend to be more economical than moment frames and
eccentrically braced frames in terms of material, fabrication and erection costs.
Nevertheless, they have reduced flexibility in architectural and functional
issues due to the presence of braces that obstruct the spaces.
There are several types of braced concentrically systems. Some examples are
graphically presented below:
V-Bracing
Inverted
V-Bracing
V-Bracing
Diagonal
Bracing
Figure 4.1-1: Examples of Concentric Bracing Configurations.

Adapted from AISC 341-05, Fig. C-I-13.1
4.1.a.
Ordinary Concentrically Braced Frames (OCBF)
In the case of Ordinary Concentrically Braced Frames (OCBF), as defined on

Section 14 of AISC 341-05 Code, it is expected that these systems will have
4-1
limited inelastic deformations. Therefore, they are designed for higher seismic
forces (higher than for SCBF systems) in order to take into account this limited
ductility. The design and construction procedure of OCBF systems is simpler
than in SCBF systems.
4.1.b.
Special Concentrically Braced Frames (SCBF)
Special Concentrically Braced Frames (SCBF), as defined on section 13 of AISC

341-05 Code, are designed for a lower force level than OCBF systems (larger R
factor). Therefore, in contrast with OCBF frames, these systems require
numerous detailing and design requirements to ensure the required ductility
(for example, they need to have a post-buckling ductile behavior).
For SCBF systems, the use of tension only-bracing is not permitted according
to AISC 341-05 Code. Also, the Seismic Code requires that these systems
balance compression and tension braces. Along any line of bracing, braces
must be oriented so to engage at least 30%, but no more than 70% of the
total lateral force resisted by braces in tension.
Other requirements on the Seismic Code, in order to ensure ductility and
hysteretic damping, refer to limitations to member slenderness, compressive
strength, width-to-thickness ratios and special detailing for gusset plates.
Referring to connections on SCBF systems, there are two approaches used in
their design. The first one creates enough strength and rigidity in the
connections in order to force the formation of plastic hinges at the ends and
middle of the brace under compressive forces (when buckling occurs in the
plane of the gusset plates). The second approach ensures that plastic hinges
form in the gusset plate at the brace ends when out of plane buckling of the
gusset plate occurs, with a hinge still occurring at the midpoint of the brace.
The following requirement is for the last approach:
4-2
2t
Gusset Plate
t= thickness of gusset plate
Figure 4.1-2: Brace-to-gusset plate requirement for buckling out-of-plane

bracing system. Adapted from AISC 341-05, Fig. C-I-13.2.
Note:
It is recommended to detail a slightly longer distance than the 2 minimum.
Typically, values from 2 to 4 are used due to practical dimensioning
requirements of the gusset plate. The distance shall be measured from a line
perpendicular to the end of the brace member, in order to ensure buckling
perpendicular to the plane of the frame.
4.2.
Code requirements for Brace Frame Connections, Design

Forces and Recommendations:
4.2.a.
NCh2369.0f2003:
Connections of the seismic braces shall be designed to resist 100% of the

tensile capacity of the braces, considering their gross area.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.2)
There are also specific provisions for braced frames in section 8.3 of
the NCh2369.Of2003 Code. Some of them will be discussed later.
For horizontal braces apply section 8.7 of NCh2369.Of2003.
Slenderness of brace members shall be lesser than 1.5
. This limit
is slightly greater than the limit of AISC 341-05.
4-3
4.2.b.
1.
AISC 341-05
SCBF Systems (Section 13)
Slenderness of the brace members:
4.0 /
(Re. AISC 341-
05, Section 13.2a). See the exception on the code for braces with
some specific requirements.
Required strength for braces: see section 13.2b. Note that this
section mentions that when the effective area of the bracing members
is less than the gross area, for example in slotted HSS braces at the
gusset plate, there are tensile strength requirements based upon the
limit state of fracture in the net section.
Lateral force distribution (alternate braces in tension and compression
for redundancy): see section 13.2c.
Column and braces must comply with width-thickness limitations
given in section 8.2b (Seismically Compact Sections, according to
Table I-8-1).
Bracing connections in SCBF systems

(Re. AISC 341-05, section 13.3)
Required tensile strength: = min

( , ) , with equal to
the maximum load effect (from analysis) that can be transferred to
the brace by the system.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
includes beam to column connection if it is contained on the

bracing system.
According to AISC 341-05 Commentary, can be calulated in
several ways (depending on specific situations). For example,
calculate the capacity from a pushover analysis (see other options in
the commentary). From a conceptual basis, since the character of
ground motions is not really well known, it is unrealistic to have an
accurate calculation of .
Therefore, generally it is only used the value of the brace yielding for
designing the connection.
Required flexural resistance (about the critical buckling axis):
= 1.1 . The exception is for brace connections that are
designed for
and can accommodate the inelastic rotations
associated to brace post-buckling deformations. This is accomplished
4-4
using a gusset plate, with the brace finishing before the line of
restraint (see detailing requirements in Figure 4.1-2)
Required compressive strength: 1.1 , with equal to the
nominal compressive strength of the brace. Note that it is necessary
to consider the true effective length of the brace, the connection fixity
(in order to calulate k), and the material overstrength. Brace buckling
capacity stress should be based on the actual brace length in lieu
of the traditional work-point to work-point length commonly used in
analysis. Therefore, braces for this analysis are shorter and is
increased:
Work - point to work point
Brace length to use for gusset

plate design
Figure 4.2-1: Brace effective length Adapted from Steel Tips : Design of
Special Concentrically Braced Frames. Cochran & Honeck.
Some authors suggest always including factor in calulating as a
conservative measure. Note that the design of gusset plates shall include
consideration of buckling.
V-inverted and inverted V type bracing:
The required strength of beams intersected by braces, their

connections and supporting members shall be calulated based on the
load combinations of the applicable building code, assuming that
braces provide no support for dead and live loads. For load
combinations that include the earthquake effect, this effect (E) on the
beams shall be calulated as follows:
Force in tension braces: =
Force in braces in compression: = 0.3
For additional required conditions of beams and their lateral bracing,

see section 13.4a(2).
4-5
As said on the AISC 341-05 code, as a minimum one set of lateral braces is
required at the point of intersection of the V (or inverted V) braces; unless the
beam has enough out-of-plane strength and stiffness to ensure stability
between adjacent brace points (prevention of lateral torsional buckling).
K type bracing is not permitted on SCBF systems by the code. This is because
it is not desirable to have columns subjected to unbalanced lateral forces from
the braces, as these forces may contribute to column failures.
Figure 4.2-2: K type bracing.
2.
For protected zones of bracing members in SCBF systems, consult the

section 13.6 of AISC 341-05.
OCBF Systems (Section 14)
Slenderness of the brace members:

Comply with the requirements of section 8.2b (seismically compact
sections, in order to limit local buckling and fracture).
For K, V or inverted-V systems:
4.0 /
(Re. AISC 341-05,
Section 14.2). There is a exception in the code for HSS braces filled
with concrete.
According to the code user note, braces that are designed for tension only are
not adequate for K ,V and inverted V configurations.
Special systems (beams in V and V-inverted systems and columns in K
systems):
4-6
Beams and columns must be continuous at bracing connections away

from beam to column connection and shall meet the following for the
required strength:
Calculated from load combinations of the applicable building code,
assuming that braces provide no support for dead and live loads. For
the load combinations that include the earthquake effect, this effect
(E) on the beams shall be calulated as follows:
Force in tension braces: = . In V and V-inverted
systems, < , with = maximum tensile force that

can be developed by the system.
Force in all adjoining braces in compression: = 0.3
For conditions of beams and their lateral bracing , see section

14.3(2).
Bracing connections in OCBF systems

Notes:
1.
2.
For bolt slip limit state: the required strength of the connection shall
be obtained using the load combinations of the applicable building
code, not using the amplified seismic load.
For any other limit state, the required strength is the expected yield
strength in tension: = .
The required strength of the connection does not require to exceed

either the maximum force that can be developed by the system nor a
load effect based upon using the amplified seismic load.
The bolt slip limit state does not constitute a connection failure and
the associated energy dissipation can serve to reduce seismic
response. This fact is reflected in that this limit state is designed for a
lower force level than other limit states.
Note that the design of gusset plates shall include consideration of buckling.
Tip:
Limits states of OCBF systems are the same as for the SCBF systems. However
in OCBF systems there are no requirements for ductility at the hinge zone, on
the gusset plates. It is possible to design a connection for OCBF forces and
add some ductility requirements from SBCF systems.
4-7
AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13th Ed. recommendations
4.2.c.
Force transfer in bracing connections
1.
(Re. AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13th Ed., Part 13)

There are many methods for calulating the force transfer on bracing
connections, and there is controversy on which one of those methods provide
safer and more economical connections. According to Thornton (1991), the
Uniform Force Method (recommended by the manual) best predicts both the
available strength and critical limit state of the connection; it also leads to
more economical and simpler designs.
Uniform Force Method (UFM):
1.
Select the connection geometry such that moments do not exist on

the 3 planes of load transfer of the connection (gusset to beam,
gusset to column, and beam to column). Therefore, those 3
connections are designed for tension and shear only.
Figure 4.2-3: Diagonal Bracing Connection and External Forces.

Adapted from AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13th Ed. Fig. 13-2(a) Note
that the working point in this case coincides with the beam and column
centerlines.
From the figure above, the terms are:
=
, =
support ~0.
4-8
(half of the beam and column depth). For a column web
: distance from the external face of column flange (or web) to the centroid of
the gusset-beam connection.
: distance from the external face of beam flange to the centroid of the
gusset-column connection.
Figure 4.2-4: Gusset free body diagram.

Adapted from AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13th Ed. Fig. 13-2(b)
Figure 4.2-5: Column free body diagram and beam free body diagram.
Adapted from AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13th Ed.
Fig. 13-2(c) and Fig. 13-2(d)
From the figures above:
= = required strength at the end reaction of the beam.
= required transverse force from adjacent bay (girder drag force).
= horizontal component of (P is the axial force of the brace).
4-9
= vertical component of .
= required shear force on gusset to beam connection.
= required axial force on gusset to column connection.
= required axial force on gusset to beam connection.
= required shear force on gusset to column connection.
2.
To obtain zero moment at the planes of the connections , try values

of and (locate the gusset to beam and gusset to column
connections centroids) such that:
=
3.
=
Calulate the forces on the planes of load transfer:
+ +
= , =
, =
, =
Note: Axial force could be a tensile or compressive force (corresponding

signs will change).
4.
Design the connections. Note that the beam to column connection

shall be designed for a required shear equal to and a required
axial force equal to ( )
Note:
There are special cases listed on the AISC Manual of Steel Construction for
force transmission on bracing connections:
4-10
Modified working point location: for eccentric working point

connections. This situation will generate flexural forces in the framing
members and generally will lead to smaller gusset plates. Also it is
used for column web connections.
Minimizing the shear in beam to column connection
No gusset-to-column connection.
Note:
Make sure that when using the UFM method for designing the connections
between gusset and column or beam framing members, these connections
shall be centered or nearly centered on the corresponding gusset edge. Note
that it is not necessary to use all the gusset edge length for performing the
connection (for example a welded one); in practice welders generally weld all
the gusset edge length.
2.
Available strength in bracing connections

(Re. AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13th Ed., Part 13)
For diagonal bracing connections, the available strength is calulated from the
applicable limit states of the bolts, welds and connecting elements; depending
on the specific case that we are analyzing.
3.
Desirable details that avoid sharing forces between bolts and welds
Consult the welds general information chapter of this Manual.

4.2.d.
Gusset plates design issues
Reference:
Steel Tips: Seismic Design and Behavior of Gusset Plates. Abolhassan Astaneh.
1998.
According to Astaneh (1998), gusset plates, in general, have performed
satisfactorily during past earthquakes. However, a few cases of failure of
gusset plates have been reported. The observed common failure modes are:
Fracture of the welds.
Buckling of the gusset plates.
Fracture of the net section of the gusset plate or the bracing member.
Most of these failures can be related to a non-ductile design and poor detailing
of the gusset plate connections. Therefore, design and detailing of gusset
plates must be made to prevent brittle modes of failure, and to ensure a
desirable ductile behavior.
4-11
Whitmore section:
As a recommendation, in order to obtain rational values for direct stresses in a
gusset plate on the areas at the end of the bracing members, the concept of
distribution of the force along 30 lines (made from the first part of the
connection), which is used to define width of the Whitmore section. The
following figures illustrate the concept:
30
30
30
lw
30
lw
Gusset or other
Connection elements
b) Welded Joint
Figure 4.2-6: Width of the Whitmore Section for Bolted or Welded

Connections. Re. AISC Manual of Steel Construction, 13th Ed. Figure 9-1.
Out of plane buckling:
As said before, when a bracing member buckles out-of the plane of the braced
frame, the plastic hinge forms in the gusset plate. These plastic hinges need to
be free to rotate, because otherwise the gusset plates could fracture in a small
number of cycles. To ensure free rotation, the recommended detail is that the
bracing member should finish at a distance at least 2 away from the reentrant corner of the gusset plate.
Free Edge buckling:
To prevent the free edge buckling of the gusset plate prior to the gusset plates
reaching their maximum compression capacity, it is recommended to comply
with
< 0.75
. is the length of the free edge of the gusset plate and is
the gusset plate thickness.

Ductility of gusset plate connections:
Some tips and requirements with regard to ductility issues are given by
Astaneh:
4-12
Bolted gusset plates, if net section fracture is prevented, have more

ductility than welded plates. Additional ductility comes from slippage
of bolts.
Consider the 2 distance for out of plane buckling.
Buckling of gusset not only results in reduced compressive capacity,
but if buckling is elastic, it can lead to brittle behavior. It is
recommended that when buckling capacity of the gusset is less than
50% of its tensile capacity, the gusset plate shall be stiffened or
thickened to develop larger compressive capacity.
Prevent free edge buckling of the gusset. For this purpose, the edge
of the gusset plate can be stiffened by adding a relatively small angle
or plate. Also it is possible to increase the gusset thickness or reduce
.
Seismic design of connection of a gusset plate to the bracing members:

According to Astaneh, the desirable order for failure modes in a typical
connection of a bracing member to the gusset plate:
Slippage of bolts (bolted connections).

Yielding of gross area of plates or angles used in the connections.
Bearing failure of bolt holes.
Local buckling of angles and plates used in the connections.
Edge distance fracture and bolt spacing failure in bolted connections
Fracture of effective net area of angles and plates in the connections /
Block shear failure.
Fracture of bolts and welds.
Note that in the case of braces connected with bolts, they may require that the
end of the braces be reinforced to keep the failure out of the reduced section
created by the bolt holes (in the effective area). Also, if hollow structural
sections are used for braces, there is a discount in the net area when they
reach the gusset plates (called knife plates) and may require net section
reinforcement plates. In general, welded connections eliminate the effective
area problem.
For the connection between the gusset plate and the beam or column, note
that if flange welds are used, weld access holes shall be discounted.
If welds are used to join gusset plates to the framing members (column or
beam), according to the AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13th Ed., the
connection should be designed for the larger of the peak stress and 1.25 (weld
4-13
ductility factor) times the average stress. The weld size needs no to be larger
than to develop the strength of the gusset.
Seismic design recommendations for gusset plates:
According to Astaneh, the desirable order of failure modes is:
Yielding in the Whitmores area of the gusset plate.
It can occur due to direct tension or compression. The yield capacity of a

gusset plate due to a direct axial load can be computed as:
= , with = gross area of the gusset plate at the Whitmores
effective area.
Yielding of critical sections of the gusset plate under combined

stresses.
These critical sections can yield under a combination of axial load, bending and
shear. The following interaction equation can be used:
1.0
, , : Axial load, shear load, and bending moment on the critical section.
=yield axial capacity of the cross section ( ), = yield shear capacity of
the cross section (0.6 ), = plastic moment capacity, = .
There are some other options like the Von Mises yield criterion, which can be
used for gusset connected edges stresses:
+3
1.0, with = area of the edge section.
Buckling of the gusset plate
The gusset plate can buckle due to compression just beyond the end of the
bracing member. To compute the buckling capacity is permitted to use
Whitmores width.
4-14
The buckling capacity is: = , where is the critical stress acting on a

unitary width gusset strip parallel to the axis of the brace within the
Whitmores effective width (typically the longest strip is used, nevertheless it
is also possible to use an average value of 3 different lengths, the central and
the two extreme strips from the Whitmore section). These strips are treated as
columns. See the following figures:
Figure 4.2-7: Buckling of gusset plate and model to calculate buckling

capacity. Adapted from Steel Tips # 42: Seismic Behavior and Design of
Gusset Plates. Figure 4.7.
The typical check is on Whitmores area, using an effective length factor of
k=0.5 (Gross, 1990) or k=0.65 (Thorntorn, 1984) if the gusset is supported by
two edges; or 1.2 if the gusset is supported by one edge (in this case, the
gusset can readily move out of plane and a sidesway mode of buckling can
occur on it).
As recommendations for gusset detailing, at the brace end of the gusset plate,
a minimum of 1 (25 mm) offset from the brace to the gusset sloped edge
should be provided. The sloped angle measured from the brace axis, starting
from this edge, should be greater than 30 in order to maximize the Whitmore
section width for gusset plate compression strength, resulting in thinner gusset
plates.
Buckling of the edges of the gusset plate.
Meet the limit for
as discussed above. Horizontal or vertical stiffeners could
be added to reduce . The location of the stiffener must be verified to ensure

that it does not cross the yield line of the gusset plate.
Block shear failure / Fracture of the gusset plate net area
4-15
For block shear failure:

For ductile behavior, the capacity of the gusset in block shear failure should be
greater than (1.1 ) times its yielding capacity at the Whitmores area.
For fracture of the net area:
For ductile behavior, make sure that the tensile capacity of the gusset fracture
on the Whitmores net area ( = ) should be greater than (1.1 ) times
its yielding capacity at the Whitmores area.
Some Additional considerations on gusset plates:
Excessively thick gusset plates should be avoided.

For preventing web crippling of the beam attached to the gusset, it is
recommended to use a beam web thickness greater than 75% of the
gusset plate thickness (especially if large axial forces act on the
beam). In any case, beam web crippling must be checked and
stiffeners must be added if needed.
4.3.
Discussion of some typical bracing connections cases
4.3.a.
Brace to beam column connections
1.
Forces to take into account and force transfer
According to the Chilean code, the connections of the seismic braces shall be
designed to resist 100% of the tensile capacity of the braces, considering their
gross area. The Chilean code does not include the factor (that accounts for
material over strength) in this calulation (unlike the AISC 341-05 code). This
aspect could be discussed and stipulated on project specifications.
Note that there are some exceptions on AISC 341-05 Code for the
determination of the required strength of the connection relating to the
maximum force that can be developed by the system. It is important to check
that this force (and any other possible design force) is larger than the 100%
tensile capacity of the brace (Chilean code requirement) because otherwise the
design would not meet the NCh2369.Of2003 requirements.
4-16
For force transfer, the most used method is the Uniform Force Method (UFM)
described in the AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13th Ed. With the design
force of the brace connection and the application of UFM, it is possible to
obtain the forces on the gusset edges in order to design the respective
connections (bolted or welded) to the beam or column.
When more than one brace arrive to the beam-column connection, all the
forces of those braces must be taken into account, considering the possibility
of braces in tension and compression, and also the different directions of the
forces.
2.
Limit States to take into account
The following limit states are related to a general case (SCBF or OCBF
systems). For a particular system, only the corresponding limit states apply.
At brace ends and at gusset to beam or column connections:
Brace net section fracture (effective area).

Brace block shear fracture.
Brace to gusset weld fracture (if connection is welded).
Bearing on the gusset plate (if the connection is bolted).
Bearing on the brace (if the connection is bolted).
Tear out on the gusset plate (if the connection is bolted).
Tear out on the brace (if the connection is bolted).
Check the bolts on the brace-gusset connection (if the connection is
bolted).
Gusset block shear fracture.
Gusset tension yield or fracture.
Gusset or weld failure at column (if connection is welded).
Gusset or weld failure at beam (if connection is welded).
Check bolted connections of the gusset to the beam or column (if
connections are bolted).
Gusset buckling (out of plane).
Gusset free edge buckling.
Failure of critical section of a gusset plate due to a combination of
axial load, bending and shear load.
At beam or column elements, and beam-to-column connection:
Column or beam web yielding.

Column or beam web crippling.
4-17
Column or beam web shear.

Beam-to-column connection: design for the transfer of shear and
axial loads.
Note that column or beam web local buckling could be prevented choosing an
adequate thickness of their webs or adding stiffener plates.
3.
Possible connections and discussion of some cases
There is a large number of different possible bracing connections. Some

examples of them are shown on the following figures:
Figure 4.3-1: Pipe bracing connection with out of plane hinging details.
Steel Tips: Design of Special Concentric Braced Frames. Cochran & Honeck.
Fig. 6-1b.
4-18
Figure 4.3-2: H bracing connection with out of plane hinging details, and
without out of plane hinging details. Steel Tips: Design of Special Concentric
Braced Frames. Cochran & Honeck. Fig. 6-1c and 6-1d.
Typically, the difference is located at the connection of the brace with the
gusset plate. If HSS sections are used, the connection is commonly made
reducing the section of the brace and developing a welded connection with the
gusset plate (knife plate). When other sections are used, for example H
sections or L sections, the connection between the brace and the gusset plate
is generally made from a bolted and welded combination.
As noted from the figures above, the ductility details include the 2t offset on
the gusset plate.
Brace to Gusset connections:
- Hollow structural sections (HSS) to gusset plates
Typically, when HSS brace sections (for example pipes, square or rectangular
hollow sections) arrive to gusset plates (called knife plate on this cases), a
reduction on the brace section is developed in order to slot it into the knife
plate. If this section is left unreinforced, net section fracture will be the
governing limit state and brace ductility may be significantly reduced (see
requirements on section 13.2b of AISC 341-05 for SCBF systems).
A typical detail of the reduced section for HSS sections is shown in the figure
below (from Rafael Sabelli: AISC Seismic Braced Frames):
4-19
Figure 4.3-3: Typical Detailing of the reduced section at Knife Plate. Adapted
from AISC Seismic Braced Frames: Design Concepts and Connections. Rafael
Sabelli.
According to section 13.2b of AISC 341-05 Code, the expected tensile strength
of the reduced section needs to be greater than the required tensile strength
of the brace. In other words:

If the inequality shown above is not satisfied, reinforcement is required.

According to AISC 341-05 Commentary, reinforcement may be provided in the
form of steel plates welded to the tube, increasing the effective area at the
reduced brace section. It is recommended that the connection (welds) of the
reinforcement to the brace to be designed for the strength of the
reinforcement on either side of the reduced section.
- H sections to gusset plates
Typically, they are bolted connections, using flange splice plates bolted to the
H section and welded to the gusset plate. Also, it is possible to use web plates
attached to the brace member and to the gusset plate.
Note that in this case there is also a reduction on the gross area of the brace
members due to the bolt holes, but unlike the previous case, splice plates are
being added immediately, increasing the net area of the cross section.
For bolted connections, bolts shall be high strength, pretensioned, with class A
faying surface. It is recommended (but not an obligation) to design these
connections as slip critical (class A faying surface) checking also bearing
failure.
4-20
Note that in the same connection, it is not allowed to share the design forces
between bolts and welds since slip critical bolts may slip under earthquake
loading.
There are also many other possibilities of brace members to gusset
connections, for example an angle brace member bolted to a gusset.
Gusset to beam and columns connections:
-For gusset welding to beam or column flanges:
For calculating the average stress on the weld; for example if Uniform Force
Method is used, the weld is subjected to a combination of shear () and axial
force (). If double fillet welds are used (typical case), each one of length ;
the average shear force on the welded union can be conservatively evaluated
as:
For LRFD design, the requirement is that the design strength of the fillet weld
of unitary length be greater than (it is optional to take into account the angle
of the loading with respect to the weld axis). Also, the ductility factor
discussed in 4.2.d (1.25) shall be included for the design. Note also that,
according to the AISC Manual of Steel Construction, the weld size needs not be
larger than to develop the strength of the gusset (this is optional).
Note that the same approach shown before can be used on stresses or forces
format. If there is a bending moment acting on the gusset edge, the stress can
be obtained easily with the
stresses); and also
formula for slender elements (elastic
for axial stress and
for shear stress. As a commentary,
these formulas are not 100% correct for gusset plates, but they are used only
because there is seemingly no other alternative. Note that when there is no
moment on the interface; the peak stress is equal to the average stress.
-Prying action on clip angles (bolted connections only)
Double clip angles (L sections) are generally used in bolted gusset to column
(or beam) connections. Prying action occurs on the bolts when they are
subject to tensile forces. Forces within a connection which result from the
4-21
deformation of the connected parts are known as prying forces. In bolted-tee

connections, these forces can cause an increase in the tensile load on the
bolts. According to AISC360-05 Specification, section J3.6, the required tensile
strength (for bolts and threaded parts) shall include any tension resulting from
prying action produced by deformation of the connected parts.
As a recommendation, the AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13 th Ed. provides
simplified expressions for computing this effect. As said on the Manual, proper
design for prying action includes the selection of bolt diameter and fitting
thickness such that there is sufficient stiffness and strength in the connecting
element and strength in the bolt.
Beam to column connections
These connections shall be designed to transfer the forces on the beam (N, V,
M) obtained from analysis.
4.3.b. Brace to beam column connections with a small offset from the
working point
This case is a variation from the previous case, in which the work-point
location is on the intersection of the center of gravity of brace, beam, and
column members.
But, in order to get smaller gusset plates, sometimes the line of the center of
gravity of the brace does not coincide with the framing members lines,
creating an eccentric working point. Typically, the work-point is located at the
corner of the gusset and therefore this eccentricity will result in a moment that
shall need to be transferred by the column and/or the beam (this extra
moment shall be considered in the design of the framing members and their
connections).
For this case, see the Uniform Force Method, special case 1, as described on
the AISC Manual of Steel Construction, 13th Ed.
4.3.c.
X Braces
There are several possible configurations for developing X-braces connections.

Usually, one of the diagonal members is discontinuous at the midspan
intersection, and a gusset plate is used to connect the braces. This situation is
illustrated in the following figure:
4-22
Figure 4.3-4: X-Brace connections for discontinuous typical cases.

1.
Forces to take into account
Generally, both braces that arrive to an X-brace connection have the same
length and they have similar sectional and material properties. The design
forces are assumed to be the same obtained for bracing connections (as
described above for OCBF or SCBF systems) and it is supposed that one
diagonal is in compression and the other one in tension. Note that the UFM is
not used on this case, because there are only concentrically axial loads.
The problem is that the assumption of one tension diagonal and other
compression diagonal may be unconservative and not realistic for some cases.
According to section 8.3 of NCh2369.Of2003 Code (Braced Frames), the
diagonal elements in an X brace shall be connected at the point of intersection.
This point can be considered fixed in the out-of-plane direction, to calulate the
members out-of-plane buckling lengths when one of the diagonals is
continuous. The assumption made on the Chilean Code, limits the effective
length of the compression diagonal to 0.5 times the diagonal length for simply
supported boundary conditions (recommendations of Picard and Beaulieu).
This may be unconservative in some situations, when the assumption of one
diagonal in tension and the other in compression is not realistic.
For example, when there is a seismic load perpendicular to the plane of the
diagonals, there is the possibility that both braces may fall under compression,
and in that case, the transverse bracing provided by one diagonal to the other
is significantly reduced, and the buckling length should be considered to be
equal to total length of the diagonal. This situation must be considered in the
design of the X brace connection.
Some general recommendations made by authors that have studied this
theme are:
4-23
Consider if the diagonals are simply or rigidly attached to their ends

(i.e. correct boundary conditions).
Take into account the length and sectional and material properties of
the bracing members.
Brace effective length is a function of the axial loading and the
stiffness of both diagonals.
The assumption that the connections at the ends of the diagonals are
perfect hinges is on the conservative side.
The midspan connection can affect the effective length factor for the
compression diagonals (and therefore the buckling load). In order to
increase the load carrying capacity of the X-brace system, the
rotational stiffness of this connection should be increased via suitable
detailing. The knowledge of the rotational stiffness of the center
connection can be obtained with analytical or experimental studies.
Tension diagonal does not always brace the compression diagonal;
and therefore, the out of plane displacement of the mid-point
connection is a potential buckling mode that should be taken into
account.
Some selected references that contain recommendations for choosing a more

realistic effective length factor for X-brace design and some other important
aspects are presented at the Selected references section of this chapter
(section 4.4).
2.
Limit states to take into account
Limit states for this case are practically the same as the described for beamto-column bracing connections, but applicable to this specific case. The
following limit states are related to a general case (SCBF and OCBF systems).
For a particular system, only the corresponding limit states apply.
At brace unions with gusset and in the gusset:
4-24
Brace net section fracture (effective area).

Brace block shear fracture.
Brace to gusset weld fracture (if connection is welded).
Bearing on the gusset plate (if the connection is bolted).
Bearing on the brace (if the connection is bolted).
Tear out on the gusset plate (if the connection is bolted).
Tear out on the brace (if the connection is bolted).
Check the bolts on the brace-gusset connection (if the connection is
bolted).
3.
Gusset block shear fracture.

Gusset tension yield or fracture.
Check bolted connections of the gusset to the beam or column (if
connections are bolted).
Gusset buckling (out of plane).
Gusset free edge buckling.
Special Case: X-brace with a horizontal girder
A special case of X Bracing Connection occurs when a continuous horizontal inplane beam element, that crosses trough the connecting point, has been
added. This connection could be designed in a same way as the V-inverted
(below the beam) and V (above the beam) brace to beam connections,
considering all the braces and forces present at the crossing point.
Figure 4.3-5: X-brace with a horizontal girder connection, retrofitted with

vertical stiffeners on beam web and a T-shape stiffener. Source: Posco E&C.
Angamos Seismic Retrofit.
A problem that occurred on these connections is that the girders are only used
to restrict the buckling effective length of adjacent columns, and have thin
web thickness, as compared to gusset thicknesses at the crossing point.
Therefore, the webs of the girders had to be retrofitted in order to transfer the
loads coming from bracing elements.
The other problem that occurs is related to the overall stability of the complete
brace-gusset-girder system (similar to the problems described above on this
section). For retrofitting, stiffeners are added to the girder web in order to
increase the torsion strength of the system, and also a T shape stiffener is
added for constraining the complete system to work together, to provide
additional torsional stiffness and increase the critical buckling load.
4-25
The recommendation is the same that on the typical X brace connections:

It is important to note that the out of plane buckling is a potential failure mode
(especially when braces are both under compression), and therefore, the
midspan connection should be analyzed and detailed properly to increase the
rotational stiffness.
Use girder webs with thicknesses similar to the gusset thickness (because they
also transfer the brace loads) and vertical stiffeners, if needed, to avoid more
retrofitting. Additionally, if the girders are used for restricting the buckling
effective length of columns, if they are rotated 90 (or they have bigger
sections) they continue to accomplish their mission, and the rotational stiffness
of the connection at midspan increases.
A software finite element analysis could help a lot in a design stage.
4.3.d.
1.
V-Brace to beam connection (connected at beam midspan)
Specific provisions and transfer of forces to the connection
As described on the previous general discussion section, V braces must comply

with several requirements of AISC 341-05 provisions, which will be
summarized here:
SCBF
The required strength for beams, their connections and supporting

members, shall be calculated considering no support of the braces to
the beam for dead and live loads, using the applicable load
combinations.
(Re AISC 341-05 13.4a)
Loads produced by earthquake effect shall be considered in beams as
for all the braces that are in tension, and 0.3 for all the
braces subjected to compression.
(Re AISC 341-05 13.4a)

Where the effective net area of the brace is less than the gross area,
the required tensile rupture strength for braces shall be greater than
the lesser of and the maximum load effect that can be
transferred by the system.
(Re. AISC 341-05 13.2b)
4-26
Additionally, lateral bracing requirements for the beam flanges at the

connection shall follow Appendix A of the AISC 360-05. Beams shall be
continuous between columns.
(Re AISC 341-05 13.4a(2))
For the required strength of the connection of the braces, consider the
provisions of the section 13.3 of the AISC 341-05, which have been described
above.
Braces in SCBF shall meet the requirements of section 8.2b of AISC 341-05,
which refer to the seismically compact shapes requirements.
OCBF
The required strength for beams shall be calculated considering no

support of the braces to the beam for dead and live loads, considering
applicable load combinations.
(Re AISC 341-05 14.3(1))
Loads produced by earthquake effects shall be considered in beams

as for all the braces that are in tension and 0.3 for all the
braces subjected to compression. For braces in tension the forces not
need to exceed the maximum forces that the system can develop.
(Re AISC 341-05 14.3(1))
Lateral bracing requirements for both flanges of the beam at the connection
shall follow provisions of Appendix A of the AISC 360-05.
(Re AISC 341-05 14.3(2))
Beams must be continuous at bracing connections away from the beamcolumn connection.
(Re. AISC 341-05 14.5c)
For the brace connection, consider the following:
4-27
For the limit state of bolt slip, the required strength of the
connections shall be taken as the force calulated with the load
combinations stipulated by applicable the building code, not including
the amplified seismic load. On the other hand, for other limit states,
the required strength is the expected yield strength in tension of the
brace: . However the required strength for the connection does
not need to exceed the maximum force that the system can develop,
or a load effect that is based in the use of the amplified seismic load.
(Re. AISC 341-05 14.4)
Note: For V braces and inverted V braces, it is not recommended for the
braces to be designed as tension only members. (Re. AISC 341-05 14.2)
Braces in OCBF systems shall meet the requirements of section 8.2b of AISC
341-05, which refers to seismically compact shape requirements.
NCh2369.Of2003 Provisions:
Beams shall be continuous at the intersection point with the V braces,

and they have to be designed for the vertical loads considering no
support from the braces.
(Re NCh2369.Of2003 8.3.5)
Braces shall be capable of supporting dead and live loads induced by

the beam and the seismic forces from the analysis, but amplified by a
1.5 factor.
(Re NCh2369.Of2003 8.3.5)
Both bottom and top flanges of the beam shall be provided with
lateral support in order to resist a lateral load of 2% of the nominal
strength of the flange (0.02 ).
(Re NCh2369.Of2003 8.3.5)
2.
Brace connections shall be designed for 100% of the tensile capacity

of the element.
(Re NCh2369.Of2003 8.5.2)
Force transfer Mechanism
Force transfer mechanism for V brace connections is simpler than the case of
beam-column brace connection, in which the gusset plate of the connection is
4-28
adjacent to the beam and column. A reasonable method for transferring forces
shall be used.
For V braces and inverted V braces, the gusset plate has only one edge of
connection, so the force transfer is direct. Consider the following connection:
Tu
Pu
1
2
w.p.
Figure 4.3-6: V Brace connection.

This arrangement generates a shear force, a vertical force and a moment at
the gusset-to-beam conncection.
= cos 1 + cos 2
= sin 1 sin 2
2
Where 1 and 2 are the respective angles of the arriving braces with respect
to the beam center line, and is the depth of the beam. It is important to
notice that the calulation of these forces is totally independent of the
assumptions that are made in order to obtain and .
3.
Limit States verifications
For a general case, the following limit states verifications shall be done:
Brace Gusset Connection:
Brace to gusset welded or bolted connection design.

Base metal failure (only for welded connection).
Bearing of the gusset plate (only for bolted connection).
Bearing of the brace (only for bolted connection).
Tear out of the brace (only for bolted connection).
Tear out of the gusset plate (only for bolted connection).
4-29
Gusset to beam connection:
Beamgusset welded connection (considering at the same time

stresses produced by shear force, vertical force, and moment from
the beam-gusset interface).
Applicable limit states from section J10 of AISC360-05 Specification:
Beam web local yielding.

Beam web Crippling.
Gusset Verifications:
4.3.e.
1.
Tensile yielding of the Whitmore area.

Tensile fracture of the Whitmore area.
Compression buckling of the Whitmore area.
Free edge buckling.
Gusset edge stresses.
Horizontal braces and strut connections
Introduction
Horizontal braces have the function of transfering forces between the frames
that are part of the horizontal forces resisting system, and/or to provide
structural redundancy. Struts are elements that resist only axial loads, and
they have the function of reducing the buckling length of columns, giving
lateral support to beams, and to transfer forces between frames.
2.
Horizontal Braces
For horizontal bracing systems, the provisions developed for connections

between braces and beam and columns do not change. Regarding elements
and connections, the AISC 341-05 seismic provisions do not distinguish
between horizontal or vertical brace systems, so the design of horizontal
braces must be done considering the provisions of chapter 13 or 14 of AISC
341-05.
The NCh2369.Of2003 Chilean code establishes special provisions in the design
of horizontal braces (refer to section 8.7 of the NCh2369.Of2003), but these
differences are specified for the brace design and not for the connection
design. Regarding the connections:
4-30
Like all seismic diagonals, they shall be designed for 100% of their
gross section tensile capacity.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003 8.5.2)
As the case of vertical braces, X diagonals in horizontal braces shall

be connected at the intersection of the diagonals. That point can be
considered fixed in the out of plane direction of braces in order to
calulate the buckling length of the members, only if one of the braces
is continuous.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003 8.7.3.2)
Limit states used for the case of vertical braces also apply for the case of
horizontal braces.
3.
Struts
As the case of horizontal braces, the design of connections for struts does not
introduce any new limit state or provision, however, it is very important to
discuss what a strut is.
What is a strut?
The elements that are part of a floor system have different functions,
according to the structure of the system. There are elements that primarily
behave in a flexural, axial, or combined way. However there are elements that
were intended to work as a beam, but the analysis shows a combined flexural
and axial behavior. A problem may occur if the design is done focusing in the
flexural behavior, not considering the axial force to which the element is
subject to.
4-31
Figure 4.3-7: Plan view of a floor system with diagonal bracing.

(Adapted from POSCO E&C Coal handing System. Angamos Thermoelectric
Power Plant Design Drawing Transfer Tower TT2).
From analysis, it is possible to deduct that beam A of the plan view shown in
Figure 4.3-8 can be subjected to axial loads if the diagonal horizontal braces
arriving at beam A have an asymmetric geometry or if the pair of braces work
at different levels of strength. In Figure 4.3-8 another case of elements
considered as beams and that can result having axial forces is shown.
Figure 4.3-8: Model view of a floor system.

Taken from POSCO E&C Coal handing System Angamos Thermoelectric Power
Plant Seismic Report Transfer Tower TT2.
In Figure 4.3-9 there are several elements that are beams, for example beam
B (enclosed in a circle) is clearly subject to transverse loads, which generate
bending moments in the weak axis of the beam. However this beam can also
provide lateral support to the main beams of the system (which are
4-32
perpendicular to beam B), and therefore, it can develop important axial forces,
so it shall be considered as a strut while designing.
If the beam has an axial force, it is important to design the element both as a
strut and as beam. If the beam is designed as hinged at the ends (simply
supported condition), the end connections would be designed as shear
connections. But, for example, the shear connections showed in Figure 4.3-10
are not intended for axial loads.
a)
b)
Figure 4.3-9: Double Angle Shear Connection: a) Column to beam connection,

b) Beam to beam connection.
Therefore, it is very important to verify the effect of the axial load of the beam
into the connection. Furthermore, the axial resistance of the bolts in this type
of connections, which are subjected to tensile load, is reduced due to the
prying effect in the angle, which generates an increment of the stresses
produced by the tensile forces in the bolts. AISC Manual of Steel Construction
13th Ed. contains several expressions for evaluating the prying effect.
The ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures states that double and
single angle connections are not adequate to resist axial forces, and
recommends the shear tab connection.
4-33
4.4.
References

Construction. 13th Edition. AISC, USA.
Posco E&C. documents:
Posco E&C., 2011/03/04, Angamos Seismic Retrofit Report (for

Boiler Steel Structure).
Posco E&C., 2011/03/29,Transfer Tower (TT02) Seismic Report of
Coal Handling System for Thermoelectric Power Plant
Steel Tips:
Albohassan Astaneh-Asl, 1998, Seismic Behavior and Design of

Gusset Plates. Structural Steel Educational Council, USA.
Michael L. Cochran and William C. Honeck, 2004, Design of Special
Concentrically Braced Frames (With Comments on Ordinary
Concentric Braced Frames). Structural Steel Educational Council, USA.
Roy Becker, 1995, Seismic Design of Special Concentrically Braced
Steel Frames. Structural Steel Educational Council, USA.
X-braces information:
4-34
A. Picard and D. Beaulieu, 3rd quarter of 1987 and 4th quarter of 1988,
Design of diagonal cross bracings (Discussion by Sayed Stoman).
Engineering Journal, AISC.
S. Stoman, 1989,Effective length spectra for cross bracings. Journal
of Structural Engineering, ASCE.
Ali Davaran, 2001, Effective Length Factor for Discontinuous XBracing Systems. Journal of Engineering Mechanics.
R. Shankar Nair, 1997 4th quarter, Practical Application of Energy
Methods to Structural Stability Problems. Engineering Journal, AISC.
Jiho Moon, Ki-Yong Yoon, Tong-Seok Han, Hak-Eun Lee , 2007, Out
of Plane Buckling and Design of X-Bracing Systems with
Discontinuous Diagonals. Journal of Constructional Steel Research.
Rafael Sabelli and Douglas Hohbach, 1999, Design of Cross Braced
Frames for Predictable Buckling Behavior. Journal of Structural
Engineering, ASCE.
4.5.
Example: Brace to Beam-Column Connection
4.5.a.
Design requirements
1.
NCh2369.Of2003
Use high strength bolts (ASTM A325 or ASTM A490). All welding
electrodes shall comply with the requirements shown in the code.
(Re.NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.1)
Bolts must be prestressed to 70% of the nominal tensile strength.
Always the nominal strength shall be verified as a bearing type
connection.
(Re. NCh2369 8.5.6.Of2003, 8.5.6)
2.
For field joints, refer to section 8.5.88 of the code.

AISC 341-05 & NCh2369.Of2003
This connection is supposed to be designed for an OCBF system. Therefore,

the design must follow the requirements shown in the General Discussion
Sections for Brace Connections (4.1 to 4.4 of this Manual) adopted from codes
and practical recommendations for the design of these connections.
The decision of using OCBF or SCBF design must be done considering the
seismic force strength level required and a discussion with the seismic
reviewer. According to common design practice, the OCBF system was chosen
for this example.
4.5.b.
Design of the connection
Design a brace to beam-column connection for the connection shown in

Figures 4.5-1 and 4.5-2Figure 4.5-1. Design the connection between brace,
beam, and column. Use a bolted connection for the brace to the gusset plate
connection. For the gusset-to-beam connection, use a welded connection (E70
electrode). For the gusset-to-column and the beam-to-column connections,
use double clip-angle connections.
Use NCh2369.Of2003 for the calculation of loads. Suppose that the unfactored
loads on the brace are:
4-35
Compression case:
= 190 , = 400 , = 680 , = 0 , = 0
Tension case:
= 250 , = 460 , = 750 , = 0 , = 0
Suppose that brace, column, and beam sections are adequate to resist and
transfer the factored forces obtained from the structural analysis.
clip angle
Brace
gusset plate
Column
Beam
Figure 4.5-1: Connection to be designed. Frontal and plan view of column and
clip angles.
Gusset splice plate
Flange splice plate
Gusset
Brace
Figure 4.5-2: Connection to be designed.

Brace to gusset plate connection detail.
4-36
1.
Sections and Material Properties
Brace section:
H 350 x 350 x 144.9
= 350 , = 350 , = 22 , = 10 , = 6
= 18460 2 , = 2760000 3 , = 154 , = 92.3 , = 2590000 4
Column section:
H 450 x 450 x 193.7
= 450 , = 450 , = 22 , = 12 , = 6
= 24672 2 , = 4732000 3 , = 199 , = 116 , = 3340000 4
Beam section:
H 600 x 300 x 229.2
= 600 , = 300 , = 40 , = 10 , = 6
= 29200 2 , = 7396000 3 , = 262 , = 78.5 , = 12990000 4
Material properties:
Use for members, gusset, clip angles and splice plates A250 ESP
= 250 , = 400 .
BOLTS: ASTM A490, threads included in the shear planes, STD holes
= 780 ,
= 414
WELDS: E70 electrode.
Width-thicknesses limitations:
According to AISC 341-05 requirements for OCBF systems, bracing members
shall meet the requirements of section 8.2b. According to this section, the
brace section must be seismically compact.
4-37
Refer to table I-8-1 of AISC 341-05 code. For braces:
= 7.95 0.30
= 8.5
2
= 30.6 1.49
= 42.1
In the Chilean NCh2369.Of2003 Code, there are similar requirements at

section 8.3, Braced Frames:
Seismic resistant elements that work under compression must have
width/thickness ratios lesser than (see table 8.1 of NCh2369.Of2003 code).
Braces (built-up sections):
=
= 7.95 0.64
= 15.4 with 0.35 =

=
= 0.72 0.763
= 30.6 1.49
= 42.1
Column (built-up sections):

=
= 10.2 0.64
= 15.4 with 0.35 =

=
= 0.68 0.763
= 33.8 1.49
= 42.1
Both column and brace sections meet the most stringent requirements of both
codes.
According to the Chilean code the slenderness of the bracing elements must be
less than 1.5 / ~4.71 / .
Therefore, using = 6800 , and remembering that is more accurate to
use the actual brace length in lieu of the traditional work-point to work-point
length:
= 1.0 (in plane buckling)
= 1.0 (out-of-plane buckling)
Then:
4-38
= 73.7 < 4.71 / = 133.2
OK
Calculate the compressive strength of the brace: = 0.9 = 3115 , with
= 0.658 = 188 .
2.
Design forces
According to NCh2369.Of2003, all the connections for seismic braces shall be

designed for 100% of the tensile capacity considering the gross section of the
braces.
As stated on AISC 341-05, section 14.4:
For bolt slip limit state in OCBF systems: the required strength of the
connection shall be obtained using the load combinations of the
applicable building code, not using the amplified seismic load (0
factor).
The design will be conservative, so the seismic amplification factor is going to

be used (0 = 2.0 for NCh2369.Of2003 load combinations).
As commented before, the Chilean code does not impose the slip critical limit
state check for bolts (only requires for bolts to be prestressed to 70% of the
tensile nominal strength of the bolts).
Continuing with AISC 341-05:
For any other limit state, check only in tension for the expected yield
strength of the brace: = . Note that this requirement is a
little more stringent than the NCh2369.2003 requirement.
The required strength of the connection does not require exceeding either the
maximum force that can be developed by the system, nor the load calculated
using the amplified seismic load on load combinations.
The design done here will be conservative, so the required strength of the
connection will be taken as the larger value between the required tensile and
compressive forces (except for slip-critical limit state). For the design forces,
the most stringent conditions between NCh2369.Of2003 and AISC 341-05 will
be chosen.
Note that the design of gusset plates shall include consideration of buckling
(the compressive force must be considered).
4-39
According to the previous comments, divide the design forces for tension and
compression cases on the brace.
Tensile design force:
As discussed above, for a conservative design:
= max
( , )
= 4615
Note:
Use = 1.0 instead of = 1.5 for A250 ESP steel (similar to ASTM A36),
according to AISC 341 table I-6-1. With this, the design is unconservative
respect to AISC 341-05 requirements but still meets the NCh2369.Of2003
code.
refers to the tensile factored load from analysis, conservatively
calculated with the seismic amplification 0 = 2.0 (instead of using = 1.1) on
the seismic terms of the NCh2369.Of2003 load combinations:
= 1.2 + 1.0 + 1.2 + 1.0 + 0 = 2260
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 4.5)
Note:
If using a design force as 1 equal to the maximum force that can be developed
by the system or load effect based upon using the amplified seismic load, in
order to comply with NCh2369.Of2003 requirements, check that 1 to be
greater than 2 which is the 100% of the brace tensile capacity. Always
discuss, in a previous design stage, with the seismic reviewer about the design
forces for brace connections.
Compressive design force:
Although there are no requirements for compressive force in OCBF braces,
conservatively use = max
( , )
= 1.2 + 1.0 + 1.2 + 1.0 + 0 = 1988
4-40
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 4.5)

The design forces are (except for slip critical limit state):
=
=
3.
Brace to gusset connection
The connection is going to be a bolted one. First, distribute the brace force
proportionally to web and flange areas:
Force on the web: =
Force on each flange: =
= 765 . Similarly: = 516
= 1925 . Similarly: = 1299
The bolted connection is going to be controlled by .

Bolts limit states:
Try ASTM A490 M22 bolts.
Flanges:
= 1925 , and for slip-critical limit state:

=
= 943 .
Slip critical failure:

This check is not required in NCh2369.Of2003, but it will be done as an
example.
=
(Per bolt)
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq.J3-4)
Use =0.85 (LRFD, connection designed to prevent slip at required strengthlevel), =0.35 (class A surface), =1.13, =1.0 (standard holes), =
221 (AISC 360-05, Table J3.1M for M22, ASTM A490 bolts), = Number of
slip planes = 2.0 (2 plates, one on the exterior of the brace flange and another
on the interior).
4-41
= 149
= 6.3. Use =10 bolts in the flange, distributed on 2
rows of 5 bolts each one.
Shear check:
For single shear on bolts, use

T uf
2
(two shear planes). Therefore:

(Re. AISC 360-05, J3.6)
= 963 , = 0.75
With = 10 bolts, = 380 2 , corresponding to M22 bolts to obtain:

OK
= 1180 > 963
Bearing strength check:

(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J3-6a)
= 1.2 2.4
Use =0.75 (LRFD), = clear distance in the direction of the force between
the edge of the hole and the edge of the adjacent hole or edge of the material,
try = (flange plate thickness), = 400 , =nominal bolt diameter
= 22 mm. Place the bolts on the flange plate (see Figure 4.5-3).
Gusset splice plate (flange)

e3
(N b -1)*e1
e3 e3
(N b -1)*e1
e3
h
b/2
b/2
bg
bf
i
Gusset
Brace
g
A
gap
Figure 4.5-3: Bolts positions scheme on flange plate.

Note: means the number of bolts per row.
The values of the distances 1 , 3 , (bolts gage) , , and are shown in the
following table:
4-42
e1 (mm)
70
e3 (mm)
40
g (mm)
182
h (mm)
34
i (mm)
30
Table 4.5-1
Note: in order to comply with the requirements of AISC 360-05 code for bolt
8
spacing between bolts and distance to the edges, use 1 > (preferably 3d).
3
Also note that the i dimension is measured from the fillet toe of the brace
web.
Bolts shall have a gage so that perforations do not enter into the zone of the
fillet toe of the brace web.
Assume trial values for plates dimensions (Figure 4.5-3).
= =
Note that this plate thickness is the same as the brace flange thickness.
Additional geometry checks:

+ + + 2 = 350 =
2 2
+ + + + = 175 =
2
2
OK
With the above values:

2.4 = 465
Interior bolts:
1.2 = 486 465 , with = 1 and is 24 mm diameter, of
the standard hole for M22 bolts (Re. AISC 360-05, Table J3.3M).
Exterior bolts:
4-43
1.2 = 296 , with = 3
and is 24 mm diameter, of the
standard hole for M22 bolts (Re. AISC 360-05, Table J3.3M).
Considering all the bolts for the flange brace side (N of exterior bolts =2, N
of interior bolts =10-2=8):
= 3231 >
OK
= 963
Remember that the number of slip planes is 2 and the inner flange plates and
outer flange plates are the same thickness.
Web side:
= 765 and for slip-critical limit state:

=
= 375

This check is not required by NCh2369.Of2003 code, but is done as an
example.
=
(Per bolt)
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq.J3-4)
Use =0.85 (LRFD, connection designed to prevent slip at required strengthlevel), =0.35 (class A surface), =1.13, =1.0 (standard holes), =
221 (AISC 360-05, Table J3.1M for M22, ASTM A490 bolts) = Number of
slip planes = 2.0 (2 plates, one at each side of the brace web).
Then:
= 149
= 2.5 Use =4 bolts in the web, distributed in 2 rows
of 2 bolts each one.
Shear check:
For single shear in bolts, use

T uw
2
(two shear planes):
= 383 , = 0.75
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3.6)
For ASTM A490 Bolts with threads included in the shear plane:
4-44
= 780 , = 414
Use = 4 , = 380 2 (M22 bolts) to obtain:
OK
= 472 > 383

(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J3-6a)
= 1.2 2.4
Use =0.75 (LRFD), = clear distance in the direction of the force, between
try = 10 (web plate thickness; note that this is equal to brace web
thickness), = 400 , = nominal bolt diameter = 22 mm.
Place the bolts on the web plate (see Figure 4.5-4Figure 4.5-4):
e3
e1*(Nb-1)
e3
e3
e1 *(Nb-1)
e3
web plate
e4
g
e4
Gusset plate
Brace
gap
Figure 4.5-4: Bolts positions scheme on web plate. Note: means the
number of bolts per row.
The values of the distances 1 , 3 , (gage), and 4 are shown:
e1 (mm)
80
e3 (mm)
50
g (mm)
90
e4 (mm)
60
Table 4.5-2
Assume trial values for plate dimensions (see Figure 4.5-4Figure 4.5-4):
4-45
The dimensions of each web plate must fit in the brace web height.
= =
With the above values:
2.4 = 211
Interior bolts:
1.2 = 269 211 , with = 1 and is 24 mm diameter,
from the standard hole for M22 bolts (Re. AISC 360-05, Table J3.3M).
Exterior bolts:
1.2 = 182 , with = 3
and is 24 mm diameter, from the
standard hole for M22 bolts. (Re. AISC 360-05, Table J3.3M)
= 590 >
= 383
OK
The number of slip planes is 2 and both left and right web plates are the same
size.
Steel connecting plates:
Brace side:
Flange splice plates:
Dimensions: = 100 , = 22
Compression
See Figure 4.5-3Figure 4.5-3 to calculate the maximum unfixed length:

= 23 + 5 = 85
4-46
Check one of the two flange plates per side (i.e. take 1 of a total of 4 flange

plates on the flange). Therefore the design force is

6.35 and = 1.0 to obtain
= 325 . Use =
12
= 13.4 < 25 Ch. J applies.

(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.4)
Therefore,
= = 0.9 = 0.9 = 495 >
= 325
OK
Tension yielding on the gross area

(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.1a)
= 0.9 = 0.9 = 495 >
= 481
OK
Tension rupture on the effective area

(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.1b)
= = 0.75
Where = 0.85 for bolted splice plates. In this case, = ,

with = + 2 = 26 . Therefore = 1628 2 0.85 =
1870 2 . Then:
= 488 >
= 481
OK
Block shear
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.3)
= 0.6 + 0.6 +
= 0.75, = 1.0
See the following figure:
4-47
Figure 4.5-5: Block shear scheme for 1 flange plate.

For this connection, the number of bolts per side is =
10
2
=5
Then:
0.6
= 3 + 1 1 = 7040 2
= 0,5 = 4466 2
=
0,5 = 814 2
2
+ = 1397 > 0.6 + = 1382
= 1036 >
OK
= 481
Web splice plates
Dimensions: = 210 , = 10
Compression
See Figure 4.5-4Figure 4.5-4 to calculate the maximum unfixed length is

= 23 + 5 = 105
Check one of the two web plates. Therefore the design force is
Use =
12
= 2.9 and = 1.0 to obtain
= 258 .
= 36.4 > 25 Ch. E applies.

(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.4)
Using the provisions of chapter E of AISC 360-05, calculate the compressive

strength of the plate:
4-48
= 36.4 < 4.71 / = 133.2 = (0.658 ) = 233
2
2
= 1492 . Then = 0.9 = 0.9 = 440 >
= 258
OK

(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.1a)
= 0.9 = 0.9 = 473 >
= 383
OK

(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.1b)
= = 0.75
Where = 0.85 for bolted splice plates. On this case, = 2 ,

with = + 2 = 26 . Therefore = 15802 0.85 =
1785 2 . Then:
= 474 >
OK
= 383
Block shear
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.3)
= 0.6 + 0.6 +
= 0.75, = 1.0
See the following figure:
4-49
Figure 4.5-6: Block shear scheme for a typical web plate.

= =2
2
Then:
= 2 3 + 1 1 = 2600 2
= 2 0,5 = 1820 2
= = 640 2
0.6 + = 693 > 0.6 + = 646
= 485 >
= 383
OK
Gusset side:
Gusset splice plates (for union with flange splice plates)
Determine the dimension for this splice plates (Figure 4.5-3Figure 4.5-3):
= (width of the both flange plates) > = 350
= (thickness of the gusset flange plates, first try to equal the brace
flange thickness so not adding filler plates)
Bearing check (bolts)
The positions of the bolts are already known from the previous design on the
brace side.
4-50
= 1.2 2.4
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J3-6a)
2.4 = 465
Interior bolts:
1.2 = 486 , with = 1 and is the 24 mm diameter of the
Exterior bolts:
1.2 = 296 , with = 3
and is the 24 mm diameter of the
OK
= 3231 > = 1925

Now use the complete tension to verify.
Compression
Suppose that the setback of the plate is = 110

See Figure 4.5-3Figure 4.5-3 to determine that the maximum unfixed length is
= + 3 = 150
The design force is = 1299 .
Use =
12
= 6.35 and = 1.0 to obtain
= 23.6 < 25 Ch. J applies

(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.4)
= 0.9 = 0.9 = 1980 > 1299
OK

(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.1a)
= 0.9 = 0.9 = 1980 > = 1925
OK
4-51

(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.1b)
= = 0.75
Where = 0.85 for bolted splice plates. On this case, = 2 ,

with = + 2 = 26 . Therefore = 7656 2 > 0.85 =
7480 2 and then:
OK
= 2244 > = 1925
Block shear
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.3)
= 0.6 + 0.6 +
= 0.75, = 1.0
Refer to following figure:
Figure 4.5-7: Block shear conservative scheme for gusset flange plate.
10
2
=5
Then, being conservative:
0.6
2 3 + 1 1 = 14080 2
= 2 0.5 = 8932 2
2 /2 0.5 = 1628 2
+ = 2795 > 0.6 + = 2763
= 2072 > = 1925
4-52
OK
Gusset plate (in union with web splice plates)
Assume a gusset plate thickness:

= >
=
Therefore, filler plates will be required to perform the union between the web
of the brace and the gusset plate. The thickness of the filler plates will be
=
+ = . According to section J5 of AISC 360-05
Specification, there is a reduction on the shear strength of the bolts only if the
fillers have > 6 .
Bearing (bolts limit state)
Bolts are already placed from the previous design (web splice plate).
Note that the gusset thickness is more than twice the thickness of the web
plates. The web plates were designed to resist /2 ; so the gusset can resist
.OK
Block shear
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.3)
Consider the following figure:
Figure 4.5-8: Block shear conservative scheme for the gusset plate.
From the figure above:
4-53
The number of bolts per side is =
= =2
2
Then:
= 2 3 + 1 1 = 5720 2
= 2 0,5 = 4004 2
= = 1408 2
0.6 + = 1524 > 0.6 + = 1421
OK
= 1066 > = 765
Limit states of tension (yielding and rupture on the Whitmores section) and
buckling on the Whitmores section will be shown next.
4.
Shear lag of the brace
For OCBF systems, there are no specific requirements for checking the shear
lag of the brace bolted section, so there is no need to check this requirement.
Plus, there are splice plates that can act as reinforcement of the net area.
5.
Gusset plate
Flange gusset splice plate to gusset connection

These plates are going to be welded to the gusset (one at each side of the
gusset). First, calculate the length along the gusset for these plates. Refer to
Figure 4.5-3Figure 4.5-3.
= 23 + 1 1 + = 470
Use double fillet welds for each one of the 2 plates, E70 electrode ( =
482 ) and assume that all of the length will be welded; so = =
. Use = to obtain:
= 0.75 2 0.6 0.707 = 1443 >
= 963
OK
Check the gusset and the flange plate rupture for the weld strength
The base metal of the gusset is on shear due to the development of the
strength of the welds for the connection designed above.
Rupture:
4-54
= 0.75 = 0.75
= 0.75 0.6 = 0.75 0.6 (2 ) = 3722 > = 1443
OK
Also check the same flange splice plate on shear rupture:
= 0.75 0.6 = 0.75 0.6 = 1861 > = 1443
OK
Check the gusset at Whitmores Area
First, calculate the gusset dimensions and place the brace connections within
the gusset:
Lgs
L
Brace CL
Ly
A
db/2
dc/2
Lx
Lx1
Figure 4.5-9: Parameters for the definition of the gusset plates geometry.
The brace has an angle = with respect to the horizontal. Knowing that
the working point of the brace is located at the intersection of the working
lines of beam and column, the distance 1 , measured from the column flange
to the line of action of the brace, is known a priori:
1 =
1

tan
tan 2
2
= 64.7
The distance on Figure 4.5-9Figure 4.5-9, corresponds to the length of the

flange plate to the gusset connection.
= 470
4-55
Assume the following parameters for the distances 1 (from the end of the
brace to gusset connection to the beam flange), (horizontal distance for the
gusset dimension) and (vertical distance for the gusset dimension):
=
=
=
Note that the distances mentioned above must be defined in order to comply
with basic geometry relations:
+ cos
2
cos +
+ sin
2
1 + sin +
1 +
With equal to the thickness of the flange splice plates.

Once the basic geometry of the gusset is defined, it is possible to calculate the
coordinates of all the important points and also the Whitmores area. For this
task, it is useful to use an calculation sheet that shows these points in one
plot. The Whitmores area is measured from the beginning of the flange plate
to gusset connection, using the 30 angle:
L gs
B
Brace CL
L1
30
Ly
30
L whit
db/2
dc/2
Lx
L x1
Figure 4.5-10: Whitmores section on gussets geometry.
4-56
Whitmores length is:

= + 2 + 2 30 = 937
With equal to the gusset flange plate thickness, = 22 .
The values of gusset free edges distances ( and on the figures above) are
calculated using simple geometry relations: = 217 , = 545
Plotting the several points defined by the variables already shown, it is noted
that a small portion of the Withmores width falls within the beam (mainly
within the flange). In the design process it is preferably that the Whitmores
width be located within the gusset plate. In this case, as the beam flange is
very thick (40 mm) compared to the gusset thickness, and a very small part of
the beam web is affected, the properties of the gusset plate will be used for
the entire Whitmores width (it simplifies calculations).
Yielding at the Whitmores area:
= = 20608 2 , with = 22 (gusset plate thickness).

Then:
= 0.9 = 4637 > = 4615
OK
Rupture at the Whitmores area:
As the connection at the end of the flange gusset splice plates is a welded one,
there is no need to do this check because it will not control.
Compression at the Whitmores area:
Use as buckling length the distance 1 = 430 (note that this is not the
longest line from the end of the brace-gusset connection to the gusset edge;
but it is near to the average distance of the three lines option).
Use = 0.65 and =
12
= 6.35 to obtain
2
2
= 44 > 25 Ch. E applies. Then:
= 1019 = 0.658 = 225
4-57
= 0.9 = 4184 > = 3115
6.
OK
Gusset to beam and gusset to column connections
Uniform Force Method (UFM) forces

For all the limit states, except for bolt slip critical, the design forces are:
= 4615
= 3115
Parameters for UFM:
=
= 90 = 90 46 = 44
line).
= 300 , =
= 225
2
2
(angle of the brace with respect to the vertical
Choose trial values for connections centroids:

= 530
= 480
= 66.5
= 64.7
Both terms are quite similar, negligible moment is introduced.
Calculate the forces on the interphases:
=
=
+ +
= 1086
, =
For the compression case:

= = 3115
= 1377 , = 861
= 646 , = 1521
4-58
And the directions of the forces over the gusset plate are shown in the
following figure:
H uc
H uc
V uc
V uc
H ub
V ub
V ub
H ub
Figure 4.5-11: Forces on the gusset edges for the UFM.

A) Tension case. B) Compression case.
Tension case:
= = 4615
= 2041 , = 1275
= 957 , = 2253
Gusset edge stresses:
Use Von Misses criteria for both and edges:
=
+3
1.0
= or (Edge area)
= 0.9 , = 1.0 (strength reduction factors)
edge:
Tension case: = 0.75 < 1.0
Compression case: = 0.51 < 1.0
edge:
Tension case: = 0.79 < 1.0
Compression case: = 0.53 < 1.0
4-59
Gusset free edges stability:

Noting that this check is not mandatory by code provisions:
edge:
= 9.8 0.75
= 21.1 no need for stiffener
edge:
= 24.8 > 0.75 / = 21.1 stiffener needed
There are several possibilities for improving this edge stability, refer to the
general discussions of braces. A special design (stiffener, increasing the gusset
thickness or changing gusset dimensions) will not be made on this example,
but it is recommended to add a stiffener at the edge.
Gusset to beam connection
Welded connection design:
This connection is going to be fillet welded (double sided, E70 electrodes). Use
as effective length of the welds = 930 . Check that this connection is
within the distance and that there is an offset on the gusset corner:
+
= 995 = 1000
= =
= 65
2
2
OK
The tension case controls the design of the welds.

Then =
2
2
+
= 2589
Suppose that = 12 (fillet weld size) to obtain:

= 0.75 0.6 0.707 2 = 3427 > 1.25 = 3236
OK
The 1.25 ductility factor for this welded edge connection has been used,
following the recommendations of AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13th Ed.
4-60
It is important to also check the gusset rupture and the beam flange rupture
(base metals) due to the development of the welds strength:
Gusset rupture:
= 0.75 = 0.75 0.6
= 0.75 0.6 = 3683 > = 3427
OK
Beam flange rupture:

= 0.75 = 0.75 0.6
= 0.75 0.6 2 = 13392 > = 3427
OK
Check of the beam web due to the action of a concentrated force:
Beam web yielding:
(Re. AISC 360-05, J10)
This limit state must be checked for tension and compression forces. The
tension case controls. It is noted that the concentrated force to be resisted is
not applied at a distance from the beam end that is greater to the depth of the
beam ( = 580 < = 600 ).
Use = 10 , = + = 40 + 6 = 46 and = max , = 46 to
obtain:
= 1.0 { 2.5 + = 403 < max

,
= 1275
So, there is the need of adding stiffeners (or increasing the beam web
thickness). That design will not be done on this example (refer to Chapter 6 of
Moment Connections and section J10 of AISC 360-05 Specification for more
information about the design of stiffeners for concentrated forces).
Beam web Crippling

(Re. AISC 360-05, J10)
This limit state only applies for compression forces. The concentrated
compressive force to be resisted is applied at a distance from the beam end
that is greater than its half depth ( = 580 >
2
= 0.75 0.80
1+3
= 300 ).
1.5
4-61
= 873 >
= 861
OK
Gusset to column connection

This connection consists of 2 clip angles welded to the gusset plate, and
bolted to the column flange (one clip angle each side of the gusset plate).
Determine trial dimensions for the angle shape:
B
B
A-A
B
t
e3
Bolted side
t
B-B
(N bolt side -1)
e3
A
g
e3
e3
Figure 4.5-12: General Scheme of the clip angle connection.

Note that the number of bolts and rows in the final design is not necessarily
the same as shown in this Figure.
Choose angles with = and = = . The thickness of the
column flange is = . The centroid of this connection was assumed to
be located at = .
Properties for bolts used:
ASTM A490 M22 bolts, and according to the table J3.3M of AISC 360-05 code,
the hole diameter is 24 mm.
Initial try of:
4-62
= (total number of bolts, considering 2 clip angles)

= (number of rows in each clip angle)
= (number of bolts on each row of each clip angle)
Bolted side of the connection design:
The tension case controls (

= 957 and = 2041 ). Forces in
each bolt are:
= = 43
= 93
Check direct shear in the bolts ( = 380 2 for M22 bolts):

= 0.75 = 118 > = 93
OK
Place the bolts at the connection and calculate other required distances:
Refer to Figure 4.5-12Figure 4.5-12. Use = > , = , =
>
=
Calculate the length of the angle (or length of the connection)
= 23 + 1 (
1) = 700 + /2 = 830 = 850
OK
Calculate the offset at the gusset corner for this side:
= = = 130
2
It is also noted that both clip angles fall within the column flange width and
that no interruption is made on the column fillet web toe area.
Interaction V-T for bolts (slip critical limit state):

(Re. AISC 360-05, J3.9)
4-63
Bolts are subjected to shear and tension components for the tension case,
which controls the design.
For the slip critical limit state, as said on AISC 341-05 for OCBF systems, the
required strength of the connection is obtained using the load combinations of
the applicable building code, not considering the amplified seismic load (0
factor). Nevertheless, in this case, the design for all the slip critical limit states
has been made conservatively using a 0 = 2.0 factor. Therefore, the procedure
done with the UFM for the design forces, must be done equally with the design
forces for the slip-critical limit state (tensile case controls, = 2260 )
Applying the UFM to this force, the design forces for slip critical limit state on
the gusset to column connection are:
= 999
= 468
And the strength of one bolt is:
=
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J3-4)
Use = 0.35 (class A faying surface), = 1.13 , = 1.0 (standard holes),

= 221 (table J3.1M on AISC 360-05), and = 1.0 (number of slip planes
on each angle). Then:
= 87.4
According to section J3.9 of AISC 360-05, when combined tension and shear
slip critical connections are performed, the previous available strength per bolt
must be reduced by the factor .
= 1
force =
= 0.91, with = 11 (number of bolts carrying the applied tensile
; the check will be for one angle).

Using = 0.85 = 748 >
= 500
OK
Interaction V-T for bearing type connections:
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3.7)

Now return using the design forces for all the other limit states.
4-64
=
,
= 1.3
Use
= 0.75
and
= 244
(required shear stress on each bolt).

= 152
= 114 > = 93
OK
Bearing check for bolts in shear
Use = = 14
= 1.2 2.4 = 296
Interior bolts
1.2 = 242 , with = 1 and is 24 mm diameter, from
standard hole for M22 bolts (Re. AISC 360-05, Table J3.3M). Then =
0.75 = 182 > = 93 .
Exterior bolts:
1.2 = 255 , with = 3
and is 24 mm diameter, from standard
hole for M22 bolts (Re. AISC 360-05, Table J3.3M). Then
191 > = 93
= 0.75 =
Check prying action

(Re. AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13th Ed.)
First calculate some parameters to be used:

= =
= 43 (required tensile strength per bolt)
= 22
(bolt diameter)
= 24 (hole diameter, use standard hole)
= 1 , 4 = 40
= 400
= 780
= = 0.75 = 0.75 = 222
= 1 = 0.4
The number of bolt rows is = on each angle. Refer to the following figure:
4-65
T+q
b'
b
a'
a
T
b) prying forces in angle
Figure 4.5-13: Prying force parameters definition.

Taken from AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13th Ed. Figure 9-4b.
From the figure above:
= 4 = 40
= 4
= 33
2
= 54
=
= 22
2
= min + ; 1.25 +
= 52.25
2
2
Then calculate:
= = 0.42
1
=
1 = 9.8 > 1 = 1

Therefore, the required thickness for the angle in order to have adequate
fitting strength and stiffness and bolt strength is:
=
4.44
(1+ )
= 13.76 < = 14
OK
Welded side of the connection design (E70 electrode):

The design will be made for each of the 2 angles. Therefore, the design force
is: =
1
2
2 = 1127 . Use = = 700 and = 12 (maximum

2 +
permitted) to obtain:
4-66
WELDS = 0.75 0.6 0.707 = 1290 > = 1127
OK
Check the gusset rupture so to develop the weld strength:

= 0.75 = 0.75 0.6
= 0.75 0.6 = 2772 > = 1290
OK
Clip angles strength
Check one of the two angles:

Shear Yielding
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.2)
= 1.0 0.6 = 1.0 0.6 = 1470 >
OK
= 1020
Shear Rupture
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.2)
= 0.75 0.6
0.75 0.6
= 1043 >
= 1020
OK
= + 2 = 26
Block Shear
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.3)
Refer to the following figure:
Figure 4.5-14: Block shear scheme for 1 clip angle.
= 3 +
1 1 = 9100 2
= 0,5 = 5278 2
= 54 0,5 = 574 2
= 0.6 + = 1496 < 0.6 + = 1594
4-67
= 0.75 = 1122 >
= 1020
OK
Column flange strength
As the column flange is thicker than the clip angle, it is OK.

Column web strength due to concentrated loads:
Column web yielding:

(Re. AISC 360-05, J10)
This limit state must be checked for tension and compression forces. The
tension case controls. It is noted that the concentrated force to be resisted is
applied at a distance from the column end that is greater to the depth of the
column.
Use = 12 , = + = 22 + 6 = 28 , and = max , = 28 to
obtain
= 1.0 { 5 + = 504 < max

,
= 957
So, there is the need of adding stiffeners (or increasing the column web
thickness). That design will not be done in this example (refer to Chapter 6 of
Moment Connections and section J10 of AISC 360-05 Specification for more
information about the design of stiffeners for concentrated forces).
Column web Crippling:

(Re. AISC 360-05, J10)
This limit state only applies for compression forces. It is noted that the
concentrated compressive force to be resisted is applied at a distance from the
column end that is greater than its half depth.
2
= 0.75 0.80
1+3
1.5
= 889 >
= 646
4-68
OK
7.
Beam-to-column connection
The controlling combination is when the brace is in tension; suppose that the
required end reaction on the beam is = 50 and the drag force on the beam
is = 0 . Therefore, forces present in the connection are the following
Slip critical limit state
Axial force:
= cos 46 = 1570
(Horizontal component of the brace force)
= =
= 0 1103 1570 = 467
Shear force:
= =
= 50 861 = 811
Bearing limit state
Axial force:
= cos 46 = 3206
(Horizontal component of the brace force)
= = = 953
Shear force:
= = = 1225
This connection consists of 2 clip angles welded to the beam web and bolted
to the column flange (one clip angle each side of the beam web).
Calculate trial dimensions for the angle shape (Figure 4.5-12Figure 4.5-12):
Choose angles with = and = = . The thickness of the
column flange is = .
Properties for bolts used:
ASTM A490 M22 bolts, STD hole diameter is 24 mm according to table J3.3M
of AISC 360-05 code.
4-69
Initial try:
= (Total number of bolts, considering the 2 clip angles)

= (Number of rows on each clip angle)
= (Number of bolts on each row of each clip angle)
Bolted side of the connection design:

The tension case controls. The forces on each bolt are:
= 68
= = 88
Check direct shear on the bolts ( = 380 2 for M22 bolts):

= 0.75 = 118 > = 88
OK.
Place the bolts and determine other distances
Refer to Figure 4.5-12. Use = > , = , = >
=
Calculate the length of the angle (or length of the connection):
= 23 + 1 (
1) = 460
Check that the clip angle falls within the beam height:
= 460 < 2 2 = 508
OK
It is also noted that both clip angles fall within the column flange width and
that no interruption is made on the column fillet web toe area.
Interaction V-T for bolts (slip critical limit state):

(Re. AISC 360-05, J3.9)
Use the forces for slip critical limit state check.

= 467 (axial force)
4-70
= 811 (shear force)

(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J3-4).
Use = 0.35 (class A faying surface), = 1.13, = 1.0 (standard holes),

= 221 (table J3.1M on AISC 360-05) and = 1.0 (number of slip planes
on each angle). Then:
= 87.4
According to section J3.9 of AISC 360-05, when there is combined tension and
shear in slip critical connections, the previous available strength must be
reduced by a factor .
= 1
=
= 0.86, with = 7 (number of bolts carrying the applied tension
; the check will be performed for 1 angle).
Then, using = 0.85 = 451 >
= 405
OK
Interaction V-T for bearing type connections

(Re. AISC 360-05, J3.7)
Use the design forces for all the other limit states.
=
,
= 1.3
Use
= 0.75
and
= 230
(required shear stress on each bolt). Therefore:

= 166
= 124 > = 88
OK
Bearing check for bolts in shear (use = = 18 )

= 1.2 2.4 = 380
Interior bolts:
1.2 = 311 , with = 1 and is 24 mm diameter, from
0.75 = 233 > = 88 .
Exterior bolts:
4-71
1.2 = 328 , with = 3
and is 24 mm diameter from the
0.75 = 246 > = 88 .
Check prying action

(Re. AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13th Ed.)
First, calculate some parameters to be used:

= = 68 (required tensile strength per bolt)
= 22 (bolt diameter)
= 24 (hole diameter, use standard hole)
= 1 , 4 = 50
= 400
= 780
= = 0.75 = 0.75 = 222
= 1 = 0.52
Now, the number of bolt rows is = on each angle. Refer to Figure 4.5-13.
Then:
= 4 = 50
= 4
= 41
2
= 68
=
= 30
2
= min + ; 1.25 +
= 62.25
2
2
And calculate:
=
=
= 0.48
1
1 = 7 > 1 = 1

Therefore, the required thickness for the angle, so to have adequate fitting
strength and stiffness and bolt strength is:
=
4-72
4.44
(1+ )
= 17.26 < = 18
OK
Welded side of the connection design (E70 electrode):

The design will be made for each angle. Therefore, the design force is =
1
2
2 + 2 = 776 . Use = = 460 and = 11 to obtain:

WELDS = 0.75 0.6 0.707 = 777 > = 776 OK
Check the beam web rupture so to develop the weld strength:

= 0.75 = 0.75 0.6
= 0.75 0.6 = 828 > = 777
OK
Clip angles strength
Shear Yielding
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.2)
= 1.0 0.6 = 1.0 0.6 = 1242 >
= 613
OK
Shear Rupture
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.2)
= 0.75 0.6
0.75 0.6
= 901 >
= 613
OK
Use = + 2 = 26
Block Shear
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.3)
Refer to Figure 4.5-14. Then:
= 3 +
1 1 = 7380 2
= 0.5 = 4338 2
= 68 0.5 = 990 2
= 0.6 + = 1437 < 0.6 + = 1503
= 0.75 = 1078 >
= 613
OK
Column web shear:
4-73
The check is performed for = 957 .

= 1.0 0,6 = 1.0 0.6 = 810 < 953
Therefore stiffeners for the column are needed. The design of them is not done
on this example. For major information refer to section J10 of AISC 360-05
Specification and Chapter 6 of Moment Connections on this Manual.
4.5.c.
Designed connection
10
Detail 1
10
Detail 3
Detail 2
Gusset plate: t = 22 mm
10
10
46
12
Detail 4
Notes:
- Stiffener and doubler plates for column and beam
are not designed
-Welds: E70 electrodes
4-74
12
Detail 1
PL t=22 mm
20 M22 ASTM A490
PL 725X100X22
Gusset
Brace
Detail 2
8 M22 ASTM A490
Note:
Add 2 Filler plates (PL 365x210x6)
2 PL 365x210x10 (one each side)
Detail 3 : Clip angle for gusset to column
A - A:
filled weld to gusset
11 M22 ASTM A490 (Total = 22 M22)
4-75
Detail 4 : Clip angle for beam to column
A - A:
fillet welded to beam web
7 M22 ASTM A490 (Total = 14 M22)
4-76
4.6.
Example: V Brace to Beam Connection (at Beam Midspan)
4.6.a.
Design requirements
For a general discussion concerning brace connections design requirements,

see the previous General Discussion section on this chapter. In that section is
given an overview of the AISC and Chilean provisions regarding braces, for
SCBF and OCBF systems.
In this example design is going to be done according to the provision for OCBF
systems.
4.6.b.
Design the V-brace to beam connection, at beam midspan, shown in Figure

4.6-1.
The acting forces on the brace for the design are obtained from loads
combinations that consider earthquake but not including the amplified seismic
load.
= 4500
= 4000
4.6-1: General view of the connection to be designed.

1.
Section and Material properties
Brace section
H300x300x135.8
(Re. Table 2.1.1 ICHA)
4-77
= 300 , = 300 , = 16 , = 22 , = 17296 2

= 278000000 4 , = 99100000 4 , = 127 , = 76
Beam section
H400x400x219.0
(Re. Table 2.1.1 ICHA)
= 400 , = 400 , = 16 , = 28 , = 27904 2

Beam, columns and plates material properties
A345ESP
(Re. Table 3, NCh203.Of2006)

= 345 , = 450 , = 200000
Weld properties
70 ksi electrode, = 480
2.
Verification of width thickness ratios for braces
According to section 8.2b of AISC 341, braces shall comply with the following:
<
Where is obtained from table I-8-1 of the seismic provisions.
For brace flanges (A345ESP):
< = 0.30
= 7.22
2
For the brace web (A345ESP):
4-78
< = 1.12
2.33
1.49
= 35.87
0.9
If the brace is working only under compression load, with no flexural

solicitation, it can be used 1.49
limit.
In this example,
Brace web:
= . <
OK
= <
OK
Brace flange:
3.
Design forces
For OCBF use the following design forces on braces:

Tensile Force:
=
(Re. AISC 341-05 14.4).
Where is taken from the table I-6-1 of AISC 341-05 (similar to ASTM
A572Gr50 steel), which in the case of A345 ESP, is = 1.1:
= 6564
Compression force
=
Where is calculated according to the provisions of chapter E of the AISC
360-05 specification:
The element slenderness is ( = 1):
If
< 4.71
= 56 < 4.0
= 96.3 (Re. Section 14.2 AISC 341-05)
= 113.4:
4-79
= 0.658
=
= 629
Therefore:
= 274
And:
= 4738
And for the slip critical failure, the design forces on braces shall be considered
as (from load combinations, since it is allowed for the slip critical limit state):
= 4500
= 4000
Forces acting on the edge of the gusset plate
The forces on the beam to gusset plate connection are:
= cos + cos
= sin sin
2
Then,
= 7992
= 1291
= 1598344
4.
Gusset plate general Dimensions
Try with a gusset plate with the following dimensions:

=
=
=
=
4-80
= (Thickness of Gusset plate)

=
4.6-2: General Dimensions of gusset plate

5.
Connection of the brace to the gusset plate
The web and the flanges of the brace have to be connected to the gusset
plate. The calculation of the force distribution in the brace between the web
and flanges of the brace is:
= + 2
= 4096 2
= 6600 2
=
= 1554

= = 2505
For the slip critical type of failure, the distribution of forces is:
= 1066

= = 1717
6.
Connection of the brace flanges
For the flange connection of the brace, we use a cover plates per each flange,
bolted to the brace and welded to the gusset.
4-81
Check of the bolts

Use bolts M24 (24 mm of diameter, standard holes of 27 mm), ASTM A490
bolts, threads included in the shear plane. Even though NCh2369.Of2003 does
not require to verify the slip critical type of failure, in some project
specifications is common to verify this type of failure anyway.
Slip Critical failure
The nominal strength is:
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-4)
(Re. AISC358 2.4.1)
=
= 0.85
Consider Class A connection surfaces (conservative), and standard size holes

(Re. AISC 360-05, J3.8):
= 0.35
= 1.00
= 1.13
Also, the tensile nominal strength for M24 ASTM 490 bolts is:
= 257
Since there is one slip plane, = 1.0.

Therefore, the nominal shear strength for one bolt is:
= 86
Then, the number of bolts required for the connection considering slip critical
failure is: 19.88. Use = 20.
Shear bolt nominal strength
The nominal shear strength is:
=
= 0.75
4-82
(Re. AISC360-05, J3-1)

(Re. AISC358 2.4.1)
Where is the nominal gross area of the bolt, therefore:

= 452 2
= 414
(Re. AISC360-05, Table J3.2)
Then:
= 140
Then, the number of bolts required for the connection is: > 17.83.
Then, = is OK.
Use two rows of ten bolts each one.
Tensile yielding of the plate
Consider that the flange is connected to the gusset plate with two plates (at
each side of the gusset plate). It is reasonable that cover plates do not have a
width greater than the width flange. The following relation shall be
accomplished:
2 + < = 300
Where is the thickness of the gusset plate.
The nominal strength for tensile yielding limit state is:
=
= 0.9
(Re. AISC360-05 J4-1)
Try with a plate of length = , = wide (in order to cover

the entire flange) and a thickness = .
4-83
20 M24 A490
4.6-3: Bolt spacing and plate dimensions.

Then:
= = 4590 2
Then, for each plate
=
And for the whole connection:
OK
= > 2505
Tensile Rupture of the flange plate
The nominal strength for tensile rupture limit state is:
=
= 0.75
(Re. AISC360-05 J4-1)
The effective area subject to tensile rupture is:

= = 3604 2
Then, for the whole connection
= = < 2505
Then, the plate is not strong enough. Try changing the thickness of the plate,
use = , then
4-84
OK
= = > 2505
Bearing and tear out of the flange plate
For each plate:
Interior bolts
According to chapter J3.10 of the AISC 360-05, the bearing strength of the
plate is:
= 1.2 2.4 = 985 (Re. AISC 360-05, J3-6a)
= 0.75
Considering that for the internal bolts is:
= 64 27 = 37
Then,
= < =
Exterior bolts
Considering that for the exterior bolts is:
= 46
Then,
27
= 32.5
2
= < 933 =
Then, the nominal strength of the connection is:
= + = >
2505
2
OK
Bearing of the brace

The nominal strength for the bearing limit state in the brace is:
= 2.4 = 570
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-6a)
4-85
= 0.75
Then, the nominal resistance of the connection is:
= = > 2505
OK
Block shear rupture of the flange plate

The nominal strength for the block shear rupture limit state is given by:
(Re. AISC360-05, J4-5)
= 0.6 + 0.6 +
= 0.75
Where = 1.0 in this case, according to the commentary of the AISC 360-05
specification (AISC 360-05 C-J4.2). The values of , and are obtained
from the following figure:
4.6-4: Block Shear failure path for one flange plate.

Therefore,
= 64 9 + 46 = 22392 2
side
=
0.5 27 = 13158 2
135
=
0.5 27 = 1944 2
2
Then:
= < 5510 = >
OK
Welding of the flange plate

Use a two fillet weld between the gusset plate and the flange plate. Consider
t = 12 . The nominal strength of the weld is:
4-86
= 0.60
= 0.75
Then
=
= 2 0.707 = 17
= 438
= 7432 2
Therefore:
= >
OK
Base metal failure

= 0.6
= 0.75
For each flange plate:
= = = 15768 2
Therefore:
= >
OK
For the gusset plate:

= = 2 = 26280 2
Therefore:
= >
OK
4-87
7.
Connection of the web
For the web connection of the brace, use two cover plates bolted to the brace
and to the gusset. Since the thickness of the gusset plate is greater than the
thickness of the web of the brace, we have to use fillers in order of
accommodate the plates of the connection. The reduction factor for the use of
fillers is,
(Re. section J.5 AISC 360-05)
= 1 0.0154 6
Where is the total thickness of the fillers. Considering two fillers 7 mm thick
each one:
= 0.877
Check the bolts
Use M24 bolts (24 mm diameter, standard holes of 27 mm), ASTM A490
bolts, threads included in the shear plane. Even though NCh2369.Of2003 do
not require to verify the slip critical type of failure, in some projects
specifications require verification of this type of failure.
The nominal strength for slip critical failure is:
=
= 0.85
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-4)

(Re. AISC358 2.4.1)
Consider Class A connection surfaces (conservative), and standard size holes.

(Re. AISC 360-05, J3.8):
= 0.35
= 1.00
= 1.13
Also, the tensile nominal strength for the M24 ASTM 490 bolts is:
= 257
There are two slip planes, = 2.0.
4-88
Therefore, the nominal strength in shear for one bolt is:

= 178 = 133
failure is: 7.03. Use = 8.
(Re. AISC360-05, J3-1)
(Re. AISC358 2.4.1)
=
= 0.75
Where is the nominal gross area of the bolt, therefore:

= 452 2
= 414
Then:
= = 123
There are two shear planes:
= 246
Then, the number of bolts required for the connection is: > 6.31. Use =
8.
Use two rows of four bolts each one.
Tensile yielding of the plate
=
= 0.9
(Re. AISC360-05 J4-1)
Try plates = long, = wide, = thick.
4-89
16 M24 A490
4.6-5: Bolt spacing and plate dimensions.

= = 3360 2
Then,
= >
1554
2
OK
Tensile Rupture of the web plate

(Re. AISC360-05 J4-1)
=
= 0.75
The effective area subject to tensile rupture is:
= 2 = 2548 2
Then,
1554
OK
= 1.2 2.4 = 363

= 0.75
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-6a)
= >
Bearing and tear out of the web plate

Interior bolts
4-90
Considering that for the interior bolts is:

= 64 27 = 37
Then,
= < =
Exterior bolts
= 46
27
= 32.5
2
Then,
= < 363 =
= + = >
1554
2
OK
Bearing of the brace

The nominal strength for the bearing limit state in the brace is:
= 2.4 = 415
= 0.75
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-6a)
Then, the nominal resistance of the connection is:

= = >
OK
Block shear rupture of the web plate

(Re. AISC360-05, J4-5)
= 0.6 + 0.6 +
= 0.75
4-91
= 1.0, according to the commentary of the AISC 360-05 specification (AISC

360-05 C-J4.2). The values of , , and are obtained from the following
figure.
4.6-6: Shear block failure path.

= 2 64 3 + 64 = 6664 2
= 1 27 = 4018 2
= 64 27 = 518 2
Then:
= < 1613 = >
1554
2
OK
The connection to the gusset plate is exactly the same, but for the limit state
of bearing, it has to be considered the thickness of the gusset plate. Since the
gusset plate is thicker than the brace web, by inspection that limit state does
not control the design.
8.
Connection between the gusset plate and the beam
Weld between gusset plate and the beam

According to the force transfer mechanism, the design forces for the weld are:
= 7992
= 1291
= 1598344
Use the elastic method for the calculation of the maximum stress in the weld.
(Re. Chapter 8 AISC Manual of Steel Construction)
4-92
+
2
2 + 2
where is the inertia of the weld and is the effective area of the weld.
Use 26 mm fillet weld size; the height of the weld is equal to the length
of the base of the gusset on the beam. Then,
= = 1760
= 2 26 0.707 = 37
3
=
= 16702424405 4
12
= = 64705 2
= 104
= 124
= 162
the nominal strength for a weld is:
(Re. Table J2.5 AISC 360-05)
= 0.60
= 0.75
Then,
OK
= > 162
Also we have to verify the average tension in the weld:
1
2

+
2
= 150
And we have to verify for 1.25 , then:
= > 1.25 = 188
OK
4-93
Base metal failure

= 0.6
= 0.75
Then, for the gusset plate:
= = = 52800 2
Therefore:
= > =
OK
Also, for the beam flange

= 2 = 98560
Then,
= > =
OK
Beam web local yielding

The maximum distributed tensile force for the interface between beam and
gusset plate is given by:
=

+
2
And the length of the gusset base that is subject to tensile loads is given by:

=
+
= 104
2
= 64
2
=
4-94
Then,
= 1088
= 3.829 /
Then, the tensile force is:
1
= = 2084
2
And the nominal strength for web local yielding is (considering that the load is
applied at a distance greater than /2 from the end of the member)
= 5 +
= 1.00
(Re. J10-2 AISC 360-05)
Where is the distance between the face of the flange and the toe of the fillet
weld of the beam. is the distance in which the load is applied, then:
= 36
= = 1088
= > 2418
OK
Beam web Crippling

The maximum compressive force for unit of length in the interface beamgusset is given by:
=
= 2.362
2
And the length that is subject to compression is:

= = 672
The force is:
1
= = 793
2
The nominal strength for web crippling, (considering that the load is applied at
a distance greater than /2 from the end of the member) is:
4-95
= 0.802 1 + 3
1.5
(Re. J10-4 AISC 360-05)
= 0.75
=
Therefore,
= > 793
OK
Since the last two verifications have considered the beam, it has to be verified
a load combination that considers = 0.3 (Re AISC 341 14.3(1)), then, the
forces on the connection between the beam and the gusset are
= 5646
= 3636
= 1129289
And the stresses are:

+
= 116
2
= 3
2
=
Then, the tensile and compressive forces are

= 2.96
= 3633
As it can be seen, both are lesser than the nominal resistances, but it is
important to verify this because the tensile force will increase if a smaller
compressive force is considered and web local yielding can occur.
Tensile Yielding of the Whitmore area
Considering that the Whitmore area is the result of projecting the width of the
connection between the brace and the gusset plate in 30 degrees until the end
of the connection, then:
= + 2 tan 30
4-96
Consider
= 300 + 2 = 376
= 438
= 881 2
Then:
= = 26453 2
And the nominal resistance is:
=
= 0.90
(Re. J4-1 AISC 360-05)
Then,
= > 6564
OK
Compression buckling of the Whitmore Area

The average buckling length of the gusset plate is given by:
=
1 cos 30
cos +
= 446
2
( + 30)
Furthermore,
=
12
= 8.66
Considering = 1.2, because is only one edge of the gusset restrained, the
slenderness is
= 61.8 > 25
Then, use the provisions of chapter E of AISC 360-05:

As
< 4.71
= 113.4:
4-97
= 0.658
=
2
2
= 517
= 261
The nominal resistance is:
=
= 0.9
(Re. E3-1 AISC 360-05)
Then,
= > 4738
OK
Free edge buckling

According to the geometry of the gusset connection, there are two free edges:
4.6-7: Free edge buckling lengths

1
= 466
+ 30
1
=
= 674
2 ( 30)
1 =
2
Then, according to Astaneh, the maximum free edge length that does not
generates buckling is:
= 0.75
4-98
= 542
Then, the first free edge complies with the requirements. The second one
does not comply, so stiffeners have to be provided as shown in Figure 4.6-8.
STIFFENERS
(NOT DESIGNED)
4.6-8: Stiffeners for free buckling

Designed Connection
PL1100X135X38
H300X300X135.8
12
12
TYP
t = 30 mm
M24
M24
M24
STIFFENERS
(NOT DESIGNED)
2 PL540X240X14
26
26
TYP
H400X400X219.0
4.6-9: General view of the designed connection.
4-99
4-100
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
5.
SHEAR CONNECTIONS
5.1.
Shear
tab
connection)
5.1.a.
Design requirements
beam-to-column
connection
(single
plate
1.
NCh2369.Of2003:
Use high strength bolts (ASTM A325 or ASTM A490). Arc welding
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003, 8.5.1)
Bolts must be prestressed to 70% of the nominal tensile strength. Always
the nominal strength shall be verified as a bearing type connection.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003, 8.5.6)
For field joints, see requirements of section 8.5.8.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003, 8.5.8)
5.1.b.
1.
General recommendations
AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13th edition
Part 10 of the AISC Manual of Steel Construction requires the following

verifications for shear tab connections (or single plate connections):
Check applicable limit states for bolts (part 7 of the AISC Construction
Manual).
Check applicable limit states for welds (part 8 of the AISC Construction
Manual).
Check applicable limit states for the connecting elements (part 9 of the
AISC Construction Manual).
Furthermore, in this example, the conventional configuration for a shear tab

connection is used, which according to the AISC Construction Manual must
meet the following requirements (See Figure 5.1-1):
A single vertical line of bolts is permitted. The number of bolts is limited

from two to twelve.
The distance a (see Figure 5.1-1) has to be less or equal to 88 mm.
STD or SSL holes are permitted.
5-1
The horizontal edge distance, , must be equal to or greater than 2 for

both the plate and the beam web.
The vertical edge distance, Lev, must satisfy requirements from table J3.4
of AISC 360-05 specification. (Minimum edge distances from center of
STD hole to edge of connected part, for more information, see AISC
Manual of Steel Construction)
The thickness of the plate and the beam web must satisfy
+ 1.6
Furthermore, in the conventional configuration, the connection plate must be

welded on both sides for the connection with the column flange. It is
recommended that the length of the connecting plate must be greater than
one half of the depth of the beam.
Following the requirements described above, the connection must be verified
for bolt shear, block shear rupture, bearing, shear yielding and shear rupture.
The advantage of the conventional configuration is that neither buckling of the
plate nor the eccentricity of the bolts has to be verified. If STD holes are used
and the number of bolts is less than 10, plate buckling limit state will not
control for the conventional configuration.
L ev
Leh
n - 1 @ 3" Lev
Figure 5.1-1: General provisions for the shear tab connection conventional
configuration. From AISC Manual of Steel Construction, 13th Ed, figure 10-1
5.1.c.
Example
Design a shear tab bolted connection (single plate connection) between a

column flange and a beam as shown in Figure 5.1-2. Use A250 ESP steel
required for constructions subjected to dynamic loads, according
NCh203.Of2006 , Table 3. Use 70 ksi electrode for welds.
5-2
The column and the beam are a Chilean H300x300x87.3 and a

H400x300x83.5 built-up sections. Assume that the connection transfers only
shear forces and the elements have been designed to support those forces.
The shear forces for the design are:
= 90
= 120
H400X300X83.5
H300X300X87.3
PL HxBxt
Figure 5.1-2: General view of the connection.

1.
Materials and section properties
H300x300x87.3
(Re. Table 2.1.1 ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures)
= 300 , = 300
= 10 , = 14
H400x300x83.5
= 400 , = 300
= 6 , = 14
A250ESP

= 250 ,
= 400
5-3
BOLTS: ASTM A490, threads included in the shear planes, STD holes.
WELDS: 70 ksi electrode, = 480 MPa
2.
Design Forces
= 1.2 + 1.6 = 300
3.
Bolts
Use M20 bolts (20 mm of diameter, standard holes of 22 mm), ASTM A490
threads included in the shear plane. Even though NCh2369.Of2003 does not
require to verify the connection as slip critical, sometimes project
specifications do require it.
Tip:
It is important to notice that following the requirements for conventional shear
tab configurations, as defined on AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13th
edition, the thicknesses of the connecting plate and beam web are controlled
by the size of the bolt.
Slip Critical Connection
=
= 0.85
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-4)
Consider Class A connection surfaces, and standard size holes.

(Re. AISC 360-05, J3.8)
= 0.35
= 1.00
= 1.13
Also, the tensile nominal strength for M20 ASTM 490 bolts is
= 179
Since there is one slip plane, then = 1.0.
For one bolt, the design slip strength is:
= 60
5-4
strength is: 4.98. Use = 5 bolts.
=
= 0.75
(Re. AISC360-05, J3-1)
Where is the nominal gross area of the bolt, and in this example the
threads are supposed to be not excluded from the shear plane, then:
= 314 2
= 414
= 97
The number of bolts required for the connection is: > 3.1.
Then, the slip critical strength controls the design, use = .
Bolt spacing and plate dimensions
Consider a minimum bolt spacing of 60 mm and a minimum distance to the
edge of 34 mm (refer to Bolted Connections section 2.4 on this Manual). The
minimum length and width of the shear plate are:
= 4 60 + 2 34 = 308
= 2 34 +
With the gap between the column and the beam, use = 12 mm, then:
= 2 34 + 12 = 80
In order to satisfy the conventional configuration requirements, use =
and = . These values satisfy the requirements for the conventional
configuration for shear tab connections:
= 40 2 = 40
= 50 < 88
OK
OK
Use a plate PL320 x 90 x 8.
5-5
Figure 5.1-3: Dimensions of the shear plate and bolt spacing.

4.
Bearing strength at bolt holes
Interior bolts
= 1.2 2.4 = 154
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-6a)
for the interior bolts is:

= 60 22 = 38
Where the standard hole dimension for M20 bolts is 22 mm.
(Re. Table J3.3M AISC 360-05)
= < =
Exterior bolts
for the exterior bolts is:
= 40
22
= 29
2
= < 154 =
The bearing strength of the connection is:
5-6
= + = > 300
Check the conventional configuration requirements:
= 8 <
5.
OK
OK
+ 1.6 = 11.6
Shear yielding of the plate
The nominal strength for the shear yielding limit state is:
= 0.6
= 1.00
(Re. AISC360-05 J4-3)
= = 320 8 = 2560 2 , therefore:

OK
= > 300
6.
Shear rupture of the plate
The nominal strength for the shear rupture limit state is:
= 0.6
= 0.75
(Re. AISC360-05 J4-4)
Where is the net area of the plate, which considers the reduction of the
section due to bolt holes, the calculation diameter for M20 holes is:
= 22
(Nominal hole for M20 bolts)
= 22 + 2 = 24
= = 1600 2
= < 300
Try changing the length of the plate to 340 mm:
= = 1760 2
= > 300
7.
OK
Block shear rupture
= 0.6 + 0.6 + (Re. AISC360-05, J4-5)
5-7
= 0.75
Where Ubs = 1.0 in this case, according to the commentary in AISC 360-05
Figure 5.1-4: Block shear path.

Then:
= 50 4.5 = 1456 2
= 50 = 2320 2
= 40 0.5 = 224 2
= 439 > 438 = 328 > 300
8.
OK
Bolt bearing of the beam web
The bearing nominal strength is given by the following expression:

= 2.4
= 0.75
Considering that = , for each bolt:
=
Then for the whole connection:
= = > 300
5-8
OK
Tip:
In this case it only has to be verified the bearing strength of the beam web
because there is no cope in the end of the beam; however if the beam is coped
in the end it has to be verified the tear out limit state.
9.
Weld shear
According to the recommendations of the AISC Manual of Steel Construction,

the weld of the connection between the plate and the column flange has to be
verified considering eccentricity of the weld, even though the eccentricity for
the design of the bolts can be neglected.
The weld used for the connection between the plate and column flange are two
lines of welds parallel to the shear for both sides of the plate of connection,
(see Figure 5.1-53), then the eccentricity between the weld and the bolts line
is:
= 50
The weld is subject to a shear force and a moment given by:
= 300 = = 15000
Since there are shear and moment acting on the connection, it is used an
elastic method for the calculation of the maximum stress for the weld.
=
(Re. AISC Manual of Steel Construction, Chapter 8)
2 + 2
Where is the inertia of the weld and is the effective area of the weld.
Use 6 mm fillet welds , and the length of the weld, , is equal to the
length of the plate minus two times the thickness of the plate, = 324 ,
therefore:
= 6 0.707 = 4.24
3
= 2
= 24035304 4
12
= 2 = 2747 2
= 101
= 109
= 149
5-9
The nominal strength of the weld is:

(Re. Table J2.5 AISC 360-05)
= 0.60
= 0.75
Then,
= > 149
6
6
Figure 5.1-5: Weld distribution.

10. Designed connection
H400X300X83.5
H300X300X87.3
PL 340x90x8
Figure 5-6: Designed connection.
5-10
OK
5.1.d.
References
AISC Manual of Steel Construction, 13th Edition.

Arze, Recin y Asociados, Ingenieros Consultores, 2000. Manual
de Diseo para Estructuras de Acero (ICHA Manual for the
Design of Steel Structures). Instituto Chileno del Acero (ICHA),
Santiago, Chile.
5-11
5.2.
Shear single angle beam-to-column connection
5.2.a.
Design requirements:
1.
NCh2369. Of2003
electrodes shall comply with the requirements of the code.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.1)
Bolts must be prestressed to a 70% of the nominal tensile strength.
connection.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.6)
5.2.b.
1.
ICHA: Manual de Diseo para Estructuras de Acero
In shear connections for beams the angle recommended is L80x80, which

has been standardized for this application.
(Re. Section 3.2.3 ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures)
2.
Part 10 of the AISC construction manual requires the following verifications for
shear single angle connections:
Check applicable limit states for bolts, part 7 of the AISC Construction
Manual.
Check applicable limit states for the connecting elements, part 9 of the
AISC Construction Manual.
Furthermore, the AISC Construction Manual has the following verifications for
single angle connections:
Always consider the eccentricity for the bolts in the angle leg attached to
the support. For the calculation of the nominal resistance of bolts subject
to eccentric loads, use the provisions of part 7 of AISC manual of Steel
Construction.
Consider eccentricity when there are two rows of bolts or when the
eccentricity is greater than 3 in (76 mm).
5-12
The length of the angle connection is recommended to be at least equal to

one half of the T dimension of the beam to be supported.
The recommended minimum thickness of the angle is t = 10 mm for M20
or M22 bolts and 12 mm for M25 bolts.
5.2.c.
Example
Design a shear single angle all bolted connection between a column flange and
a beam as shown in Figure 5.2-1. Use A250ESP steel, required for
constructions subject to dynamics loads, according to NCh203.Of2006 code,
Table 3.
The column and the beam are a Chilean H300x300x87.3 and an
H450x250x111.8 built-up section. Assume that the connection only transfers
shear forces and that the sections have been designed to resist those shear
actions.
The shear forces are
= 110
= 150
H450X250X111.8
H300X300X87.3
5-13
1.
Section and material properties
H300x300x87.3
= 300 ,
= 10 ,
= 300
= 14
H450x250x111.8
= 450 ,
= 8 ,
= 250
= 22
A250ESP
(Re. Table 3, NCh203. Of2006)

= 250 ,
= 400
BOLTS: ASTM A490 bolts, threads included in the shear plane, STD holes.
2.
Design Forces
= 1.2 + 1.6 = 372
3.
Bolts
For the angle leg attached to the beam the verifications to be done will be bolt
shear, bolt bearing and the solicitation will be the design shear established on
the previous section, but for bolts attached to the column it is important to
consider the eccentricity of the connection and the design force will be
different.
Try M24 bolts (24 mm of diameter, standard holes of 27 mm, refer to Bolted
Connections section on this manual).
Slip Critical connection
=
= 0.85
5-14
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-4)
Considering class A connection surfaces, and standard size holes:

(Re. AISC 360-05 J3.8)
= 0.35
= 1.00
= 1.13
Pretension of the bolts equals 70% of the tensile nominal strength:
= 257

The nominal strength for one bolt in shear is:
=
The number of bolts required for the connection considering slip critical failure
is: > 4.32. Use = 5.
=
= 0.75
(Re. AISC360-05, J3-1)
Where is the nominal gross area of the bolt. Threads are not excluded from
shear plane:
= 452 2
= 414
=
The number of bolts required for the connection considering shear nominal
strength is: > 2.67.
The slip critical type of failure controls the design, use = .
5-15
Bolts spacing and angle dimensions

Considering a minimum space between bolts of 64 mm and a minimum
distance to the edge of 32 mm, we have:
= 4 64 + 2 32 = 320
= 2 32 +
With the spacing between the column and the beam, use = 12 , then:
= 2 32 + 12 = 76
Use a L80 x 80 x t x 320 angle, with t the thickness of the angle leg.
Angle leg attached to the column:
Corresponds to the distance between the shear plane of the bolts attached to
the beam and the line of bolts attached to the column (see Figure 5.2-2),
then:
1 = 48
Angle leg attached to the beam:
Correspond to the distance between the line of bolts attached to the beam and
the face of column flange.
2 = 36 + = 48 < 3" = 76 (Re. Part 10 Manual of Steel Construction)
A-A
Figure 5.2-2: Dimensions of bolts (equal to the connection of the leg attached
to the column).
5-16
Then, there is no need of consider the eccentricity of the bolts attached to the
beam.
4.
Bearing and tear out of the angle leg
Interior bolt
Considering a angle thickness = , then the bearing strength of the plate
is:
= 1.2 2.4 = 184
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-6a)
= 0.75
= 64 27 = 37
= < 138
Exterior bolt
= 32
27
= 18.5
2

(Table J3.3M, AISC 360-05)
Then,
=
Hence, the bearing strength of the connection is:
= + = > 372
OK
Therefore use an angle L80 x 80 x 8 x 320.
5-17
5.
Nominal strength in bolts with eccentricity, for bolts attached to the

column
According to the AISC Construction Manual, part 7, there are two methods for
the calculation of the force in bolts with eccentricity, the instantaneous center
of rotation method and the elastic method. We use the elastic method, which
is more conservative than the instantaneous center of rotation since the first
does not consider the ductility of the bolts and the redistribution of stresses.
The elastic method is simpler.
Then,
+ +
(Re. AISC Manual of Steel Construction, part 7)
Where is the bolt maximum force at the connection.
= = 0 (There are only shear forces and there is no axial force in the
beam)
Where and are the polar moment of inertia with respect to the center of
gravity of the bolts and is the maximum distance of a bolt of the connection
with respect to the center of gravity of the system. Considering the disposition
shown in the Figure 5.2-3, we have:
(2 + 2 ) = 40960 2
=
=1
= 128
= 5
1 = 48
5-18
y
x
Figure 5.2-3: Distribution of bolts for the calculation of

Then:
= 75
= 56
= 94
The strength of the bolts is the minimum between the bearing of the holes and
the shear strength for bolts, then:
= = 140
= 0.75 2.4 = 138
= ( , ) = >
6.
OK
Shear yielding of the angle
The nominal strength for shear yielding limit state is:

= 0.6
= 1.00
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4-3)
Then,
= = 320 8 = 2560 2 , we have:
= > 372
7.
OK
Shear rupture of the angle
The nominal strength for shear rupture limit state is:

5-19
= 0.6
= 0.75
(Re. AISC360-05, J4-4)
Where is calculated considering

= 27 + 2 = 29
Then,
= = 1400 2
= < 372
Change the thickness of the angle to 12 mm:
= = 2100 2
= > 372
8.
OK
Block shear rupture of the angle
= 0.6 + 0.6 + (Re. Section J4-5 AISC 360-05)
= 0.75
specification (AISC 360-05, C-J4.2). The values of , and are
obtained from the following figure:
Figure 5.2-4: Block shear failure path.

5-20
Then,
= 32 4.5 = 1890 2
= 32 = 3456 2
= 32 0.5 = 210 2
Then:
= < 452
= > 372
9.
OK

= 2.4
= 0.75
Considering that = , we have that for each bolt:
=
= = > 372
OK
Tip
In this case it has to be verified only the bearing strength of the beam web
because there is no cope in the end of the beam; however if the beam would
be coped in the ends then the tear out and the block shear limit states shall
also be verified.
10. Flexure of the support leg of the angle
The leg of the angle that is attached to the column is subjected to bending
with respect to the axis of the beam; therefore, the leg of the angle is subject
to a flexural solicitation given by:
= 1 = 48 372 = 17856
Flexural yielding
For the flexural yielding, the nominal strength is given by:
5-21
= (Re. Part 15 AISC Manual of Steel Construction)

= 0.9
Where is calculated with the next expression:
2
= 307200 3
4
=
=
OK
Flexural rupture
For the flexural yielding, we have that the nominal strength is given by:
= (Re. Part 15 AISC Manual of Steel Construction)
= 0.75
Then,
=
= 173568 3
=1
Where is the position of the center of the bolts holes and is the hole
diameter. Then,
=
OK
Connection Designed:
H300X300X87.3
10 M24 A490
H450X250X111.8
H300X300X87.3
L80X80X12X320
Figure 5.2-5: Single angle connection.
5-22
L80X80X12X320
A-A
5.2.d.
References

Arze, Recin y Asociados, Ingenieros Consultores, 2000. Manual
de Diseo para Estructuras de Acero (ICHA Manual for the
Design of Steel Structures). Instituto Chileno del Acero (ICHA),
Santiago, Chile.
5-23
5.3.
Shear double angle beam-to-column connection
5.3.a.
Design requirements
1.
NCh2369. Of2003
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.1)
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.6)
5.3.b.
1.

(Re. Section 3.2.3, ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures)
2.

verifications for shear double angle bolted connections:
Check applicable limit states for bolts.

(Part 7 of the AISC Manual of Steel Construction)
Check applicable limit states for the connecting elements
(Part 9 of the AISC Manual of Steel Construction)
Furthermore, the AISC Manual of Steel Construction has the following

recommendations for double angle connections:
For double angle connections where the bolts are in one row through the
web of the supported beam, it is not necessary to consider the eccentricity
effects on the bolts; however, in welded connections, eccentricity shall be
always considered.
To provide for flexibility, the maximum angle thickness for use with
workable gages should be limited to 15 mm.
It is recommended that the minimum angle length must be greater than
one half of the beam T- dimension.
5-24
5.3.c.
Example
Design a shear double angle all bolted connection between a column flange
and a beam shown in Figure 5.3-1. Use A250 ESP steel, required for
Table 3.
The column and the beam are Chilean H300x300x87.3 and an
H450x250x111.8 built-up sections. Suppose that the connection only transfers
shear forces and that the sections have been designed to resist those forces.
= 110
= 150
H300X300X87.3
A
H450X250X111.8
A-A
H300X300X87.3

1.
H300x300x87.3
= 300 ,
= 10 ,
= 300
= 14
H450x250x111.8
= 450 ,
= 250
5-25
= 8 ,
= 22
A250ESP

= 250 ,
= 400
BOLTS: ASTM A490, threads included in the shear plane, STD holes.
2.
Design Forces
= 1.2 + 1.6 = 372
3.
Bolts
For the angle legs attached to the column there will be twice the number of
bolts than in the angle legs attached to the beam. However for the bolts
attached to the beam there are two slip planes so whatever of both cases that
we will verify, the final design will lead to the same number of required bolts.
The verifications to be done will be bolt shear, bolt slip critical failure, bolt
bearing and the solicitation will be the design shear established in the previous
section.
Try M24 bolts (24 mm of diameter, standard holes of 27 mm).
=
= 0.85
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-4)
Consider Class A surfaces connection, and standard size holes; then:

(Re. AISC 360-05 J3.8)
= 0.35
= 1.00
= 1.13
= 257
5-26
Since there is a double angle connection between the column flange and the
beam, we have two slips planes (and also the number of bolts in the
connection to the column is twice than the connection to the beam, so the
resistance for both connections will be the same), then = 2.0.
Therefore, the design slip strength for one bolt is:
=
is: > 2.16. Use = 3 bolts for the legs attached to the beam and = 6 for
the legs attached at the column.
=
= 0.75
(Re. AISC360-05, J3-1)
Where is the nominal gross area of the bolt:

= 452 2
= 414
=
But it has to be considered that there are two bearing points between the
connecting angle and the bolts, therefore for one bolt:
=
Then, the number of bolts required for the connection considering shear
nominal strength is: > 1.55.
The slip critical limit state controls the design, therefore use = bolts for
the legs attached to the beam and = bolts for the legs attached at the
column.
5-27
4.
Bolt spacing and angle dimensions
Consider a minimum space between bolts of 64 mm and a minimum distance

to the edge of 32 mm (Refer to Bolted Connections section 2.4 on this
Manual):
= 2 64 + 2 32 = 192
= 2 32 +
With the spacing between the column and the beam, use = 12 , then:
= 2 32 + 12 = 76
Then considering the AISC Construction manual recommendations, it has to be
used a angle length equal or greater than one half of the beam T - dimension,
so we try with an angle L80 x 80 x 8 x 230.
Figure 5.3-2: Dimensions between bolts.

5.
Interior bolts
Considering that the plate thickness is = , then:
= 1.2 2.4 = 184
= 0.75
5-28
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-6a)
= 64 27 = 37
(Table J3.3M AISC 360-05)
Then,
OK
= < 138
Exterior bolts
= 51
Then,
27
= 37.5
2
OK
=
Hence, the nominal strength of the connection is:
= + =
Given that there are two angles at the connection, the total capacity of the
connection is:
= = >
6.
OK

= 0.6
= 1.00
(Re. AISC360-05, J4-3)
= = 230 8 = 1840 2 , therefore:

=
Given that there are two angles at the connection, the total capacity of the
connection is:
= = > 372
OK
5-29
7.

= 0.6
= 0.75
(Re. AISC360-05, J4-4)
Where is the net area of the angle, then considering:

= 27 + 2
= = 1144 2
=
The total strength is:
= = > 372
8.
OK
= 0.6 + 0.6 + (Re. J4-5 AISC 360-05)
= 0.75
Where = 1.0 in this case, according to the commentary in AISC 360-05
5-30
= 51 2.5 = 852 2
= 51 = 1432 2
= 32 0.5 = 210 2
Then:
= < 224
=
The total capacity of the connection is:
= = >
9.
OK

= 2.4
= 0.75
Considering that = , then for each bolt:
=
For the whole connection:
= =
OK
Tip
In this case it only has to be verified the bearing strength of the beam web
because there is no cope in the end of the beam; however if the beam is coped
in the end it has to be verified the tear out limit state.
5-31
Designed connection
H300X300X87.3
A
A
9 M24 A490
H450X250X111.8
A-A
H300X300X87.3
2 L80X80X8X230
Figure 5.3-4: Single angle connection.

References
5-32

5.4.
Shear single angle beam-to-beam connection
5.4.a.
1.
NCh2369. Of2003:
electrodes shall comply with the requirements show in the code.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.1)
connection.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.6)
5.4.b.
1.

(Re. Section 3.2.3, ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures)
2.

verifications for shear single angle bolted connections:
Check applicable limit states for bolts (part 7 of the AISC Manual of Steel
Construction).
AISC Manual of Steel Construction).

verifications for single angle connections:
Always consider the eccentricity for the bolts in the angle leg attached to
the support. For the calculation of the nominal resistance of bolts subject
to eccentrically loads, use the dispositions of part 7 of AISC Manual of
Steel Construction, 13th edition.
Consider eccentricity when there are two rows of bolts or when the
eccentricity, e, is greater than 3 in. (76 mm)
5-33
The length of the angle connection is recommended to be at least equal to

one half of the T dimension of the beam to be supported.
Additionally, the recommended minimum thickness of the angle is t = 10
mm for M20 or M22 bolts and 12 mm for M25 bolts.
5.4.c.
Example
Design a shear single angle all bolted connection between a beam web and a
girder shown in the Figure 5.4-1. Use A250ESP steel, required for
Table 3.
The beam and the girder are respectively Chilean H300 x 150 x54.8 and
H250x150x52.5 built-up sections. Suppose that the connection only transfers
shear forces and assume that the sections have been designed to resist those
forces.
The shear acting forces on the girder are:
= 40
= 60
H250X150X52.5
Girder
H300X150X54.8
1.
Section and Materials properties
H300x150x54.8
= 300 , = 150
= 6 ,
= 18
5-34
H250x150x52.5
= 250 , = 150
= 6 ,
= 18
A250ESP

= 250 , = 400
BOLTS: ASTM A490, threads include in the shear plane, STD holes.
2.
Design Forces
= 1.2 + 1.6 = 144
3.
Bolts
For the angle leg attached to the girder the verifications must include bolt
shear, bolt bearing; the solicitation will be the design shear, but for bolts
attached to the beam we have to consider the eccentricity of the connection
and the design force will be different.
=
= 0.85
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-4)
Consider Class A surfaces (conservative), and standard size holes:

(Re. AISC 360-05 J3.8)
= 0.35
= 1.00
= 1.13
= 179
5-35

The nominal strength for one bolt in shear.
=
failure is: > 2.4. Use = 3.
=
= 0.75
(Re. AISC360-05, J3-1)
Where is the nominal gross area of the bolt, then:

= 314 2
= 414
Then, for one bolt:

=
The slip critical failure controls the design, use = .
Bolts spacing and angle dimensions
distance to the edge of 34 mm, we have:
= 2 60 + 2 34 = 188
= 2 34 +
With the spacing between the girder and the beam, we use = 12 :
= 2 34 + 12 = 80
5-36
Then we try an angle L 80 x 80 x 8 x 200.

Now that we have the dimensions of the angles we can determine the
eccentricity of the connection:
Angle leg attached to the beam:
Considering the distance between the shear plane of the bolts attached to the
girder and the centerline of the bolts attached to the beam, the eccentricity is:
1 = 46
Angle leg attached to the girder:
Considering the distance between the shear plane of the bolts attached to the
beam and the centerline of the bolts attached to the girder, the eccentricity is:
2 = 34 + = 46 < 3" = 76
(Re. Part 10 Manual of Steel Construction)
Then there is no need to consider the eccentricity of the bolts attached to the
beam.
Beam web
A-A
Figure 5.4-2: Dimensions of the angle and spacing between bolts.
5-37
4.
Interior bolt
Considering that the angle thickness is = 8 , the bearing strength of the
angle leg is:
= 1.2 2.4 = 153
= 0.75
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-6a)

= 60 22 = 38
(Re. J3.3M, AISC360-05)
Then, we have:
= < 115
Exterior bolt
= 40
22
= 29
2
Then,
=
= + = > 144
OK
Therefore the angle L 80 x 80 x 8 x 200 comply with the requirements.

5.
Nominal strength of bolts with eccentricity (bolts attached to the beam):
According to the AISC Manual of Steel Construction, part 7, there are two
methods for the calculation of the force in bolts with eccentricity: the
5-38
instantaneous center of rotation method and the elastic method. Here it is

used the elastic method, which is more conservative than the instantaneous
center of rotation since the first does not consider the ductility of the bolts and
the redistribution of stresses. The elastic method is simpler.
Then,
=
+ +
(Re. AISC Construction manual, chapter 7)
Where is the bolt maximum force at the connection.
= = 0
(There are only shear forces and no axial force is present on the girder)
Where and are the polar moment of inertia with respect to the center of
gravity of the bolts and the maximum distance of a bolt of the connection with
respect to the center of gravity of the system. Then, with the disposition
shown in Figure 5.4-3:
(2 + 2 ) = 7200 2
=
=1
= 60
= 3
= 46
y
x
Figure 5.4-3: Distribution of bolts for the calculation of
5-39
Then:
= 48
= 55
= 73
The strength of the bolts is the minimum between the bearing of the holes and
the shear strength for bolts, then:
= = 97
= 0.75 2.4 = 115
= ( , ) = > 73
6.
OK
The nominal strength for the shear yielding limit state is:
= 0.6
= 1.00
(Re. AISC360-05, J4-3)
Then,
= = 200 8 = 1600 2
= > 144
7.
OK

= 0.6
= 0.75
(Re. AISC360-05, J4-4)
Where is the net area of the angle. Considering:

= 22 + 2
Then,
= = 1024 2
= >
5-40
OK
8.
= 0.6 + 0.6 +
= 0.75
(Re. J4-5 AISC 360-05)

= 40 2.5 = 800 2
= 40 = 1280 2
= 34 0.5 = 176 2
Then:
= 196
= >
9.
OK
Bolt bearing and tear out of the girder web
In this example it is necessary to cope the top flange of the girder. First define
the dimensions of the cope:
5-41
Figure 5.4-5: Dimensions of coped beams

From AISC Manual of Steel Construction, 13thEd, Figure 9-2.
The dimensions of the cope are given by the section properties of the beam,
then:
= + 2 = 20

=
+ 2 = 74
2
2
The 2 mm added is an arbitrary value for tolerance issues. According to
Figure 5.4-5:
= + 12 = 86
With the dimensions of the cope, proceed with the calculation of the tear out
and bearing nominal strengths.
The nominal strength of the tear out and bolt bearing limit states is:
= 1.2 2.4 = 115
= 0.75
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-6a)
For interior bolts we have:

= 60 22 = 38
= < 86
For exterior bolts
=
5-42
22
60
= 34
2
2
= < 86
Then, for the whole connection:
= + = > 144
OK
10. Flexure of leg of the angle attached to the beam

We have that for the angle leg attached to the beam, the flexural solicitation
is:
= 1 = 46 144 = 6624
Flexural yielding
For the flexural yielding, the nominal strength is given by:
(Re. Part 15 AISC Manual of Steel Construction)
=
= 0.9
2
= 80000 3
4
=
=
OK
Flexural rupture
For the flexural rupture, the nominal strength is given by the expression
obtained from the chapter 15 of the AISC construction manual:
=
= 0.75
= 58880 3
=1
OK
5-43
Where is the distance to the center of the connection to the center of the
bolt hole, and is the dimension of the bolt hole.
11. Flexural strength of coped girder
According to
Figure 5.4-5, the flexural required strength for the coped girder is:
= e = 12384
According to part 9 of the AISC Manual of Steel Construction, the nominal
flexural resistance for coped beams is given by:
The rupture strength
=
= 0.75
The buckling strength
=
= 0.9
Where for the beam coped at the top end only:
2
12 1 2
=
= 2.2
if
1.65
1.0
if
= 0.3
1.0
This expression is valid when 2, 0.2. In this example:

OK
OK
= < =
= < . =
Additionally, :
= = 230
2 2
=
=
5-44

12
2
2
+
2
= 45.82
= 16199094 4
= 87952 3

Proceed to calculate the value of :
= .
OK
= .
OK
= 14.29
= 0.592
=
Flexural rupture:
= > 12384
OK
= >
OK
Flexural buckling:
12. Block shear rupture of the girder web

Since the girder is coped at the top end, in this example we have to also verify
the block shear nominal strength of the girder web.
= 0.6 + 0.6 +
= 0.75
(Re. J4-5 AISC 360-05)
5-45
Figure 5.4-6: Block shear failure path of the girder.(ARREGLAR)

Then,
= 165 2.5 = 630 2
= 165 = 990 2
= 34 0.5 = 132 2
= > 150
= >
OK
Tip
In this example the girder was coped at only the top end, but if the beam was
coped at both ends it shall be also verified the shear rupture and shear
yielding of the beam web.
Designed Connection
H250X150X52.5
L80X80X8X200
6 M20 A490
H300X150X54.8
Figure 5.4-7: Single angle connection. Connection to the beam is the same.
5-46
References

5-47
5.5.
Shear double angle beam-to-beam connection
5.5.a.
Design requirements
1.
NCh2369. Of2003
Use high strength bolts (ASTM A325 or ASTM A490). Arc welding shall
comply with the requirements shown in the code.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.1)
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.6)
5.5.b.
1.

(Re. Section 3.2.3 ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures)
2.

verifications for shear single angle connections:
Check applicable limit states for bolts.

(Part 7 of the AISC construction manual)
Check applicable limit states for the connecting elements.
(Part 9 of the AISC construction manual)

recommendations for double angle connections:
For double angle connections where the bolts are in one row it is not
necessary to consider the eccentricity effects on the bolts; however, in
welded connections, eccentricity shall be always considered.
To provide for flexibility, the maximum angle thickness for use with
workable gages should be limited to 15 mm.
It is recommended that the minimum angle length must be greater than
one half of the beam T-dimension.
5-48
5.5.c.
Example
Design a shear double angle all bolted connection between a beam web and a
girder shown in the Figure 5.5-1. Use A250 ESP steel, required for
Table 3.
The beam and the girder are a Chilean H300 x 150 x 54.8 and a H 250 x 150 x
52.5 built-up sections. Suppose that the connection only transfers shear forces
and assume that the sections have been designed to resist those forces.
= 40
= 60
H250X150X52.5
H300X150X54.8
1.
H 300 x 150 x 54.8

= 300 , = 150
= 6 , = 18
5-49
H 250 x 150 x 52.5

= 250 , = 150
= 6 , = 18
A250ESP

= 250 ,
= 400
2.
Design Forces
= 1.2 + 1.6 = 144
3.
Bolts
For the angle legs attached to the girder web there will be twice the number of
bolts than in the angle legs attached to the beam. However for the bolts
attached to the beam there are slip planes so whatever of both cases that we
will verify, the final design will lead to the same number of required bolts. The
verifications to be done will be bolt shear, bolt slip critical failure, bolt bearing
and the solicitation will be the design shear established in the previous section.
Try M20 bolts (20 mm of diameter, standard holes of 22 mm, refer to Bolted
Connections section 2.4 on this Manual)
=
= 0.85
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-4)
Considering Class A connection surfaces, and standard size holes:

(Re. AISC 360-05 J3.8):
= 0.35
= 1.00
= 1.13
Also the tensile nominal strength for M20 ASTM 490 bolts is:
5-50
= 179
Since there are two slips planes, = 2.0.
Therefore, the designs slip strength for one bolt is:

=
The number of bolts required for the connection considering slip critical
resistance is: > 1.2. Therefore use = 2 bolts for the legs attached to the
girder and = 4 bolts for the legs attached at the beam.
=
= 0.75
(Re. AISC360-05, J3-1)

= 314 2
= 414
=
Consider two shear planes. Therefore, for one bolt:
=
The slip critical resistance controls the design; use = bolts for the legs
attached to the girder and = bolts for the legs attached to the beam.
4.
Bolt spacing and angle dimensions

distance to the edge of 34 mm:
= 1 60 + 2 34 = 128
= 2 34 +
5-51
With the spacing between the column and the beam; use = 12 :
= 2 34 + 12 = 80
Try with an L 80 x 80 x 6 x 130 angle.
Figure 5.5-2: Dimensions between bolts.

5.
Interior bolts
Considering that the plate thickness is = , we have that the bearing
strength of the angle is:
= 1.2 2.4 = 114
= 0.75
= 60 22 = 38
Then:
= < 85
External bolts
= 35
5-52
22
= 24
2
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-6a)
Then:
=
= + =
Given that the shear force is resisted by the two angles of the connection, the
total capacity of the connection is:
= = >
6.
OK

= 0.6
= 1.00
= = 130 6 = 780 2
=
(Re. AISC360-05, J4-3)
Given that the shear force is resisted by the two angles of the connection, the
total capacity of the connection is:
= = > 144
7.
OK

= 0.6
= 0.75
(Re. AISC360-05, J4-4)
Where is the net area of the angle. Considering:

= 22 + 2 = 24
Then,
= = 492 2
=
5-53
The total capacity is:

= = >
8.
OK
= 0.6 + 0.6 + (Re. J4-5 AISC 360-05)
= 0.75

specification (AISC 360-05, C-J4.2). The values of Anv, Ant and Agv are obtained
= 35 1.5 = 354 2
= 35 = 570 2
= 34 0.5 = 132 2
= < 104
=
The total capacity is:
= = >
9.
OK
Bolt bearing an tear out of the girder web
In this it is necessary to cope the top flange of the girder. First define the
dimensions of the cope:
5-54
Figure 5.5-4: Dimensions of coped beams

From AISC Manual of Steel Construction, 13thEd, Figure 9-2.
The dimensions of the cope are given by the section properties of the beam,
then:
= + 2 = 20

=
+ 2 = 74
2
2
The 2 mm added is an arbitrary value for tolerance issues. According to the
Figure 5.5-4:
= + 12 = 86
With the dimensions of the cope, proceed with the calculation of the tear out
and bearing nominal strengths.
The nominal strength of the tear out and bolt bearing limit states is:
= 1.2 2.4 = 115
= 0.75
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-6a)
For interior bolts:

= 60 22 = 38
= < 86
For exterior bolts:
=
22
30
= 64
2
2
= > 86
5-55
=
Then we have that for the whole connection:
= + = >
OK
10. Flexural strength for coped girder check

According to Figure 5.5-4, the flexural moment that it has to be used for
verifying the resistance of the coped beam is:
= = 12384
The nominal flexural resistance for coped beams is:
(Re. Part 9 of AISC Manual of Steel Construction)
Rupture strength
=
= 0.75
Buckling strength
=
= 0.9
Where for the beam coped at the top end only:
=
2
12 1 2
=
= 2.2
if
1.65
if
= 0.3
1.0
1.0
This expression is valid when 2, 0.2. In this example:

= < 2 =
= < . =
Now proceed to calculate the value of :
= = 230
5-56
OK
OK

2 2
=
=

12
2
2
+
2
= 45.82
= 87952 3

= 16199094 4
Calculate the value of :
= .
OK
= .
OK
= 14.29
= 0.592
=
Then:
Flexural rupture:
=
OK
OK
Flexural buckling:
11. Block shear rupture of the girder web

Since the girder is coped at the top end, in this example it is necessary to
verify the block shear nominal strength of the girder web.
= 0.6 + 0.6 + (Re. J4-5 AISC 360-05)
= 0.75
5-57
Figure 5.5-5: Block shear failure path of the girder.

= 135 1.5 = 594 2
= 135 = 810 2
= 34 0.5 = 132 2
Then:
= >
= < 144
Then, the connection does not comply with the requirements. If the angle is
placed 30 mm below the actual position, as is shown in the next figure:
5.5-6: New Block Shear failure path for the new position of the angle.
= 165 1.5 = 774 2
= 165 = 990 2
5-58
= 34 0.5 = 132 2
= >
= > 144
OK
Tip
In this example the girder was coped at only the top end, but if the beam was
coped at both ends it should be also verified the shear rupture and shear
yielding of the girder web.
Designed Connection
H250X150X52.5
Beam web
6 M20 A490
A-A
H300X150X54.8
Figure 5.5-7: Double angle connection.

References

5-59
5.6.
Shear Stiffened Seated beam-to-column connection
5.6.a.
1.
NCh2369. Of 2003:
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.1)
connection.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.6)
5.6.b.
1.

verifications for shear stiffened seated connections:
Check applicable limit states for bolts (part 7 of the AISC Construction
Manual).
AISC Construction Manual)

recommendations for stiffened seated connections:
Stiffened seated connections consist in a seat angle that supports the

beam with a stiffening element, which could be a plate, a pair of angles or
a structural tee. Also a top angle is provided for stability issues (see
Figure 5.6-1). The stiffening element is assumed to carry the entire end
reaction of the supported beam applied at a distance 0.8W.
The top angle is not designed for any calculated strength requirements. It
is recommended that the thickness of the top angle to be 6 mm and the
leg attached to the column flange (or column web) to be greater than 4.
The top angle can be bolted to the column and the beam with two bolts.
Verify the limit states of web yielding and web crippling of the beam
supported.
5-60
2.
Steel Structures Design and behavior, Salmon, Johnson and Malhos
According to section 13.4 of the Steel Structures Design and Behavior, is

has to be considered the local buckling of the stiffener and the bearing at
the contact area of the stiffener have to be considered.
It is not necessary to consider that the bolts attached to the beam are
simultaneously subject to tensile and shear stresses, it is only necessary
to consider the shear stress for the design, since only for welded stiffened
seated connections is necessary the consideration of tensile and shear
stresses.
Figure 5.6-1: Typical Unstiffened connection

From AISC Manual of Steel Construction, 13thEd, figure 10-10.
5.6.c.
Example
Design a shear stiffened seated all bolted connection between a column flange
and a beam shown in the Figure 5.6-2. Use A250ESP steel, required for
Table 3.
H450x250x111.8 built-up section. Suppose that the connection only transfers
shear forces and assume that the sections have been designed to support
those forces.
= 110
5-61
= 150
H300X300X87.5
H450X250X108.7

1.
H300x300x87.3
= 300 ,
= 10 ,
= 300
= 14
H450x250x111.8
= 450 ,
= 8 ,
A250ESP
= 250
= 22
= 250 ,
= 400
5-62
WELD: 70 ksi electrode, = 480 MPa

2.
Design Force
= 1.2 + 1.6 = 372
3.
Bolts
The verifications to be done will be bolt shear and bolt slip critical failure. The
solicitation will be the design shear.
=
= 0.85
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-4)
Considering class A connection surfaces, and standard size holes:

(Re. AISC 360-05 J3.8):
= 0.35
= 1.00
= 1.13
Also the tensile nominal strength for M22 ASTM A490 bolts is:
= 221
The number of slip planes is = 1.0.

For one bolt, the nominal strength for the slip critical limit state is:
=
failure is: > 5.02. Use = 6.
5-63
(Re. AISC360-05, J3-1)
= 0.75
Where is the nominal gross area of the bolt, and threads are supposed to be
not excluded from the shear planes:
= 380 2
= 414
Then, we have that:

=
The slip critical failure controls the design, = .
4.
Bolt spacing and dimensions of angles

distance to the edge of 32 mm (refer to Bolted Connections section on this
manual):
For the leg attached to the column:
= 2 66 + 2 32 = 196
= 2 32 = 64
Figure 5.6-3: General dimensions of the stiffener angles
5-64
But it is convenient that the angles support all the base of the beam, so try
with an L 125 x 80 x 10 x 200 angle.
The stiffener width is W = 80 mm.
5.
Seat plate design
For the seat plate we follow the recommendations of Section 13.9 from Steel
Structures of Vinnakota. The thickness of the plate generally is between the
9.5 and 12.7 mm. Then use a thickness = . For the length of the plate
use the width of the beams flange (250 mm); finally, for the width of the
plate use the same width of the angles, 80 mm, so consider a plate PL 250 x
80 x 10. Latter it will be necessary to verify if the width of the plate satisfies
the requirements for supporting the beam, since if the support is not large
enough failure of the connection due web crippling or local yielding of the
beam web can occur. For the connection between the plate and the angles
use the maximum fillet weld size permitted, which is the smaller thickness of
the elements connected minus 2 mm (Re. AISC 360-05, J2.2b). In this case
the thickness of the angles and the plate is 8 and 10 mm respectively, so use
= for the fillet weld. Welds are not permitted for the connection of the
plate and the flange of the beam (part 10 AISC Manual of Steel Construction).
Use two M22 bolts. See the following figure:
PL 250X80X10
Figure 5.6-4: Seat plate

6.
Web Local Yielding of the beam
When the force that is applied is concentrated at a distance that is no greater

than the depth of the beam, which is our case, we have that the resistance to
the web local yielding is given by:
= 2.5 +
(Re. AISC 360-05, J10-3)

5-65
= 1.00
Where is the distance from the edge of the beam flange to the toe of the
fillet, and is the length of bearing that support the beam. The value of
must be greater than for end beam reactions.
= + 5
= 27
= 80 = 68
= 8
Then:
= < 372
Then, the connection does not comply with the requirements, so change the
plate to PL 250 x 135 x10 and change the angles to L 125 x 135 x 10 x
200. Then,
= 135 = 123
= > 372
7.
OK
Local Buckling of the stiffener
Following the recommendations given in Steel Structures Design and

Behavior book by Salmon, the local buckling failure can be avoided following
the provisions of the AISC 360-05 B4. If the stiffener is compact, then local
buckling is avoided, then using the slenderness ratios of table B4.1, we have
the following:
= 0.56
=
8.
= 15.83 (Re. AISC 360-05, table B4.1 case 3)
= . <
OK
Bearing on the contact area of the stiffener
The bearing strength is provided by the following expression:

(Re. Section J7 AISC 360-05)
= 1.8
= 0.75
5-66
Where is the bearing projected area. Salmon recommendation is that the

bearing area must be taken equal to:
= 2 12.7 = 2446 2
The bearing strength is:
OK
Tip:
If a welded plate was used as stiffener it should also considered the effect of
the eccentricity of the load into the calculation of the bearing strength. The
eccentricity generates additional stresses on the stiffener.
9.
Web Crippling of the beam:
When the concentrated force is applied at a distance that is no greater than

half the depth of the beam, and
> 0.2, the available strength of the web
Crippling is given by:
= 0.402 1 +
4
0.2
1.5
= 0.75
(Re. AISC 360-05, J10-5b)
= 450
= 8
= 22
= 135 = 123
Therefore:
= < 372
Then, the nominal strength does not comply with the requirements, so use a
pair of stiffeners
Stiffeners for the beam web
Stiffeners shall be designed for the following force:
= = 372 269 = 110
Try a pair of stiffeners PL 406 x 110 x 10, then:
5-67
110 103
= 9166 3
12
= 110 10 = 1100 2
= 2.88
Then, considering = 1.0 and = 406 :
= 140 > 25
(Section J4.4 AISC 360-05)
Then, the design shall be done according the dispositions of the chapter E of
the AISC 360-05:
= 140 > 4.71
= 133, then:
= 0.877
2
=
2 = 101
= 89
The nominal strength of each stiffener is:
=
= 0.9
Then,
= 88
Then, the nominal strength of the two stiffener of the beam is:
= = > 110
The weld of the stiffeners shall be designed to develop .
5-68
OK
10. Bearing and tear out of the angle leg

Interior bolt
Consider that the plate thickness is = , the bearing strength of the
angle leg is:
= 1.2 2.4 = 211
= 0.75
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-6a)

= 66 24 = 42
Then,
= < 158
Exterior bolt
= 34
24
= 22
2
Then,
=
= + = >
OK
11. Bolt bearing of the column flange

= 2.4
= 0.75
Considering = , then for each bolt:
5-69
=
= = > 372
OK
Tip:
By inspection it can be seen that tear out limit state does not control the
design.
12. Selection of the top angle
For the top angle selection use the recommendations of chapter 10 of the AISC
Manual of Steel Construction. Use an L 100 X 100 X 6 X 250 angle. This
angle is connected to the beam by two bolts M20. This requires a minimum
space between bolts of 60 mm and a minimum distance to the edge of 34 mm,
requirements that are accomplished with the angle selected.
Designed connection
4 M20 A490
L 100X100X6X250
2 STIFFENERS
PL 406X110X10
H300X300X87.5
H450X250X108.7
PL 250X135X10
6 M22 A490
2 L125x135X20X200
Figure 5.6-5: Stiffened seated connection
5-70
References
Salmon, Johnson and Malhos, 2009, Steel Structures. Design and

Behavior. Fifth Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River NJ.
Vinnakota, 2006, Steel Structures: Behavior and LRFD. First Edition,

Mc Graw Hill company.

5-71
5.7.
Shear Unstiffened Seated beam-to-column Connection
5.7.a.
1.
NCh2369. Of2003:
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.1)
connection.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.6)
5.7.b.
1.

verifications for shear unstiffened seated connections:
Check applicable limit states for bolts (part 7 of the AISC Manual of Steel
Construction).
AISC Manual of Steel Construction).
Furthermore, the AISC Manual of Steel construction has the following

recommendations for this type of connection:
Unstiffened seated connections consist of a bottom seat angle that

supports the beam and a top angle for stability issues. The seat angle is
assumed to carry the entire end reaction of the beam (see Figure 5.7-1).
The top angle is not designed for any calculated strength requirements. It
is recommended that the thickness of the top angle be 6 mm and the leg
attached to the column flange (or to the column web) to be greater than
101 mm. The top angle can be bolted to the column and the beam with
two bolts.
The limit states of web yielding and web crippling of the beam supported
must be verified. The leg of the seat angle that is attached to the beam
must be verified for shear yielding and flexural yielding.
5-72
2.
Steel Structures, Design and Behavior, Salmon
According to section 13.3 of this book, bolts of the seat angle are
subject to shear and tension simultaneously, so their design shall be
made according to the provisions of the AISC 360 J3.7.
Figure 5.7-1: Typical Unstiffened connection

From AISC Manual of Steel Construction, 13thEd, Figure 10-7
5.7.c.
Example
Design a shear Unstiffened seated all bolted connection between the column
flange and the beam shown in the Figure 5.7-2. Use A250ESP steel, required
for constructions subject to dynamics loads, according NCh203.Of2006 code,
Table 3.
H450x250x111.8 built-up section. Suppose that the connection only transfers
shear forces and that the sections have been designed to resist those forces.
The shear forces are:
= 100
= 150
5-73
H300X300X87.3
H450X250X111.8

1.
H300x300x87.3
= 300 ,
= 10 ,
= 300
= 14
H450x250x111.8
= 450 ,
= 8 ,
A250ESP
= 250
= 22
= 250 ,
= 400
BOLTS: ASTM A490, threads include in the shear plane, STD holes.
2.
Design Forces
= 1.2 + 1.6 = 360
5-74
3.
Bolts
The verifications to be done will be bolt shear and slip critical failure. Try M22
bolts (22 mm of diameter, standard holes of 24 mm).
Slip Critical
=
= 0.85
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-4)
Considering class A connection surfaces (conservative), and standard size

holes:
(Re. AISC 360-05 J3.8):
= 0.35
= 1.00
= 1.13
Also the tensile nominal strength for M22 ASTM 490 bolts is:
= 221

Therefore, the nominal strength of one bolt is:
=
is: > 4.86. Use for this type of failure = 6.
=
= 0.75
(Re. AISC360-05, J3-1)

= 380 2
= 414
5-75
Then, we have that:

=
The slip critical type of failure controls the design, use = .
4.
Bolt spacing and dimension of angles

distance to the edge of 32 mm (refer to Bolted Connection section on this
manual):
For the leg attached to the column:
= 2 66 + 2 32 = 196
= 2 32 + 66 = 130
For the leg attached to the beam we have to consider only two bolts for
stability issues. The minimum dimensions of the leg are:
= 2 32 +
= 2 32 + 66 = 130
With the spacing between the column and the beam. Use = 12 :
= 2 32 + 12 = 76
However, it is convenient that the seat angle cover all the flange of the beam
so try with an angle L200 x 80 x 10 x 250.
Figure 5.7-3: General dimensions of the seat angle.
5-76
5.
Tension and shear interaction
Even though the design of the shear connection was done with a slip critical
failure approach, for the interaction of shear and tension in the bolts, produced
by the eccentricity of the shear force, it will be used the bearing type of failure
instead of slip critical.
For the calculation of the eccentricity, suppose that the shear force is
distributed uniformly in the seat angle in which is supported.
= 1
80 12
1 = 12 +
= 46
2
= 16560
Then the inertia of the connection is calculated in order to establish the
maximum bolt tensile stress of the connection and then verify the resistance of
that bolt (see Figure 5.7-4):
T1
T2
x
dp1
d p2
Figure 5.7-4: Determination of inertia of the leg angle

2
= 2
2

=1
= 250
= 380 2
1 = 200 34 = 166
2 = 200 34 66 = 100
3 = 200 34 2 66 = 34
Where the summation considers that there are two rows of bolts in tension.
Then,
5-77
= 34.6
Then the inertia is:
2
3 2
+ = 19824582 4
12
4
= 1 = 131.4
2
= 1 2 + 2 2 +
Then, the maximum tensile stress is:

=

= 109
The maximum tensile force for bolt is:

= = 42
Now, using the provisions of the AISC 360-05, we calculate , factor that
modifies the slip strength of the bolt:
= 1
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-5a)
Where is the number of bolts that stands the tensile force, which in this
case corresponds to 1, since we calculate the tensile strength for one bolt.
= 0.831
And the shear solicitation for one bolt corresponds to:
=
= 60
6

= = > 60
OK
Also, we can verify the interaction for a bearing type connection:

The nominal tensile stress modified to include the effects of shearing stress is:
5-78
= 1.3
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3.7)
= 0.75
Where:
= 163

= 780
= 414
Therefore:
= > 109
6.
OK
Web Local Yielding of the beam
When the force that is applied is concentrated at a distance that is no greater

than the depth of the beam, the available strength of web local yielding is
given by:
= 2.5 +
= 1.00
(Re. AISC 360-05, J10-3)
Where is the distance from the edge of the beam flange to the toe of the
fillet weld, and is the length of bearing that supports the beam. The value of
must be greater than .
= + 5
= 27
= 80 = 68
= 8
(Re. ICHA-ARA Manual)
Then:
= < 360
Then, the nominal strength does not accomplish with the requirements, so use
a pair of stiffeners that will be designed later.
5-79
7.
Web Crippling of the beam:
When the concentrated force that is applied at a distance that is no greater

than half the depth of the beam, and
> 0.2, the available strength is given
by:
4
0.2
= 0.402 1 +
1.5
= 0.75
(Re. AISC 360-05, J10-5b)
= 450
= 8
= 22
= 80 = 68
Therefore:
=
Then, the nominal strength does not accomplish with the requirements, then
we require the use of stiffeners
Stiffeners for the beam web:
Stiffeners shall be designed for a compression force which is the difference
between the shear design force and the minimum nominal strength between
the limit states of web local yielding and web crippling.
= max( ,
) = 360 269 = 91
Try a pair of stiffeners PL 406 x 110 x 10, then:

110 103
= 9166 3
12
= 110 10 = 1100 2
= 2.88
Then, considering = 1.0 and = 406 :
5-80
= 140 > 25
(Section J4.4 AISC 360-05)
The design shall be done according to the provisions of the chapter E of the
AISC 360-05:
= 140 > 4.71
= 133, then:
= 0.877
2
=
2 = 101
= 89
The nominal strength of each stiffener is:
=
= 0.9
Then,
= 88
Then, the nominal strength of the two stiffeners of the beam is:
= 2 88 = 176 > 91
OK
The weld of the stiffeners shall be designed to develop and .
8.
Bearing of the angle leg
Considering that the plate thickness is = , the bearing strength of the

angle is:
= 2.4
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-6a)
= 0.75
Then, for one bolt:
=
= = > 360
OK
Tear out does not control the design.
5-81
9.
Bolt bearing of the column flange

= 2.4
= 0.75
Considering that = , for each bolt:
=
= = > 360
OK
Tear out does not control the design.
10. Shear yielding of the angle leg attached to the beam

= 0.6
= 1.00
(Re. AISC360-05, J4-3)
Then, considering that the gross shear area of the angle is: = = 250 10 =
2500 2 :
= > 372
OK
11. Flexural yielding of the leg attached to the beam of the angle
The design moment corresponds to the design shear multiplied by the distance
between the point of application of the force and the critical section that is
going to be verified. AISC does not give any recommendation for the
determination of the point of application of the shear force and the critical
section.
For the critical section it is going to be used the recommendations of Salmon
(Steel Structures, Design and Behavior 5th edition), that indicate that the
critical section is located at 3/8 (9.52 mm) of the face of the angle (see
Figure 5.7-5).
5-82
Tip
The 3/8 distance is a conservative assumption for the measure of the fillet toe
of the angle.
Critical section
Figure 5.7-5: Recommendation for critical section

From Salmon Steel Structures, 5th Ed, Figure 13.3.3
On the other hand, the point of application of the force is given by considering
the reaction at the center of the bearing distance required according to the
solicitation (it can also be considered the force applied at the center of the
bearing distance that it is effectively being use in the design, but this leads to
thicker angles). This means that we have to calculate from the web crippling
and the local yielding of web of the beam the required and with that value
calculate the eccentricity .
Local yielding of the web:
=
2.5 = 112

Web Crippling
=
0.42
1.5
+ 0.2
= 329
Then the maximum is 329 mm.
5-83
In this case, the effective bearing distance used in the design is less than
(This is because the use of stiffeners), do it is used = 80. Then, the
eccentricity is:
= +
+ 9.51 = 32.5
2
Then:
= = 11700
The nominal flexural resistance is:
=
= 0.9
For the leg of the angle is:
=
2
= 6250 3
4
And:
= 1406
Then we have to change the thickness of the angle. If = is used:
= +
+ 9.51 = 17.5
2
Then:
= = 6300
For the leg of the angle is:
=
2
= 39062 3
4
Then:
=
OK
Then we use an angle L200 X 80 X 25 X 250.

Tip
The use of unstiffened seated connections leads to thick angle connections for
some beams, due to of the flexural failure of the seat. The AISC dispositions
does not recommend any limit for the use of this type of connections but if the
thickness of the angles become a problem, the alternative is to switch from a
5-84
unstiffened to stiffened connection, in which the shear force applied is taken

almost completely by the stiffener element.
12. Selection of the top angle
For the top angle selection use the recommendations of Part 10 of the AISC
Manual of Steel Construction We use an L 100 X 100 X 6 X 250 angle. This
angle is connected to the beam by two M20 bolts. This requires a minimum
space between bolts of 60 mm and a minimum distance to the edge of 34 mm,
requirements that we accomplish with the angle selected.
Designed Connection
2 M20 A490
L100X100X6X250
2 STIFFENERS
PL 406X110X10
H450X250X111.8
H300X300X87.3
L200X80X25X250
6 M22 A490
2 M20 A490
Figure 5.7-6: Unstiffened seated connection

References

Salmon, Johnson and Malhos, 2009, Steel Structures. Design and
Behavior. Fifth Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River NJ.
5-85
5-86
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
6.
MOMENT CONNECTIONS
This chapter is devoted to the design of moment connections for Special

Moment Frames (SMF). Five examples of moment connections are developed,
which correspond to prequalified connections according to the AISC 358 and
its supplement n1. The examples developed are: Bolted extended end-plate
moment connection (unstiffened and stiffened); Reduce beam section (RBS);
bolted flange plate moment connection (BFP); welded unreinforced flangewelded web connection. Also, a commentary for welding in moment
connections is added. The BFP connection is the most used in the Chilean
practice, and for that reason, in the corresponding example is included a
discussion section evaluating the main differences between the Chilean
practice and the AISC provisions.
6.1.
Bolted Extended End-Plate Moment Connection (unstiffened

case)
6.1.a.
Design requirements
1.
NCh2369.Of2003
Use high strength bolts (ASTM A325 or ASTMA490).

(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.1)
Bolts must be prestressed to 70% of its nominal tensile strength. Always

(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.6)
Moment connections between beams and columns of seismic rigid frames

must have, at least, a resistance equal to the connected elements.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.3)
In beam-to-column connections of rigid frames, the upper and lower

flanges should have lateral braces or supports designed for a force equal
to 0.02 .
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.4)
Moment connections of rigid frames for seismic applications shall be of FR

type (fully restricted). The connections shall be designed in a way such
that the plastic hinge is developed at a safe distance from the column,
6-1
which can be obtained by strengthening the connection or weakening the

beam in the desired position for the plastic hinge.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.4.1)
Transverse sections of columns and beams in rigid earthquake-resistant

frames shall qualify as compact, that is, their width to thickness ratios
shall be lesser than given on Table 8.1 of the code.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.4.2)
Appendix B (normative appendix) of the NCh2369.Of2003 refers to the

design of beam-column connection on rigid frames.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, App. B)
2.
AISC 341-05
For the design of beam-to-column connections on special moment frames

(SMF) it is recommended to see Chapter 9 of this code. Some important
aspects are listed below:
3.
Beam-to-column connections requirements: see section 9.2a.The required

shear strength should be calculated taking into account the flexural plastic
hinges produced by the earthquake (E) load.
Unless otherwise designated by AISC 358, CJP groove welds of beam
flanges, shear plates, and beam webs to column shall be demand critical
welds as defined in section 7.3b (Section 9.2c).
The protected zone is defined in AISC 358. In general, for unreinforced
connections, the protected zone will extend from the face of the column to
one half of the beam depth beyond the plastic hinge point (Section 9.2d).
Panel zone of beam to column connections: see section 9.3.
For beam and column limitations (for SMF systems in general), see section
9.4.
Continuity plates shall be consistent with the connection designed
according to AISC 358 (Section 9.5).
In beam-to-column connections, check the column-beam moment ratio
(section 9.6) and the lateral bracing (section 9.7 and 9.8).
AISC 358 General Requirements (summary of important aspects)
Rolled Wide-Flange Members and Built-up Members:

Some limitations shall be considered for the member shapes, see sections
2.3.1 and 2.3.2 of AISC 358.
6-2
LRFD Reduction Factors:

When available strengths are calculated according to AISC 358, use for ductile
limit states = 1.0 , and for non-ductile limit states = 0.9. If AISC 360 is
used for calculating available strengths, use the reduction factors stipulated
there.
Plastic Hinge Location and Probable Maximum Moment at Plastic Hinge ( )
This location is shown for each individual connection. For the calculation
see Eq. 2.4.3-1.
Panel and Protected Zones:
SMF (Special Moment Frames) systems shall conform to the minimum
requirements of section 9.3 of AISC 341-05. The protected zone shall be as
defined for each prequalified connection and it shall meet the requirements of
section 7.4 of AISC 341-05.
Welding Requirements:
Filler metals and welding procedures shall meet the requirements of

section 7.3 and Appendix W of the AISC 341-05 code.
For backing at beam to column and continuity plate to column joint, see
AISC 358-05, section 3.3.
Bolt Requirements:
Use only ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 bolts. They shall be pretensioned high
strength bolts.
(Re. AISC 358-05, 4.1)
6.1.b.
Example
Design a bolted extended and unstiffened end plate moment connection for
the beam to column border connection shown in Figure 6.1-1 and 6.1-2. Use
A250 ESP steel, required for constructions subjected to dynamical loading,
according to NCh203.Of2006 code, Table 3.
The sections used are H 450 X 150 X 68.4 for the beam and H 450 x 250 x
149.8 for the column (both sections are Chilean Shapes). Use standard holes
6-3
for bolts. Suppose that the beams and columns have been properly designed
for resisting the forces given by the load combinations of the applicable
building code (including seismic load).
Follow the instructions given on AISC 358-05 Prequalified Connections (SMF
and IMF systems) for Seismic Applications document.
Figure 6.1-1: Connection to be designed. Frontal and Lateral View.
column
beam
end - plate
continuity
plates
Figure 6.1-2: Connection to be designed. Plan view
1.
Sections and materials properties
H450 X 150 X 68.4

= 450 , = 150 , = 18 , = 8 , = 5
= 8712 2 , = 1509000 3 , = 185 , = 34.1 , = 657000 4
H 450 X 250 X 149.8
= 450 , = 250 , = 32 , = 8 , = 5
= 19088 2 , = 3642000 3 , = 197 , = 66.1 , = 5530000 4
6-4
A250ESP

= 250 , = 400
6.1.c.
Design procedure according to AISC 358
Base on the steps listed on Chapter 6 of AISC 358-05, also considering

supplement N 1.
Try a 4 bolt, unstiffened extended end plate for the beam-to-column
connection, shown in Figures 6-1-1 and 5.1-2.
1.
Prequalification limits
(Re. AISC 358, Supplement N1 (2009); Table 6.1)
The minimum and maximum values of the several parameters for the design
of these connections are shown now (the notation of AISC 358 is presented,
see Figure Figure 6.1-3):
13 = 57
178 = 273
102 = 152
38 , 114
=
=
349 = 1400
10 = 19
152 = 235
Note: the beam flange thickness is 150 mm, which is little lesser than the
minimum value of 152 mm. The difference of 2 mm is accepted.
6-5
bcf
t wc
twb
g
bbf
bp
dc
de
pfo
t fb
pfi
t fc
tp
d
Figure 6.1-3: Notation (used on AISC 358-05) for the extended end plate
beam-to-column moment connection. Adapted from AISC 358-05, Fig. 6.2
2.
Beam Limitations
Beams shall be rolled or welded built-up sections. For built-up sections, at

moment connected ends, within at least the lesser of and 3 , the beam
web and flanges shall be connected using either CJP groove welds or a pair of
fillet welds each one having a size of times the beam web thickness but not
less than 6 mm. For the remainder of the beam, the welds size shall not be
less than the required to accomplish shear transfer from web to flanges.
See also:
Section 6.4.5: Clear span to depth ratio for SMF systems is required to be
6-6
> 7.0 (suppose this is OK).
Section 6.4.6: Width-thickness ratios for the flanges and web of the beam
shall conform to the limits on AISC 341. On this case, on AISC 341 section
3.
9.4 requires that the beam must be seismically compact (flanges and
web) according to table I-8-1. The beam selected is seismically compact.
Note that abrupt changes of beam flange areas in plastic hinge regions are
not allowed.
Section 6.4.7 (Lateral Bracing): for SMF it should be provided lateral
bracing according to AISC 341 section 9.8
Section 6.4.8 (Protected Zone): for unstiffened case, the protected zone is
determined as the portion of the beam between the face of the column
and a distance equal to the depth of the beam or 3 times the width of
flange from the face of the column, whichever is less.
Column Limitations
(Re. AISC 358-05, Section 6.5)
The end plate shall be connected to the flange of the column. The column
depth must be equal or lesser than the beam depth. The width-thickness
ratio for flanges and web of the column shall conform to the limits in table
I-8-1 of AISC 341. Assume that the column used is seismically compact.
4.
Beam-Column Relationship Limitations

Panel zones shall conform to the requirements of section 9.3 (SMF) of

AISC 341-05 and the column-beam moment ratio shall conform the
requirements for SMF systems on AISC 341-05.
5.
Continuity Plates
See section 6.7 of AISC 358 for the requirements of continuity plates for
this type of connections.
6.
Gage and Pitch Distances

(Re. AISC 358-05, Sections 6.9.1 and 6.9.2)
The gage is limited to the width of the connected beam flange.

For bolts up to 25 mm of diameter, the minimum pitch distance is:
+
For bolts larger than 25 mm of diameter, the minimum pitch distance is:
+
6-7
Pitch distances are and as already shown on Figure Figure 6.1-3.
7.
End Plate Width

(Re. AISC 358-05, Section 6.9.3)
It shall be greater or equal than the connected beam flange width.

The effective end plate width shall not be taken as greater than the beam
flange width plus 25 mm.
8.
Welding Details
Weld access holes shall not be used.

Beam web to end-plate joint shall be made using fillet welds or CJP groove
welds. When fillet welds are used, they shall be designed to develop the
full strength of the web in tension from the inside face of the flange to 150
mm beyond the bolt row farthest from the beam flange.
The beam flange to end-plate joint shall be made using a CJP groove weld
without backing. The CJP groove weld shall be made such that the root of
the weld is on the beam web side of the flange. The inside face of the
flange shall have a 8-mm fillet weld. These welds shall be demand critical.
Back gouging of the root is not required in the flange directly above and
below the beam web for a length equal to 1.51 . A full-depth PJP groove
weld shall be permitted at this location.
The following design steps are taken from section 6.10 of AISC 358-05.
9.
Compute the moment at the face of the column

= +
(Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 6.9-2)
Where: = = beam plastic hinge moment (Re. AISC 358-05, Eq.

6.9-3) and =
+ = shear at plastic hinge location.
= distance from the face of the column to the plastic hinge = min
( + 3 )
2
(for 4 bolt extended unstiffened connection type, is the depth of the beam)
(Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 6.9-4). = 2 = distance between plastic hinges,
with = clear length of the beam.
6-8
Note: for the full explanation of the different terms, see section 6.10 of AISC
358-05.
In this case:
=
+
2
(Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 2.4.3-2)
= 1.3 > 1.2 = 1.2
= 1.5 for A250 ESP steel (similar to ASTM A36), according to AISC 341 table
I-6-1.
Assume = 4000
> 7.0. The value of = 225 . Therefore =
3550
Assume the following gravitational loads:
= 0.025 /
= 0.016 /
Therefore: =
1.2 +1.0
2
(Dead load, includes the beam self weight)

(Live load)
= 82 and
= 383 . Then, = 464
and = 783498 .
Note: when using the NCh2369.Of2003 code, the moment connection shall
have at least a strength equal to the strength of the connected elements. It is
possible to use as design moment the value = and it is possible to
include also the effect of the shear .
10. Define preliminary values for the connection geometry and bolt grade
Use a 4 bolt unstiffened extended end plate moment connection. Try the
following dimensions (and meet also the prequalification limits already shown):
Parameter
Value (mm)
43
210
130
60
60
60
Note: for calculations use the effective value: =

= + =
6-9
11. Calculate the required bolt diameter using the corresponding equation
=
(Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 6.9-6)
1 + 0
Where: = 780 for ASTM A490 bolts, = 0.9, =distance from the
centerline of beam compression flange to the ith tension bolt row (see Figure
Figure 6.1-4). In this case, the connection is symmetric (because could be
positive or negative, according to the seismic loading). Therefore:
Then: = 28.7
1 = 1.5 = 363
0 = +
= 501
2
2Pt
2Pt
Mnp
h0
h1
Figure 6.1-4: Bolts in tension and distances 0 and 1 .

Adapted from AISC 358-05, table 6.2.
12. Select a bolt diameter
Try M30 bolts.
13. Calculate the required end plate-thickness
=
1.11
(Re. AISC 358, Eq. 6.9-8)
Where: = 250 (minimum yield stress for the end plate), = 1.0.
For the determination of = end-plate yield mechanism parameter, see table
6.2 on AISC
connections.
6-10
358-05,
corresponding
to
bolt
unstiffened
end-plate
bp
g
de
pfo
t bf
pfi
s
t bw
h0
h1
Figure 6.1-5: Yield Line Pattern Model. Adapted from AISC 358-05, Table 6.2.
=
=
1
1
1
1
2
+
+ 0
+ 1 ( + )
2 1
1
2
(Note that if > = )
= 75.5
Therefore, = 2393 = 38
Tip
It is prudent to check also the condition of prying effect. According to the
AISC Design Guide # 4, if the applied force is less than 90% of the end-plate
strength (determined using the yield line analysis), the end-plate is considered
to be thick and no prying forces are considered; when the applied load is
greater than ninety percent of the end plate strength, the end plate is
considered to be thin and the prying forces are assumed to be at a maximum.
For conservative plate thicknesses, assume that no prying force occurs,
therefore:
1.11

6-11
= no prying moment = 2 (0 + 1 )
= bolt tensile strength =
2
4
= = 780 for ASTM A490 bolts.
Calculations give:
= 551 = 952732
= 42.03
(no prying action effect controls).
14. Select the end plate-thickness
The assumed plate thickness = >
is OK.
15. Calculate the factored beam flange force:

=
(Re. AISC 358, Eq. 6.9-9)
= 1813
16. Check shear yielding resistance of the extended portion of the four-bolt
extended unstiffened end-plate (4E)
(Re. AISC 358, Eq. 6.9-10)
< = 0.6
0.6 = 1129 >
OK
= 907
If the previous equation is not satisfied, increase the end plate thickness until
it is satisfied. In this case there is no need to increase . OK.
17. Check shear rupture resistance of the extended portion of the four-bolt
extended unstiffened end-plate (4E)
Where:
= 400
1
MPa
(minimum
= 2 + 25.4
8
(Re. AISC 358-05, Eq.6.9-11)
< = 0.6
tensile
strength
of
the
end-plate).
= 4672 = net area of the end-plate.
Calculations give:
0.6 = 1009 >
6-12
= 907
OK
it is satisfied. In this case there is no need of increasing .
OK
18. The bolt shear rupture strength of the connection is provided by the bolts
at one (compression) flange
= < =
(Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 6.9-15)
= 707 2 = bolt nominal area, for M30 bolts.

= = 414 for ASTM A490 Bolts, threads included.
= 4 (number of bolts at compression side)
Calculations give:
OK
= 1054 > = 464

19. Check the bolt-bearing/tear out of the end plate and column flange
< = + ( )
(Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 6.9-17)
Where: = Number of inner bolts = 2, =Number of outer bolts = 2. In

general (for inner bolts and outer bolts), = 1.2 2.4 .
End-plate side:
The upper limit is

2.4 = 1238
Use = 30 , = 400 , = = 43 , and:
-
Inner bolts:
= + + 33 = 105 = 1.2 = 2167 = 1238

-
Outer bolts:
=
33
= 43.5 = 1.2 = 897
2
Therefore the strength is:

= 3845 > = 464
OK
6-13
Note: The diameter of the standard hole for the bolt M30 is 33 mm. See AISC
360-05, table J3.3M.
Column flange side:
The upper limit is

2.4 = 922
Use = 30 , = 400 , = = 32 , and:
-
Inner bolts:
= + + 33 = 105 = 1.2 = 1613 = 922

-
Outer bolts:
=
33
= 43.5 = 1.2 = 668
2
Therefore the strength is:

= 2862 > = 464
OK
Note: The diameter of the standard hole for the bolt M30 is 33 mm. See AISC
360-05, table J3.3M.
20. Design the flange to end plate and web to end plate welds, using the
requirements of the section 6.9.7 of AISC 358-05 code
Beam flanges to end-plate weld:
Use CJP groove welds. The inside face of the flange shall have an 8-mm fillet
weld.
Beam web to end-plate weld:
Use fillet welds, E70 electrode. For 8 mm (material thickness of the thinner
part joined) thickness, the minimum weld size is 5 mm according to AISC 36005, table J2.4.
6-14
The required weld to develop the bending stress on the beam web near the
tension bolts is (according to AISC Design Guide # 4):
(For E70 electrodes, = 0.6 = 289.5 /2 ):

0.6
= 2.9
2 0.707
With = 250 MPa (beam yield stress), = 8 mm (beam web thickness)

The required weld size for resisting the shear between the beam and the
end-plate is:

= 5.5
2 0.707
With the following effective length:
= min
,
2
2 + 2 = 207
Note: The applied shear is to be resisted by weld between the minimum of the
following distances: the distance between the mid-depth of the beam and the
compression flange or the distance between the inner row of tension bolts plus
two bolt diameters and the compression flange. (Re. AISC Design Guide # 4
and AISC Manual of Steel of Construction 13th Ed.).
Use a pair of fillet welds, with = .
21. Check the column flange for flexural yielding
1.11

(Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 6.9-20)
Where = unstiffened column flange yield line mechanism parameter from

table 6.5 of AISC 358-05 (for four bolt extended end plate connection) and
= column flange thickness. See Figure Figure 6.1-6:
6-15
bcf
s
c
s
h0
tbw
h1
g
tp
Figure 6.1-6: Column flange yield line mechanism parameter for four bolt
extended connection type. Adapted from AISC 358-05, table 6.5.
=
With: =
1
2
1
1
+ 0
2 1
2
3
1 +
+ 0 + +
+ = 3452
4
4
2
2
= 90 and = 0 1 = 138
Therefore,
= 31.7 < . So far, there is no need for continuity plates
(web stiffeners).
Note: If the previous equation is not satisfied, increase the column size or add
web stiffeners (continuity plates). If stiffeners are added, previous equation
must be checked using for the stiffened column flange from table 6.5 of
AISC 358-05 (for four bolt extended end plate connection).
22. If stiffeners are required for column flange flexural yielding, determine the
required stiffener force
The column flange flexural design strength is:
2
=
(Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 6.9-21)
6-16
According to AISC 358, use unstiffened for the previous calculus.

Therefore, the equivalent column flange design force is = /( )
and it shall be used for the design of web stiffeners. In this case, there was
not needing of stiffeners for column flexural yielding.
23. Check the local column web yielding strength of the unstiffened column
web at the beam flanges
The strength requirement is:

= 6 + + 2
(Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 6.9-23 and 6.9-24)
Use:
, , : beam flange thickness, end-plate thickness and column web
thickness (already known).
= 250
= 1.0 (supposing that the distance from the column top to the top face of the
beam flange is greater than the depth of the column. = + = 37 .
If the strength requirement is not satisfied, column web continuity plates are
required.
Therefore:
= 652 < Continuity web plates are required
24. Check the unstiffened column web buckling strength at the beam
compression flange
This section applies for forces applied at both flanges of a member at the same
location. On this case, the connection to be designed is an exterior one, so this
limit state does not apply.
25. Check the unstiffened column web crippling strength at the beam
compression flange
The strength requirement is , with = 0.75. If this equation is not
satisfied, column web continuity plates are required. In this case, assume that
is applied a distance greater than
from the end of the column. Therefore:
6-17
2
= 0.80
1+3
1.5
(Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 6.9-29)
With = thickness of beam flange plus 2 times the groove weld reinforcement
leg size (in this case, = ). All the other terms have been already
explained.
Doing the calculations, the strength is:
= 735 = 551 < Continuity web plates are required
26. If stiffener plates are required for any of the column side limit states, the
required strength is
= = 1262
( is a compression force because column web
crippling controls).
6.1.d. Panel Zone / Continuity Plates / Column-Beam Moment Ratio /
Lateral Bracing
1.
According to AISC Code
Check the panel zone:

As said on AISC 358-05, check the panel zone in accordance with Section
6.6.1 of AISC 358-05. This section refers to AISC 341-05, Section 9.3 (SMF
systems).
2.
Shear strength of the panel zone

(Re. AISC 341-05, Section 9.3a)
Consider the following figure (for an interior connection):
6-18
Vus
P uf 1
P uf 2
Vu
Mu
Mu
P uf 1
P uf 2
Vus
Figure 6.1-7: Typical panel zones forces. Figure adapted from AISC Design
Guide N13, Fig. 2-3.
The total panel zone shear can be determined with the beam flange forces
( = /( )) and the story shear . According to Figure 6.1-7,
= 1 + 2 . On this case, neglect the story shear and compute:
= =
= 1813 (exterior connection).
The shear strength is

= 1.0 0.6 (1 +
2
3
) = 796
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J10-11).
Note: suppose that frame stability is considered in the analysis and that
< 0.75 .
Therefore, < , web doubler plates are required.
Tip
Generally, a better solution than using web doubler plates is to choose a
column with a thicker web, eliminating the need for the doubler plates which
have details that are expensive and difficult to fabricate.
3.
Panel zone thickness

(Re. AISC 341-05, Section 9.3b)
For the column web and each doubler plate:
6-19
+
90
Suppose that the continuity plate dimensions are = 35 (thickness) and

(width, which is going to be defined later).
The panel zone dimension between continuity plates is = =
397 ( = depth of the beam). The panel zone dimension between column
flanges is = = 386 . Then: 8.7 .
The column web thickness is not
plug welds for the attachment
that case, the total panel zone
plug welds for doubler plates
4.
ok. AISC 341 makes an exception when using

of the doubler plates to the column web. In
thickness must be greater than 8.7 . Use
to column web connection.
Panel zone doubler plates

(Re. AISC 341-05, Section 9.3c)
Welds to column flanges: use CJP or fillet welds that develop the available
shear strength of the full doubler plate thickness
When placed against column web: doubler plates shall be welded top and
bottom edge to develop the proportion of the total force that is transmitted to
the doubler plate.
When placed away from column web: doubler plates must be placed
symmetrically in pairs and welded to continuity plates to develop the
proportion of the total force that is transmitted to the doubler plate.
In this example, doubler plates are placed against the column web (with plug
welds).
Size the doubler plates:
Use A250 ESP for the doubler plates, for determining the thickness of the
doubler plates considering them acting on shear yielding and developing the
proportion of the total force transmitted to them:
2
6-20

0.6
= 17.6 .
With = 1.0 according to section J4 of AISC 360-05 Specification.

Use = = (OK with minimum requirements for panel zone
thickness)
If considering the doubler plates to be CJP groove welded to the column
flanges, use for the doubler plates width: = + = . For
the depth of the doubler plates, consider the distance between continuity
plates: = = .
Ddp
A
t fc
Section A - A
Bdp
t dp
t dp
sc
dc
Figure 6.1-8: Doubler plate dimensions.

5.
Welded unions of the doubler plates
See Welded Connection Commentary for Continuity Plates and Doubler Plates
for Chapter 6 on this Manual.
6.
Design of the continuity plates (web stiffeners)
In this case, continuity plates are needed. As said on AISC 358-05, Continuity
plates shall also conform to section J10.8 of AISC 360-05 Specification and the
welds shall be in accordance with section 6.7.3 of AISC 358-05.
6-21
From the limit states mentioned on the steps above calculate the
difference between the applied force and the minimum available strength
= = = 1262
Size the continuity plates: Use A250 ESP for continuity plates. Try
= (continuity plate thickness), = (continuity plate
width) and = = (continuity plate depth, use the column
height between flanges).
es
A
Section A - A
Ls
bs
tcw
bbf
Figure 6.1-9: Continuity plates dimensions.
Check additional stiffener requirements from AISC 360-05

(Re. AISC 360-05, Section J10.8)
1
+ = 109 = 50
2
= 35
1
2
15
= 9
OK
OK
Compression check for the continuity plates:
As said on AISC 360-05 J10.8 Section, use an effective length of 0.75

(289.5 mm) and a cross section composed of 2 stiffeners and a portion of the
web having a width of 12 (exterior stiffener)
6-22
bs
bs
es
12t w
es
tw
Figure 6.1-10: Section of continuity plates plus web fraction resisting

compression force.
According to the previous figure, the properties of the section to resist
compression are:
2
= 2 + 12
, =
2 3
12
12 3
12
According to AISC 360 J4.4 Section:
, =
= 12.8 . Use = 1.0.
= 22.53 < 25 Use Ch. J
= 0.9 = 1827 > = 1813
OK
Notes:
For the compression check, it has been used instead of
because the section considered for resisting the compression takes into
account a portion of the column web. will be used for the welds for
continuity plates to column flanges unions.
No tension check is done, because the applicable limit states analyzed
(according to AISC 358-05) were all compression limit states.
For welded unions of the continuity plates, see Welded Connection
Commentary for Continuity Plates and Doubler Plates of Chapter 6 on this
Manual.
7.
Check the beam-column moment ratio
Check the column beam moment ratio according to AISC 341-05 code.
(Assume that the factored axial force on the column is = 500 ) :
> 1.0
(Re. AISC 341-05, Eq. 9-3)
With:
6-23
= 2
= 1580067
And
+ +
= 887946 .
Therefore:
8.
OK
= 1.8 > 1.0
Lateral bracing
Beam lateral bracing:

According to section 9.8 of AISC 341-05, both beam flanges shall be laterally
braced, with a maximum spacing of =
0.086
= 2346 . (Use = ).
Assume that with this lateral spacing, the beam can properly support the
loads.
Meet the provisions of Appendix 6 of AISC 360-05:
Required brace strength:
=
0.02
= 26 .
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. A-6-7)
Use:
= , = 1.0, = ( ) .
Required brace stiffness ( = 0.75):
=
10
= 8.7 /
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. A-6-8)
Supplemental beam lateral bracing (at hinge location):

Assume that the connection between the beam and the slab is done with shear
welded connectors provided by 300 mm. Therefore, according to AISC 358-05,
supplemental top and bottom flange lateral bracing at hinge location is not
required.
6-24
Column lateral bracing:

Considering the user note in the 9.7 Section of AISC 341-05; column lateral
bracing can be achieved by the use of braces, decks, slabs, and also with
indirect lateral bracing. On this case, the ratio of beam-column moments is
lesser than 2.0, therefore the column does not remains elastic outside the
panel zone.
In this case there is no specific design for column lateral brace (at beam flange
levels). Suppose that the bracing is achieved with a slab and by indirect
bracing. If needed, an specific bracing system design shall be made.
6.1.e. Panel Zone/ Continuity Plates / Column-Beam Moment Ratio /
Lateral Bracing
1.
Check the previous design according to NCh2369.Of2003 Code
Refer to Chapter 8 and Appendix B (Beam-to-Column unions on rigid steel

frames) of NCh2369.Of2003 Code.
Note: According to Appendix B, the provisions of NCh2369.Of2003 code for
rigid unbraced frames are normative, and the designer does not have to take
account the additional obligatory requirements of AISC 341-1999 (SMF
systems and IMF systems). On this example, a design using AISC 341 and
AISC 358 codes has been done; nevertheless it is going to be checked with the
NCh2369.Of2003 code. The sections used comply with the limits of Table 8.1
on Chilean code.
2.
Panel zone
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, B.2)
As said on B.2.1, the analysis can be done with elastic or plastic methods. The
panel zone shall be retrofitted with doubler plates and/or diagonal stiffeners
(see Figures B.1 and B.2 of the code) if > = 0.75 .
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, B.2.2)
The determination of and is quite similar to AISC 341 code. Considering
an interior connection:
=
1
1
2
2
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, Eq. B-1)
6-25
With =beam moments (not greater than plastic beam moments, on this
case use = = 377250 ) determined using the load combinations
of the code and the amplification of the earthquake term by 2; = 0.95 ,
=shear force in the column at the level of the union (neglect it as on the
previous design).
Assume that 0.75 , therefore the calculation of:
= 0.75 0.6 (1 +
2
3
is quite similar to the AISC 341 code, but
using a = 0.75 and = + 2 instead of only .

Considering then the doubler plates designed on the previous stage (2 plates,
= 9 ) , calculations give:
= 1508 < = 883 Doubler plate thickness is OK.
According to section B.2.5 of the Chilean code, the minimum thickness of the
column web and doubler plates must be the same as AISC 341.
3.
Some welding requirements of doubler plates

(Re. NCh2369-Of2003, B.2.4 and B.8)
Doubler plates shall be welded to the column flanges with fillet or CJP groove
welds designed to resist the shear required strength (on seismic frames, the
welds shall resist the total shear strength of the doubler plate). If they are
against the column web, they shall be welded on their bottom and top ends
(and the welds must resist the proportion of the force transmitted to the
doubler plates). If they are away from the column web, doubler plates shall be
placed symmetrically and welded to the continuity plates (and the welds must
resist the proportion of the force transmitted to the each one of the doubler
plates).
Note: As seen, the previous dispositions are quite similar to AISC dispositions.
Refer to Welded Connection Commentary for Continuity Plates and Doubler
Plates of Chapter 6 on this Manual.
4.
Continuity plates
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, B.3 to B.6)
Limit states check list:

6-26
1.- Flange local bending

2
Equal to AISC code, = 0.9 6.25
= 1440 > =
= 883 . See the
additional requirements on B.3.2 to B.3.3

2.- Web local yielding
Similar to AISC code, except that if < take = = 37 . Therefore:
= 1.0 5 + = 444 < = 883 .
Note: = + = 37 , = = 18 = 37
3.-Web crippling
2
Equal to AISC code: = 0.8
[1 + 3
1.5
Use = 0.75 to obtain: = 551 < = 883

4.- Web compression buckling:
This limit state does not apply for exterior connections.
5.
Force for the design of weld connections of the continuity plates
According to B.3.4. (and note (1)), continuity plates shall be welded to the
web and the loaded flange so to transfer to the web the proportion of the force
carried by the stiffeners:
, = , = 438
And the minimum total stiffener area shall be =
6.
,
,
= 1948 2
Additional criteria for continuity plates

(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, B.7 Section)
1
+ = 109 = 83.3
OK
6-27
= 35 > max ,

250
OK
= 18
Compression check:
According to B.7.2, the section resisting the compression is the same as the
previous design (external stiffeners), therefore:
OK
= 1827 > = 883

7.
Some welding requirements of the continuity plates
According to NCh2369.Of2003 (B3.4, B4.2 and B5.2) the continuity plate to

loaded flange welds shall transfer the proportion of the load corresponding to
the stiffener and the continuity plate to web welding shall be dimensioned to
transmit the proportion of the load carried by the stiffeners.
Note: As seen, the previous dispositions are quite similar to AISC dispositions.
Plates of Chapter 6 on this Manual.
8.
Column-beam moment ratio:
According to NCh2369.Of2003, section 8.4.4 (R>3 systems):
> 1.2
for the columns and beams at the union analyzed. (See exceptions when is not
needed to meet the previous inequality at 8.4.4).
The code does not specify the calculation of the moments, so use the plastic
moments of the gross sections. Using this, / = 4.7 > 1.2 OK.
9.
Lateral bracing:
According to NCh2369.Of2003, section 8.5.4, on beam-to-column connections

for rigid frames both beam flanges shall count with lateral bracing designed for
0.02 . On this case, this is similar to AISC dispositions so the previous
design is OK, considering that a slab braces the superior flange of the beam.
6-28
Designed connection:
Column: H 450 x 250 x 149.8
g
4 M30 ASTM A490
CJP
de
Beam: H 450 x 150 x 68.4

pfo
pfi
2PL 386 x 85 x 35 mm
CJP
4 M30 ASTM A490
10
10
Typ
PL 210x740x43 mm
Note:
Connections for doubler and web plates
are not designed
2PL 397 x 376 x 9 mm
Bolts positions
pfo= 60 mm
pfi = 60 mm
de = 60 mm
g= 140 mm
Figure 6.1-11: Connection Designed.

Notes:
Some of the following assumptions are inherent to the design procedure
presented on this example (See AISC Design Guide # 4). A summary of those
assumptions (not explicit on the document) follows:
All bolts are tightened to a pretension not less than AISC requirement.
However, slip critical connections requirements are not needed in this
case.
Only are permitted ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 bolts.
All of the shear force is assumed to be resisted by the compression side
bolts.
Beam web to end plate welds in the vicinity of the tension bolts are
designed to develop the yield stress of the beam web. This weld strength
is recommended even if the full moment capacity of the beam is not
required for frame strength.
Only the web to end plate weld between the mid-depth of the beam and
the inside face of the beam compression flange may be used to resist the
beam shear (based on judgment).
Yield-line analysis is used for end-plate strength determination
Bolt prying forces are not a consideration, since the required end plate
thickness prevents their development.
6-29
6.1.f.
References
6-30
Murray and Summer, 2004, AISC Design Guide 4: Extended

End-Plate Moment Connections; Seismic and Wind Applications
2nd Edition. American Institute of Steel Construction, USA.
Carter, 1999, AISC Design Guide 13: Stiffening of Wide Flange
Columns
at
Moment
Connections:
Wind
and
Seismic
Applications. American Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago
IL.
American Institute of Steel Construction, 2005, AISC Manual of
Steel Construction. 13th Edition. AISC, USA.
6.2.
Bolted Extended End-Plate Moment Connection (stiffened

case)
6.2.a.
Design requirements
1.
NCh2369.Of2003
Same as example 6.1.

2.
AISC 341-05:

3.

6.2.b.
Example
Design a bolted extended and stiffened end plate moment connection for the
beam to column border connection shown in Figure 6.2-1. Sections used are H
450 x 150 x 68.4 for the beam and H 450 x 250 x 149.8 for the column (both
sections are Chilean Shapes). Use standard holes for bolts and A250 ESP steel,
required for constructions subjected to dynamical loading, according to
NCh203.Of2006 code, Table 3. Suppose that beams and columns have been
properly designed for resisting the forces given by the load combinations of
the applicable building code (including seismic load).
and IMF systems) for Seismic Applications document.
Note that this connection has been already designed for the unstiffened case
on example 6.1. Therefore, the input data for this example is the same and
many steps of the design will be resumed. Assume the same gravitational
loads applied to the beam from example 6.1.
6-31
Figure 6.2-1: Connection to be designed. Frontal View.

Tip
The 4 bolt unstiffened extended end-plate connection is commonly more used
than the connection to be designed. Nevertheless, the fact of adding a
stiffeners leads to thinner end-plates. The 8 bolt stiffened configuration is
another possibility which stands larger moments than the 4 bolt configuration.
1.
Sections and material properties
H450 x 150 x 68.4

= 450 , = 150 , = 18 , = 8 , = 5
= 8712 2 , = 1509000 3 , = 185 , = 34.1 , = 657000 4
H 450 x 250 x 149.8
= 450 , = 250 , = 32 , = 8 , = 5
= 19088 2 , = 3642000 3 , = 197 , = 66.1 , = 5530000 4
A250ESP

= 250 , = 400
6.1.d.
Base on the steps listed on Chapter 6 of AISC 358-05, and consider

supplement N 1.
6-32
Try a 4 bolt, stiffened extended end plate for the beam-to-column

connection, shown in figure Figure 6.2-1.
1.
(Re. AISC 358, Supplement N1 (2009); Table 6.1)
of these connections are shown now (the notation of AISC 358 is presented,
see Figure 6.2-2):
13 = 38
178 = 273
83 = 152
44 , 140
=
=
349 = 610
10 = 19
152 = 229
Note: the beam flange thickness is 150 mm, which is little lesser than the
minimum value of 152 mm. The difference of 2 mm is accepted
6-33
bp
twb
ts
twc
bcf
bbf
tfb
pfi
pfo
de
dc
tp
hst
tfc
Lst
6.2-2: Notation (used on AISC 358-05) for the extended end plate beam-tocolumn moment connection. Adapted from AISC 358-05, Fig. 6.3.
2.
Beam Limitations

Same as example 6.1, except that for the protected zone (6.4.8), for the
stiffened case shall be calculated as the portion of the beam between the face
of the column and a distance equal to the location of the end of the stiffener
plus one-half the depth of the beam or 3 times the width of the beam flange,
whichever is less.
3.
Column Limitations

4.
Beam-Column Relationship Limitations

6-34
5.
Continuity Plates

6.
Gage and Pitch Distances

(Re. AISC 358-05, Sections 6.9.1 and 6.9.2)

7.
End Plate Width


8.
End Plate Stiffener

The minimum end plate stiffener (gusset plate welded between the connected
beam flange and the end-plate) length shall be:
=
tan 30
With = height of the end-plate from the outside of the beam flange to the
end of the end-plate.
The stiffeners shall be terminated at beam flange at the end of the end-plate
with landings of approximately 25 mm long. The stiffener shall be clipped
where it meets the beam flange and end-plate to provide clearance between
the stiffener and the beam flange weld.
When the beam and end-plate stiffeners have the same material strengths,
the thickness of the stiffeners shall be greater than or equal to the beam web
thickness. If not, the thickness of the stiffeners shall be greater than or equal
to the beam web thickness multiplied by the ratio of beam-to-stiffener plate
material yield stress.
6-35
9.
Welding Details

Additionally, when used, all end-plate stiffener joints shall be made using CJP
groove welds. The exception is when the thickness of the stiffeners is 10 mm
or less, then fillet welds that develop the strength of the stiffener can be used.
10. Compute the moment at the face of the column
Same as example 6.1, except that changes to = + and therefore
some derived values also change. On this case, for the stiffeners assume:
= , = + = .
For the values of , and refer to the following step.
Note that:
>
tan 30
Then, = 245 and then:

= 468 and = 793625 .
11. Define preliminary values for the connection geometry and bolt grade
Use a 4 bolt stiffened extended end plate moment connection.
Try the following dimensions (and meet also the prequalification limits already
shown):
Parameter
6-36
Value (mm)
35
210
130
60
60
60
Notes:
For calculations use the effective value : =

= + =
The only different value of the connection geometry respect to example

6.1 is the end-plate thickness .
12. Calculate the required bolt diameter using the corresponding equation
Procedure is same as the one on example 6.1, using:
1 = 1.5 = 363
0 = +
= 501
2
Then:
= 28.8
13. Select a bolt diameter
Same as example 6.1, use M30 bolts.
14. Calculate the required end plate-thickness
For the stiffened case, the term changes. From table 6.3 of AISC 358-05:
=
1
2
(Note that if > = )
= 75.4
Case 1 of table 6.3: . Therefore:

=
1
1
1
1
+
+ 0
+
2 1
2
2
+ + 0 +
1
Then, = 3653 = 30.9 (note that = 250 )

Tip
It is prudent to check also the condition of prying effect. According to the
AISC Design Guide # 4, if the applied force is less than 90% of the end-plate
strength (calculated using the yield line analysis), the end-plate is considered
to be thick and no prying forces are considered; when the applied load is
greater than ninety percent of the end plate strength, the end plate is
considered to be thin and the prying forces are assumed to be at a
6-37
maximum. For conservative plate thicknesses, assume that no prying force

occurs, therefore:
1.11

2
4
= = 780 for ASTM A490 bolts.

Calculations give:
= 551 = 952732
Therefore, = 34.03 (no prying action effect controls).
15. Select the end plate-thickness
The assumed plate thickness = >
is OK.
16. Calculate the factored beam flange force

Same procedure as example 6.1:
=
= 1837
(Re. AISC 358, Eq. 6.9-9)
17. For the 4 bolt extended stiffened end-plate, select the end plate stiffener
thickness and design the stiffener-to-beam flange and stiffener to-endplate welds
, =
(Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 6.9-13).
The stiffener material is assumed to be A250 ESP. Therefore:

, = 8
The stiffener geometry shall conform to the requirements of section 6.9.4 of
AISC 358-05. In addition, to prevent local buckling of the stiffener plate, the
following width-to-thickness criterion shall be satisfied:
6-38
0.56
(Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 6.9-14).
In this case, with the following geometry for the stiffener, all the checks are
OK:
= 210 , = 120 , = 10
The stiffener-to beam flange and stiffener-to-end-plate welds shall be designed
to develop the stiffener plate in shear at the beam flange and in tension at the
end-plate. For the weld to beam flange, CJP groove or fillet welds can be
used. If the stiffener plate thickness is greater than 10 mm, CJP groove welds
shall be used for the stiffener-to-end-plate weld. Otherwise, double-sided fillet
welds are permitted to be used.
On this case, use CJP groove welds for both connections (stiffener-to-endplate and stiffener-to-beam-flange) since the stiffeners thickness is equal
to the critical value of 10 mm.
18. The bolt shear rupture strength of the connection is provided by the bolts
at one (compression) flange
The procedure is the same as the one on example 6.1, calculations give:
= 1054 > = 468
OK
19. Check the bolt-bearing/tear out of the end plate and column flange
The procedure is the same as on example 6.1, calculations give:
End-plate side:
= 3130 > = 468
OK
Column flange side:

= 2862 > = 468
OK
20. Design the flange to end plate and web to end plate welds, using the
requirements of the section 6.9.7 of AISC 358-05 code
The procedure is the same as in example 6.1.
6-39
Beam flanges to end-plate weld:

weld.
Beam web to end-plate weld:
Use a pair of fillet welds, with = , E70 electrodes.
21. Check the column flange for flexural yielding

The procedure is the same as on example 6.1. Doing the calculations first for
the unstiffened column flange,

= 31.9 < . So far, there is no needing
of continuity plates (web stiffeners).
22. If stiffeners are required for column flange flexural yielding, calculate the
required stiffener force
In this case, there was no need for stiffening the column web.
23. Check the local column web yielding strength of the unstiffened column
web at the beam flanges
The strength requirement is:

With = 6 + + 2 . Same as example 6.1, calculations give
= 620 < = 1837 Continuity web plates are required
24. Check the unstiffened column web buckling strength at the beam
compression flange
6-40
25. Check the unstiffened column web crippling strength at the beam
compression flange
Procedure is the same as example 6.1, calculations give:
= 551 < = 1837 Continuity web plates are required
26. If stiffener plates are required for any of the column side limit states, the
required strength is
= = 1337
(Compression force due column web crippling controls)
27. Continuity Plate / Panel Zone / Column-Beam Moment Ratio / Lateral
Bracing
Note that the section used on this example are the same as example 6.1 The
forces obtained ( and ) and the end-plate thickness on this example are
different than on the example 6.1; nevertheless, the procedure for the design
of the panel zone (doubler plates and transverse web stiffeners) and lateral
bracing is the same. No specific design or calculations will be done on this
example.
Column: H 450 x 250 x 149.8
4 M30 ASTM A490
CJP
Beam: H 450 x 150 x 68.4
de
pfo
pfi
CJP
10
10
Typ
4 M30 ASTM A490

PL 210x740x35 mm
Stiffener details
hst = 120 mm
Note:
Doubler and web plates and their
connections are not designed
Bolts positions
pfo= 60 mm
Lst = 210 mm
pfi = 60 mm
de = 60 mm
g= 140 mm
6.2-3: Designed Connection.
6-41
Notes
There are some assumptions inherent to the design procedure presented on
this example (See AISC Design Guide # 4). A summary of those assumptions
(not explicit in the document) follows:
All bolts are tightened to a pretension not less than AISC requirement.
However, slip critical connections requirements are not needed in this
case.
Only ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 bolts are permitted.
It is assumed that all the shear force is resisted by the compression side
bolts.
Beam web to end plate welds in the vicinity of the tension bolts are
designed to develop the yield stress of the beam web. This weld strength
is recommended even if the full moment capacity of the beam is not
required for frame strength.
Only the web to end plate weld between the mid-depth of the beam and
the inside face of the beam compression flange may be used to resist the
beam shear (based on judgment).
Yield-line analysis is used for end-plate strength calculation.
Bolt prying forces are not a consideration, since the required end plate
thickness prevents their development.
6-42
6.3.
Reduced Beam Section (RBS) Moment Connection.
6.3.a.
Design requirements
1.
NCh2369.Of2003
Use high strength bolts (ASTM A325 or ASTMA490).

(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.1)

connection.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.6)
Beam-to-column connections of seismic frames must have, at least, a

resistance equal to the resistance of connected elements.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.3)
In beam to - column connections of rigid frames, the upper and

lower flanges of the beam should have lateral braces or supports
designed for a force equal to 0.02 .
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.4)
Moment connections of rigid frames for seismic applications shall be

of FR type (fully restricted). The connections shall be designed in a
way such that the plastic hinge is developed at a safe distance from
the column, which can be obtained by strengthening the connection
or weakening the beam in the desired position for the plastic hinge.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.4.1)
Transverse sections of columns and beams in rigid earthquakeresistant frames shall qualify as compact, that is, their width to
thickness ratios shall be lesser than given on Table 8.1 of the code.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.4.2)
Appendix B (normative appendix) of the NCh2369.Of2003 refers to

the design of beam-column connection on rigid frames.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, App. B)
6-43
2.
AISC 341-05

(SMF) it is recommended to see Chapter 9 of AISC 341-05. Some important
3.
The required shear strength should be calculated taking into account the
flexural plastic hinges produced by the earthquake (E) load. For more
beam-to-column connections requirements, see section 9.2a
Unless otherwise defined by AISC 358, CJP groove welds of beam flanges,
shear plates, and beam webs to column shall be demand critical welds as
defined in section 7.3b (section 9.2c).
The protected zone is defined in AISC 358. In general, for unreinforced
one half of the beam depth beyond the plastic hinge point (section 9.2d).
For the design requirements of panel zone of beam to - column
connections: see section 9.3.
For beam and column limitations, see section 9.4.
according to AISC 358 (section 9.5).
Rolled Wide-Flange Members and Built-up Members

Some limitations shall be considered for the member shapes, see sections
2.3.1 and 2.3.2 of AISC 358.
LRFD Reduction Factors
When available strengths are calculated according to AISC 358, use for ductile
limit states = 1.0, and for non-ductile limit states = 0.9. If AISC 360 is
used for calculating available strengths, use the reduction factors stipulated
there.
Plastic Hinge Location and Probable Maximum Moment at Plastic Hinge ( )
This location is shown for each type of connection. For the calculation, see
Eq. 2.4.3-1.
6-44
Continuity plates, panel and protected Zones

For continuity plates, refer to 2.4.4 section of AISC 358-05.
Panel and protected zones: for SMF systems, panel zones shall conform to the
minimum requirements of section 9.3 of AISC 341-05. The protected zone
shall be as defined for each prequalified connection and it shall meet the
requirements of section 7.4 of AISC 341-05.
Welding Requirements
Filler metals and welding procedures shall meet the requirements of section
7.3 and Appendix W of the AISC 341-05 code.
For backing at beam to column and continuity plate to column joint, see AISC
358-05, section 3.3.
Bolt Requirements
Use only ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 bolts. They shall be pretensioned high
strength bolts.
(Re. AISC 358-05, 4.1)
6.3.b.
Example
Design a reduced beam section (RBS) moment connection for the beam to
column exterior connection shown in Figure Figure 6.3-1. Use A345 ESP steel,
required for constructions subjected to dynamical loading, according to
NCh203.Of2006 code, Table 3.
The sections used are H 600 x 300 x 229.2 for the beam and H 450 x 450 x
355.2 for the column (both are Chilean Shapes). Suppose that beams and
columns have been properly designed for resisting the forces produced by the
load combinations of the applicable building code (including seismic loads).
and IMF systems) for Seismic Applications.
6-45
column
reduced beam section
doubler plates
(if required)
continuity plates
(if required)
Reduced Beam Section
Figure 6.3-1: Connection to be designed. Frontal and plan view.

1.
H 600 x 300 x 229.2

= 600 , = 300 , = 40 , = 10 , = 6
= 29200 2 , = 7396000 3 , = 262 , = 78.5 , = 12990000 4
H 450 x 450 x 355.2
= 450 , = 450 , = 40 , = 25 , = 14
= 45250 2 , = 8236000 3 , = 194 , = 120 , = 21340000 4
A345 ESP
= 345 , = 450
6-46
Both sections have seismically compact web and flanges, according to AISC
341-05 Table I-8-1.
6.3.c.
Restrictions for prequalification according to AISC 358
Base on the steps listed on Chapter 5 of AISC 358-05, consider supplement

N1.
Tip
The intention of designing a reduced beam section is to move the plastic hinge
location away from the column face. This is achieved by removing a portion of
the beam flanges and, thus, weakening the beam so as to force the plastic
hinge to occur at a specified location.
1.
Beam limitations:
Beam section must comply with the limitations of section 2.3 of AISC 35805. Beams shall be rolled wide-flange or built-up I members.
Depth of the beam is limited to W36 for rolled shapes. For built-up
shapes, use the maximum depth for wide flange rolled shapes. (OK)
Weight limited to 447 kg/m: Beam weight is 229.2 kgf/m < 447 kgf/m
(OK).
Flange thickness < 44.5 mm (OK)
Clear span to depth ratio: greater or equal to 7 for SMF systems.
Suppose the clear span to be OK with this.
Width thickness ratios for flanges and web of the beam shall conform to
the limits on AISC 341-05.(OK)
Lateral bracing: according to section 9.8 of AISC 341-05 (SMF systems).
For supplemental lateral bracing at the reduced section, also refer to the
same section. The location of this supplemental lateral bracing shall be
located no longer than d/2 beyond the end of the RBS farthest from the
face of the column (d=beam depth). No attachment shall be made to the
beam in the region extending from the face of the column to end of the
RBS farthest from the face of the column. (See also exception where the
beam supports an structural slab).
Protected zone: from the face of the column to the end of the RBS section
farthest from the column face
6-47
Column limitations:
Note: See also AISC 358-05, Supplement N1 corresponding section.
Column sections can be rolled or built-up. Comply with AISC 358-05,

section 2.3.
Depth of the column is limited to W36 for rolled shapes. For built-up
shapes, use the maximum depth for rolled shapes. (OK)
Width thickness ratios for flanges and web of the beam shall conform to
the limits of section 9.4 of AISC 341-05. (OK)
Lateral bracing: according to section 9.7 of AISC 341-05 (SMF systems).
2.
Beam-to-column relationship limitations
3.
Panel zones: comply with the requirement of section 9.3 (SMF systems) of
AISC 341-05.
See 5.4.2a for column-beam moment ratio calculation at this RBS
connection.
Beam flange to column flange weld limitations
Beam flanges to column flange: use of CJP groove welds and conform to
the requirements for demand critical weld in section 7.3 and appendix W
of AISC 341-05.
Weld access holes: according to AISC 360-05 Specification, section J1.6
4.
Beam web to column connection limitations

(Re. AISC 358-05, Section 5.6.)
Required shear strength of the beam web connection: according to Eq.

5.8-9 of AISC 358-05.
Detailing of web connection (SMF systems):
Beam web shall be connected to the column flange using a CJP groove weld
extending between weld access holes. The single plate shear connection shall
be permitted to be used as backing for the CJP groove weld. Plate thickness
6-48
must be at least 10 mm. Weld tabs are not required at the end of the CJP
groove weld at the beam web. Bolt holes in the beam web for the purpose of
erection are permitted.
5.
Fabrication of flange cuts
Refer to section 5.7 of AISC 358-05.

6.3.d.

Note:
The AISC 358-05 notation has been adopted for the design procedure.
1.
Chose trial values for RBS dimensions , and (see Figure Figure 6.3-2):
0.5 0.75
0.65 0.85
0.1 0.25
With = 300 and = 600 .

Try:
= 190 , = 450 , = 60
R = Radius of Cut = (4c2 + b)/8c
c
c
a
b
Reduced Beam
Section
Protected Zone
Figure 6.3-2: Notation (used on AISC 358-05) for reduced beam section
moment connection. Adapted from AISC 358-05, Fig. 5.1.
6-49
2.
Compute the plastic section modulus at the center of the reduced beam
section
= 2 = 4708000 3
3.
(Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 5.8-4)
Compute the probable maximum moment at the center of the reduced

beam section
=
Use =
+
2
(Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 5.8-4).
= 1.15 and = 1.1 for A345 ESP steel (similar to ASTM A572 Gr.
50) according to table I-6-1 of AISC 341-05. Then:

= 2058573
4.
Compute the shear force at the center of the RBSs at each end of the
beam
Use a free body diagram of the portion of the beam between the centers of the
RBS sections. Consider the moments acting at the center of each RBS
section and include gravity loads (use combination 1.2D+1.0L):
Figure 6.3-3: Example of calculation of shear at center of RBS cuts. The lower
image is the free body diagram of the portion of the beam between the RBSs.
Adapted from AISC 358-05 (Commentary), Fig.C-5.1.
From Figure 6.3-3:
6-50
=
And
2
+
2
Note: Consider = = factored uniform beam gravity load.
Assume that =distance between column flanges (nearest to beam ends)
equal to 6000 mm. and:
= + = 415
2
Then: = 2 = 5170 .
Assume as gravity loads:
= 0.03
, = 0.016
= 1.2 + 1.0 = 0.052

Therefore:
5.
= 931 ,
= 662
Compute the probable maximum moment at the face of the column
Use a free body diagram of the segment of the beam between the center of
the RBS and the face of the column (see the following figure). Therefore:
= + = 2444843
(Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 5.8-6)
Use = max
( ,
) in Eq. 5.8-6 of AISC 358-05, the gravity load of the
mentioned segment was neglected (optionally this effect could be included).
Figure 6.3-4: Free body diagram between center of RBS and face of the
column. Adapted from AISC 358-05, Fig. 5.2.
6-51
6.
Compute the plastic moment of the beam based on the expected yield
stress
= = 2806782
(Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 5.8-7).
Use = of the beam.

7.
Check the strength of the beam at the face of the column

(Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 5.8-8)
If the previous equation is not satisfied, increase the value of and/or

decrease the values of and and repeat previous steps. On this case
( = 1.0): . OK.
8.
Calculate the required shear strength of beam and beam web-to-column

connection from
=
+ = + +
= 952
Check the shear strength of the beam according to Chapter G of AISC 360-05
Specification. According to this chapter, for I members with:
= 52 2.24
= 53.93 = 1.0 0.6 = 1242 >
9.
Design the beam flange to column and beam web-to-column connections

according to AISC 358-05, sections 5.5 and 5.6
Beam flange to column connection:

Meeting with AISC 358-05 requirements, section 5.5, use CJP groove welds
(demand critical). Weld access holes geometry must comply with AISC 360-05,
Section J1.6. For weld access holes geometry, select a depth of 40 mm and a
height equal to 25 mm.
6-52
Beam web to column connection:

Meeting with AISC 358-05 requirements, section 5.6; the required force to be
transmitted is = 952 . Then:
Use CJP groove weld for the beam web to column flange connection. Select a
10 mm thick single plate (to support erection loads) that can be used as
backing for the CJP groove weld.
Check the beam web shear strength:
= 0.6 , = 1.0
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J4-3)
Use for the beam web area, discounting the weld access holes height:
= 2 25 = 4700 2 = 973 > = 952
OK
6.3.e. Panel Zone / Continuity Plate / Column-Beam Moment Ratio /

Lateral Bracing according to AISC Code
1.
Panel zone
Check the column panel zone according to AISC 358-05, Section 5.4. This
section refers to AISC 341-05, Section 9.3 (SMF Systems):
2.
Shear strength of the panel zone

(Re. AISC 341-05, Section 9.3a)
Consider the following figure (for a general interior connection):
6-53
Vus
P uf 1
P uf 2
Vu
Mu
Mu
P uf 1
P uf 2
Vus
Figure 6.3-5: Typical panel zones forces.

Figure adapted from AISC Design Guide N13, Fig. 2-3.
The total panel zone shear can be calculated with the beam flange forces
( = /( )) and the story shear . According to figure above,
= 1 + 2 . On this case, neglect the story shear and compute
= =
= 4366 (exterior connection).
The shear strength is:

= 1.0 0.6 (1 +
2
3
) = 3074
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J10-11).
Note: suppose that frame stability is considered in the analysis and that
< 0.75 .
Therefore, < , so web doubler plates are required.
Tip
Generally, a better solution than using web doubler plates is to choose a
column with a thicker web, eliminating the need for the doubler plates which
have details that are expensive and difficult to fabricate.
3.
Panel zone thickness

(Re. AISC 341-05, Section 9.3b)
For the column web and each doubler plate:
6-54
+
90
Suppose that the continuity plate dimensions are = 30 (thickness) and

(width, which is going to be defined later).
The panel zone dimension between continuity plates is = =
530 ( = depth of the beam). The panel zone dimension between column
flanges is = = 370 . Then 10 (column web thickness is OK).
4.
Panel zone doubler plates

(Re. AISC 341-05, Section 9.3c)
Welds to column flanges:

Use CJP or fillet welds that develop the available shear strength of the full
doubler plate thickness.
When placed against column web:
Doubler plates shall be welded top and bottom edge to develop the proportion
of the total force that is transmitted to the doubler plate.
When placed away from column web:
Doubler plates must be placed symmetrically in pairs and welded to continuity
plates to develop the proportion of the total force that is transmitted to the
doubler plate.
Size the doubler plates:
Use A345 ESP for the doubler plates and for calculating the thickness of
the doubler plates, consider them acting on shear yielding and developing the
proportion of the total force transmitted to them ( = 1.0):
2

= 16.9
0.6
Use = = = OK.
6-55
If considering the doubler plates to be CJP groove welded to the column

flanges, use for the doubler plates width = + = . For
the depth of the doubler plates, consider the distance between continuity
plates: = = .
Ddp
A
t fc
Section A - A
Bdp
t dp
t dp
sc
dc
Figure 6.3-6: Doubler plate dimensions.

Welded unions of the doubler plates:
for Chapter 6 on this Manual.
5.
Continuity plates
Check continuity plate requirements according to AISC 358-05, Chapter 2

The need for continuity plate is checked according to Section 2.4.4. of AISC
358-05 Code:
= 40 < 0.4
= 40 <
6-56
1.8

= 58.8 Continuity plates are required.
= 50 Continuity plates are required.
6.
Thickness of the continuity plates

(Re. AISC 358-05, Section 2.4.4a)
1
For this exterior connection: = 20 .

2
7.
Requirements of AISC 360-05 Specification, J10 Section
Calculate the concentrated force(s) acting on the beam flange, using the
moment projected at the column flange side ( ):
=
(Tension and compression)
= 4366
Calculate the available strengths, according to the following limit states:
Flange Local Bending (caused by the tension ):

2
= 0.9 6.25
= 3105 <
Web local yielding:
Suppose that the concentrated force to be resisted is applied at a distance

from the column end, greater than . Therefore:
= 5 + , = 1.0
Use: = + = 54 , = = 40 to obtain:
= 2674 <
Web crippling:
Suppose that the concentrated force to be resisted is applied at a distance

from the column end greater than /2. Therefore:
2
= 0.8
1+3
1.5
Use = 0.75 to obtain:

= 4459 >
6-57
Web sidesway buckling:
According to AISC 360-05 Commentary this limit state does not apply for
moment connections.
Web compression buckling:
From last limit states, calculate the difference between the applied force and
the minimum available strength (web local yielding on this case)
= min = 1692
From the first limit state, calculate the difference between the applied force
and the available strength (flange local bending on this case):
= = 1261
Size the continuity plates:

Use A345 ESP for continuity plates. Try
thickness), =
= .
= (continuity plate
(continuity plate width, first trial to
match the beam flanges) and = = (continuity plate depth, use the
column height between flanges).
6-58
es
A
Section A - A
Ls
bs
tcw
bbf
Figure 6.3-7: Continuity plates dimensions.

Check additional stiffener requirements from AISC 360-05
(Re. AISC 360-05, Section J10.8)
1
+ = 150 = 100
2
1
2
15
= 20
OK
OK
Check also from AISC 358-05, 2.4.4a (exterior connection):

1
OK
= 20 .
2
Compression check for the continuity plates:

As said on AISC 360-05, section J10.8, use an effective length of 0.75 (277.5
mm) and a cross section composed of 2 stiffeners and a portion of the web
having a width of 12 (exterior stiffener)
bs
bs
es
es
12t w
tw
Figure 6.3-8: Section of continuity plates plus web fraction resisting

compression force.
6-59
According to the previous figure, the properties of the section to resist

compression are:
2
= 2 + 12
, =
2 3 12
+
12
12
= 60
Use = 1.0.
According to AISC 360 J4.4 Section
= 4.618 < 25 Use Chapter J.

OK
= 0.9 = 4890 >

Tension check of the continuity plates:
According to Chapter D of AISC 360-05, for each stiffener the tension strength
is:
= 0.9 = 1280 >
= 630
OK
Note:
As it can be seen, the section for compression check is a cross (including a
portion of the column web) and it is checked for while the section for
tension check are the two separated stiffeners (no web portion) and they are
checked for
.
Welded unions of the continuity plates:
of Chapter 6 on this Manual.
8.
Column-beam moment ratio
According to AISC 358-05, Section 5.4; for SMF systems the column-beam
moment ratio shall comply with (assume that the factored axial force on the
column is = 1000 ):
> 1.0
(Re. AISC 341-05, Eq. 9-3)
With:
6-60
= 2
= 5318817
And:

+ ( + + ) = 2654268 .
2 2
+ =
Therefore:
9.
OK
= 2.003 > 1.0
Lateral bracing
Beam lateral bracing:

According to section 9.8 of AISC 341-05, both beam flanges shall be laterally
braced,
with
maximum spacing
of
0.086
= 3914 .
(Use =
). Assume that with this lateral spacing, the beam can properly
support the loads.
Meet the provisions of Appendix 6 of AISC 360-05:
Required brace strength:
=
0.02
= 100.2 .
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. A-6-7)
Use = , = 1.0, = ( )
Required brace stiffness ( = 0.75):
=
10
= 22.3 /
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. A-6-8)
Supplemental beam lateral bracing (at hinge location):

Assume that the connection between the beam and the slab is made with
shear welded connectors provided by 300 mm. Therefore, according to AISC
358-05, supplemental top and bottom flange lateral bracing at RBS section is
not required.
6-61
Tip
The reduction of the beam flange can significantly reduce the stiffness (and
stability) of the beam cross section, creating a greater propensity for LTB
lateral torsional buckling of the beam in the reduced section. The addition of
lateral bracing near the RBS may be required if a structural slab is not present
or if above minimum acceptable performance is desired.
Column lateral bracing:
According to section 9.7 of AISC 341-05, column flanges require lateral
bracing only at the beam top flange level if it is shown that the column
remains elastic outside the panel zone. Then:
= 2.003 > 2.0
. And,
considering the user note in the same section; column lateral bracing can be
achieved by the use of braces, decks, slabs, and also with indirect lateral
bracing. Therefore, there is no need for designing a specific brace for column.
6.3.f. Panel Zone / Continuity Plate /Column-Beam Moment Ratio /
Lateral Bracing according to NCh2369.Of2003 Code
Refer to Chapter 8 and Appendix B (Beam-to-Column unions on rigid steel
frames) of NCh2369.Of2003 Code.
Note: According to Appendix B, the provisions of NCh2369.Of2003 code for
rigid unbraced frames are normative, and the designer does not have to take
account the additional obligatory requirements of AISC 341-1999 (SMF
systems and IMF systems). On this example, it has been made a design using
AISC 341 and AISC 358 codes, but it is going to be checked with the
NCh2369.Of2003 code.
1.
Panel zone
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, B.2)
As said on B.2.1, the analysis can be done with elastic or plastic methods. The
panel zone shall be retrofitted with doubler plates and/or diagonal stiffeners
(see Figures B.1 and B.2 of the code) if > = 0.75
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, B.2.2).
The calculation of and is quite similar to AISC 341 code. Considering an
internal connection:
6-62
1
1
2
2
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, Eq. B-1)
With =beam moments (not greater than plastic beam moments, on this
case use = = 1624260 assuming that the plastic hinge is going
to be developed on the RBS section) calculated using the load combinations of
the code and the amplification of the earthquake term by 2; = 0.95 ,
=shear force in the column at the level of the union (neglect it as on the
previous design).
Assume that 0.75 , therefore the calculation of:
= 0.75 0.6 1 +
2
3
is quite similar to the AISC 341 code, but
using a = 0.75 and = + 2 instead of only .

Considering then the doubler plates designed on the previous stage (2 plates,
= 10 ), calculations give: = 3702 > = 2850 doubler plate
thickness is OK.
According to section B.2.5, the minimum thickness of the column web and
doubler plates must be the same as AISC 341 code.
2.
Some welding requirements of doubler plates:

(Re. NCh2369-Of2003, B.2.4 and B.8)
Doubler plates shall be welded to the column flanges with fillet or CJP groove
welds designed to resist the shear required strength (on seismic frames, the
welds shall resist the total shear strength of the doubler plate). If they are
against the column web, they shall be welded on their bottom and top ends
(and the welds must resist the proportion of the force transmitted to the
doubler plates). If they are away from the column web, doubler plates shall be
placed symmetrically and welded to the continuity plates (and the welds must
resist the proportion of the force transmitted to the each one of the doubler
plates).
Note:
As seen, the previous provisions are quite similar to AISC provisions. Refer to
Welded Connection Commentary for Continuity Plates and Doubler Plates of
Chapter 6 on this Manual.
6-63
3.
Continuity plates
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, B.3 to B.6)
Limit states check list:
Flange local bending
Equal to AISC code

2
= 0.9 6.25
= 3105 > =
= 2900

See the additional requirements on B.3.2 to B.3.3
Web local yielding
Similar to AISC code, except that if < take = = 54 . Therefore:

= 1.0 5 + = 2795 < = 2900
Web crippling
Equal to AISC code:

2
= 0.8
[1 + 3
1.5
Use = 0.75 to obtain:

= 4459 > = 2900
Web compression buckling:
This limit state does not apply for exterior connections.

Force for the design of weld connections of the continuity plates:
According to B.3.4. (and note (1)), the continuity plates shall be welded to the
web and the loaded flange so to transfer to the web the proportion of the force
carried by the stiffeners:
, = , = 106
6-64
And the minimum stiffener total area shall be =
,
,
= 341 2 .
Additional criteria for continuity plates:

(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, B.7 Section)
1
OK
+ = 150 = 150
= 30 < max ,

250
NOT OK
= 40
Use = and keep from the previous design and . The stiffener
area is = > , /
Compression check:
According to B.7.2, the section resisting the compression is the same as the
previous design (external stiffeners), therefore:
OK
= 5744 > = 2900

Some welding requirements of the continuity plates:
According to NCh2369.Of2003 (B3.4, B4.2 and B5.2) the continuity plate to

loaded flange welding shall transfer the proportion of the load corresponding to
Note:
As seen, the previous provisions are quite similar to AISC provisions. Refer to
Welded Connection Commentary for Continuity Plates and Doubler Plates of
Chapter 6 on this Manual.
4.
Column-beam moment ratio
According to NCh2369.Of2003, section 8.4.4 (R>3 systems):
> 1.2
for the columns and beams at the union analyzed. (See exceptions of not
meeting the previous inequality at 8.4.4).
The code does not specify the calculation of the moments, so use the plastic
moments of the gross sections. Then:
/
= 2.22 > 1.2
OK
6-65
5.
Lateral bracing
According to NCh2369.Of2003, section 8.5.4, on beam-to-column connections

for rigid frames both beam flanges shall count with lateral bracing designed for
0.02 . On this case, this is similar to AISC provisions, so the previous
design is OK, considering that the slab braces the superior flange of the beam.
Note:
According to the previous checks, the Chilean code is more stringent than the
AISC code only with the minimum thickness requirement of the continuity
plate. AISC is more stringent with the strength requirements for stiffeners.
R = (4c 2 + b)/8c = 30.9 mm
c=60mm
c
a=190mm
b=450mm
Column : H 450 X 450 X 355.2
CJP
Beam : H 600 X 300 X 229.2
CJP
2PL 370 x 137.5 x 40 mm
CJP
Notes:
1.- Weld access holes must comply with AISC360 requirements
2.- The connections for continuity plates and doubler plates are not designed
2PL 530 x 342 x 10 mm
Figure 6.3-9: Designed Connection.
6-66
6.4.
Bolted Flange Plate Moment Connection
6.4.a.
Design requirements
1.
NCh2369.Of2003
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003, 8.5.1)

Always the nominal strength must be verified as a baring type connection.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003, 8.5.6)
Moment connections between columns and beams must have, at least, a

resistance equal to the strength of the connected elements.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003, 8.5.3)
In beam-to-column connections of rigid frames, the upper and lower

flanges should have lateral braces or supports designed for a force equal
to 0.02 .
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.4)
Groove welds joints in seismic connections shall be complete joint

penetration type (CJP).
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003, 8.5.5)
Moment connections of rigid frames for seismic applications shall be of FR

type (fully restricted). The connections shall be designed in a way such
that the plastic hinge is developed at a safe distance from the column,
which can be obtained by strengthening the connection or weakening the
beam in the desired position for the plastic hinge.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.4.1)
Transverse sections of columns and beams in rigid earthquake-resistant

frames shall qualify as compact, that is, their width to thickness ratios
shall be lesser than given on Table 8.1 of the code.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.4.2)
Appendix B (normative appendix) of the NCh2369.Of2003 refers to the

design of beam-column connection on rigid frames.
6-67
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, App. B)

2.
AISC 341-05

(SMF) it is recommended to see the Chapter 9 of this code. Some important
1.
Beam-to-column connections requirements: see section 9.2a. The

required shear strength should be calculated taking into account the
flexural plastic hinges produced by the earthquake (E) load.
Unless otherwise designated by AISC358, CJP groove welds of beam
welds as defined in section 7.3b.(Section 9.2c)
The protected zone is defined in AISC358. In general, for unreinforced
one half of the beam depth beyond the plastic hinge point (Section 9.2d).
9.4.
according to AISC 358 (Section 9.5).
(section 9.6) and the lateral bracing (sections 9.7 and 9.8).
From chapter 7 of the supplement N1 for AISC 358-05,

recommendations for prequalified BFP connections are listed:
following
The beam web is connected to the columns using a bolted single plate
with bolts in short slotted holes.
The flange plates of the connection are welded to the flange of the column
with complete joint penetration groove welds and bolted to the beam
flanges with high strength bolts.
Top and bottom plates shall be identical.
Beam Limitations:
-
6-68
Beams shall be rolled wide flange or welded built-up I shaped

members conforming to the requirements of section 2.3 of AISC
358.
Width thickness ratios for the flanges and web of the beam
shall conform to the limits of section 9.4 of AISC 341-05.
Beam depth is limited to W36 for rolled shapes. Depth of built up
sections shall not exceed the depth permitted for rolled wideflange shapes.
The weight of the beam shall not exceed 224 kg/m.
Beam flange thickness is limited to 25 mm.
The clear span to depth ratio of the beam is limited to be greater
than 9 in SMF.
Lateral bracing shall be provided at the end of the protected zone
(See Figure 6.4-1) in both inferior and superior flanges of the
beam. The location of the lateral bracing can vary between and
1.5 (with the depth of the beam) from the farthest bolt with
respect to the face of the column. There is no need to provide
lateral bracing if the beam supports a concrete slab with welded
shear connectors spaced at a maximum of 300 mm. Lateral
bracing shall conform section 9.8 of AISC 341 Seismic Provisions.
6.4-1: Protected zone in beam to column connections.

Adapted from AISC 358-05, Figure 7.1.
Column Limitations:
-
Columns shall be any rolled shapes or welded built-up sections

permitted in section 2.3 of the AISC 358.
Rolled shape column depth shall be limited to W36 maximum when
concrete structural slab is provided. In the absence of a concrete
structural slab, rolled shape columns depth is limited to W14.
6-69
Width thickness ratios for the flanges and web of the column shall
conform to the limits of section 9.4 or 10.4 of the AISC seismic
provisions.
The beam shall be connected to the flange of the column.
Lateral bracing of columns shall conform to section 9.7 of the AISC
Seismic Provisions.
Single plate connection can be made with groove weld CJP or two sided
fillets welds or two sided PJP welds.
Flange plates shall conform to the ASTM A36/A36M or A572/A572M Grade

50 specification. Flange plates shall be connected to column flange using
CJP groove welds and these welds shall be considered as demand critical.
If backing is used, it shall be removed.
Bolts must be arranged symmetrically with respect to the axes of the

beam and only two bolts per row are permitted. The length of the bolt
group cannot be greater than the depth of the beam. The bolt diameter is
limited by 28 mm. STD holes shall be used in beam flanges and bolts in
the flange plate shall be ASTM A490 or A490M or ASTMF2280 with threads
excluded from the shear plane.
6.4.b.
Example
Design a bolted flange plate moment connection (BFP) for the beam-to-column
connection shown in Figure 6.4-22. Use A345 ESP steel, required for
constructions subject to dynamic loads, according to NCh203.Of2006 , Table 3.
Use 70 ksi electrodes for welds.
The column and the beam are Chilean H 500 x 350 x 165.6 and H 500 x 300 x
132.3 built-up sections. The connection transfers shear and moment. The clear
span of the beam is 8000 mm.
The forces for the design are:
Beam:
= 40
= 20
Column:
= 426
6-70
Suppose that the beams and columns have been properly designed for
resisting the forces given by the load combinations of the applicable building
code (including seismic load).
and IMF systems) for Seismic Applications document and its supplement N1.
H 500X300X132.3
H 500X350X165.6
6.4-2: General view of the connection.
3.
H500x350x165.6
= 500 , = 350 , = 8
= 25 , = 4561000 3
H500x300x132.3
= 500 , = 300 , = 8
= 22 , = 3571000 3
A345 ESP
= 345 , = 450
WELDS: 70 ksi electrodes, = 480
6-71
Widththickness ratio limits

Limits are given on Table I-8-1 of the AISC 341-05.
For beam and column flanges (A345 ESP):
< = 0.30
= 7.22
tw
For beam and column webs (A345 ESP):
< = 2.45
= 58.98
2
In this case, both column and beam comply with the maximum limits.
4.
Design Forces
Design forces according to the NCh2369.Of 2003 must be calculated

considering that the connection must stand at least the strength of the
connected elements; however this code does not consider any criterion for the
calculation of those forces.
Using the requirements
NCh2369.Of2003):
of
AISC
358-05
= =
(more
stringent
than
(Re. AISC 358, 2.4.3-1)
Where is the ratio of expected yield strength to the minimum specified yield
stress. is the effective plastic modulus of the section and is a factor to
take account for the peak connection strength:
+
=
< 1.2
2
= 1.15 < 1.2 = 1.15
A345 ESP is similar to ASTM A572 Gr 50, according to the table I-6-1 of the
AISC 341 seismic specification, then = 1.1. Furthermore, considering that
the plastic modulus section is the corresponding to the beam, =
Therefore:
6-72
= 1558473
For the shear design force, consider the plastic hinges at the ends of the
beam:
2
= 1.2 + 1.0 +
= 458
For further discussion regarding the calculation of the design forces according
to the Chilean provisions and practice, see the section of additional comments
at the end of this example.
5.
Design of the flange plates
Design the flange plates as plates subjected to tensile force. The force that
each plate shall resist is given by:
=
1.25
+
(Re. Section 7, step 4, AISC 358-05)
The additional 1.25 factor is due to the fact that the plastic hinge will not be
located in the face of the column, but at a distance that depends of the length
of the connection that will cause an increment of the plastic moment for the
contribution of the shear force. This factor shall be verified after the design
procedure of the bolted flange plates. Note that is the thickness of the
flange plates.
Try PL 500 x 300 x 20, therefore:
= 1.25
6.
1558473
= 3746
500 + 20
Bolts
Use M27 bolts (27 mm of diameter, standard holes of 30 mm). Even though
the NCh2369.Of2003 does not require to verify the connection as a slip critical
type, sometimes project specifications do require it.
=
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-4)

6-73
= 0.9
(Re. AISC 358 2.4.1)
Considering Class A connection surfaces, and standard size holes:

(Re. AISC 360-05, J3.8):
= 0.35
= 1.00
= 1.13
Also the nominal tensile strength for M27 ASTM A490 bolts is:
= 334

For one bolt, the design slip critical strength is:
= 132
strength is: 28.37. Use = 30.
=
= 0.9
(Re. AISC360-05, J3-1)

(Re. AISC358 2.4.1)
Then:
= 573 2
= 414
= 214
Then, the number of bolts required for the connection is: > 17.5.
Use = 18.
Even though the slip critical limit state controls the design, in this case, due
the excessively large amount of bolts required, it is decided to use the shear
6-74
nominal strength of the bolts. Furthermore, slip critical check is not needed by
AISC 358 or NCh2369.Of2003.
Then, use = 18 for each flange plate. Use rows of two bolts each one.
Considering the size of the bolts that are going to be used, the length of the
connection will be greater than the depth of the beam. This does not
accomplish the requirements of AISC 358 for the prequalified connection, but
it is preferred the use of rows of two bolts instead of limiting the length of the
connection.
7.
Verification of ductile behavior of the plates
For the ductile behavior of the flange plates, following check shall be done:
(Re. Section 7.6, step 2, AISC 358-05)
>
With = 1.1 , = 1.1 according to the table I-6-1 of the AISC 341 (ASTM
A572 grade 50 for flange plates). Considering two rows of bolts, the effective
area is ( = 30 ):
= 300 20 2 20 = 4800 2
Then:
= > =
OK
Tip:
Since the effective area is controlled by the diameter and number of the bolts,
it is important that the bolts shall have reasonable diameters in order to
ensure a ductile behavior of the flange plates.
8.
Bolts spacing and plate dimensions
Considering a minimum bolt spacing of 72 mm and a minimum distance to the

edge of 48 mm (refer to Bolted Connections section 2.4 on this manual), the
minimum length and width of the flange plates are:
= 8 72 + 2 48 +
With = 12 the assumed spacing between the column and the beam,
then:
= 684
6-75
The minimum width of the plate is given by:

= 1 72 + 2 48 = 168
OK
Then the plate PL 500 x 300 x 20 does not accomplish with the required
spacing. Try a PL 690 X 300 X 20 plate.
The length of the bolt group is:
= 72 8 = 576 > = 500
Then the connection does not accomplish with the maximum length
requirement from AISC 358-05, but as discussed above, this fact will not be
considered in the design.
6.4-3: Bolts disposition and flange plate dimensions.

9.
Bearing strength on the flange plate holes
Interior bolts
The bearing strength of each plate is:
= 1.2 2.4 = 583
= 0.9
= 72 30 = 42
6-76
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3-6a)

(Re. AISC358 2.4.1)
The flange plate thickness is = 20 , then:

= 408 < 524 = 408
Exterior bolts
30
= 39
2
= 379 < 524 = 379
= 54

= 16 408 + 2 379 = 7286 > = 3746
OK
10. Bearing strength on the beam flange holes

Since the beam flange is thicker than each flange plate, this limit state does
not control the design:
= 22 > = 20
11. Tensile yielding of flange plates
Now that the dimensions of the flange plate connections are known, the tensile
force in the plates can be estimated accurately. The shear force is estimated,
considering a free body diagram of the beam between the two hinges, which
are located at the ends of the flange plate connections on the ends of the
beam.
2
= 1.2 + 1.0 +
= 8000 2 = 8000 2 636 = 6728

= 531
Then the moment expected at the face of the column flange is:
= + = 1896189
Then the force of the plates is:
=
= 3646
+
6-77
Then the 1.25 factor used before was conservative, and the number of bolts
calculated on the previous steps is conservative.
=
(Re. AISC360-05 J4-3)
= 1.00
(Re. AISC358 2.4.1)
The gross tensile area of each flange plate is: = = 300 20 = 6000 2 :
= 2070 < 3646
Try PL 690 X 300 X 40 flange plates, then:
=
= 3511
+
= 4140 > 3511
12. Tensile rupture of flange plates

=
= 0.9
(Re. AISC360-05 J4-2)

(Re. AISC358 2.4.1)
Where is the net area of the plate, which considers the reduction of the
section because of bolt holes, the nominal dimension for the holes for a M27
bolt is = 30 , and taking into account the damage:
= 30 + 2 = 32
= 2 = 9440 2 < 0.85 = 10200 2
OK
= 3823 > 3511

13. Block shear rupture on the flange plates
= 0.6 + 0.6 + (Re. AISC360-05, J4-5)

= 0.9
6-78
(Re. AISC358 2.4.1)
Where = 1.0 in this case, according to the commentary in the AISC 360-05
6.4-4: Block shear path.

= 2 630 8.5 = 28640 2
= 2 630 = 50400 2
= 150 = 4720 2
Then:
= 8871 < 11301 = 8772 > 3511
OK
14. Compression buckling of the plate

According to the provisions of the section J4.4 of the AISC 360-05, the
compressive strength depends of the slenderness of the plate / :
According to the recommendations of the chapter 7 in supplement N1 for
AISC 358-05, may be taken as 0.651 , where 1 is the distance from the
face of the column to the nearest row of bolts, then:
1 = 60
=
=
3
= 1600000 4
12
= 12000 2
= 11.54
6-79
0.651
=
= 3.37
Since
< 25, the nominal strength is given by:

=
= 1.00
= 4140 > 3511
OK
15. Shear tab design force

The shear design force is:
= = 531
For the detail of the design of the shear tab, see section 3.1, Shear Tab
Connection, of this manual. The result of this design is:
Use a PL 450 X 100 X 10 plate, welded to the column flange with 6 mm two
fillet weld size.
6.4-5: Shear tab dimensions and bolt configuration.

16. Panel Zone
The panel zone shall be verified according to section 7.4 of AISC 358-05
supplement N1, which refers to 9.3 of AISC 341-05. According to section 9.3
of AISC 341-05 Seismic Provisions.
6-80
According to section 9.3 of AISC 341-05, the required minimum shear strength
of the panel zone shall be calculated from the summation of the shear
produced by the expected plastic hinge moments at the columns faces.
The shear strength (according to the limit state of shear yielding) is given by
the following:
(Re. Section J10.6 AISC 360-05)
If it is considered frame stability including plastic panel zone deformation, the
nominal strength is:
If 0.75 :
= 0.60 1 +
2
3
(Re. AISC 360-05, J10-11)
If > 0.75 :
= 0.60 1 +
2
3
1.9 1.2
(Re. AISC 360-05, J10-12)
Where,
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
The nominal strength is , with = 1.0 according to the AISC 341-05,
section 9.3a.
If the panel zone cannot comply with the above requirements, strength shall
be provided with doubler plates, that must be designed according to the
provisions of AISC 360-05, J10-9. Doubler plates must resist .
Calculation of :
For the calculation of the shear solicitation in the panel zone, consider the
following figure (for a general interior connection):
6-81
Vus
P uf 1
P uf 2
Vu
Mu
Mu
P uf 1
P uf 2
Vus
6.4-6: Typical panel zones forces.

Figure adapted from AISC Design Guide N13, Fig. 2-3.
The shear demand for the panel zone is:
= 1 + 2
= 0 (Assumption)
=

is the plastic moment of the beam. Then, for this example, in which there
is only one beam arriving to the column (exterior connection):
=
1909865
=
= 3995
500 22
Assuming that < 0.75 , the strength of the panel zone is:
= 0.60 1 +
2
3
= 1099 <
NOT OK
Doubler plates are required. Their design will follow provisions of AISC 360-05,
chapter G:
= 0.6
= 0.9
= 2
= 500 2 25 = 450
With the width of the panel zone of the column between column flanges.
6-82
Then:
2

= 31.08
0.6
> 15.54
Use doubler plates with thickness = 16 .

Welding of the doubler plates
for Chapter 6.
Thickness of the web of the column verification
Finally, verify the thickness of the web of the column:
(Re. AISC 341-05, 9-2)
( + )/90
Where is the depth of the panel zone between continuity plates, then:
= 500 2 22 = 456
456 + 450
= 10
90
Then the column web is not ok, but using doubler plates that are plug welded
to the column web, the thickness considered is the summation of the doubler
plates and the web of the column, so the panel zone thickness is OK.
17. Continuity plates
Continuity plates must be designed considering the provisions of chapter 2 of
AISC 358-05, which refers to section J10 of the AISC360-05. Continuity plates
are not required if the following criterions are met:
0.4 1.8

(Re. AISC 358-05, 2.4.4-1)

(Re. AISC 358-05, 2.4.4-2)
Where is the minimum required thickness of the column flange. Then, we

have:
6-83
43.6
(Re. AISC 358-05, 2.4.4-1)
50
(Re. AISC 358-05, 2.4.4-2)
Therefore, continuity plates are needed.

Continuity plates have to be designed for a force equal to , where
is the nominal strength of the column flange or the column web according to
the following limit states:
Flange local bending of the column flange
The nominal resistance is given by:

2
= 6.25
= 0.90
(Re. AISC 360-05. J10-1)
Then,
= 1347
Web local yielding
Consider that the concentrated force is applied at a distance to the end of the
column greater than the depth of the element, the nominal resistance is given
by:
= 5 +
(Re. AISC 360-05. J10-2)
= 1.00
Considering that the column web is reinforced by the doubler plates, the
thickness is:
= + 2 = 40
Additionally, is the distance from the face of the flange to the web toe of the
fillet weld. Then, considering that for the column the value of is 30 mm, and
the value of N is the length of bearing, that in this case corresponds to the
thickness of the flange of the beam, = 22 . However, the value of N
cannot be less than k for beam end reactions, so use = = 30 , then:
= 2484
6-84
Web Crippling
Considering that the concentrated compressive force is located at a distance

from the end of the member greater than half of the depth of the column:
= 0.802 1 + 3
1.5
(Re. AISC 360-05. J10-4)
= 0.75
Them considering = 30 , and the thickness of the column web including
doubler plates, we have:
= 8600
Web Compresion Buckling
This section only applies when the member is subjected to a pair of

compressive concentrated forces that are applied at both flanges of the
member, so in this case (an exterior connection), this limit state does not
apply.
Considering all the limit states:
min = 1347
Then,
=
=
= 3966

= 2619
According to the AISC 358-05, thickness of the continuity plates must comply
with the following provisions:
For exterior connections:
1
(Re. AISC 358-05, 2.4.4a)
For two side (interior) connections:

max
(Re. AISC 358-05, 2.4.4b)
6-85
This example is an interior connection. Therefore, the minimum thickness of

the continuity plate must be 11 mm.
According to the AISC 358 provisions of the section 2.4.4, continuity plates
must comply with the provisions of section J10 of the AISC 360-05. Therefore,
the continuity plate shall be designed as a stiffener, which is designed as an
element subjected to tensile forces, according to chapter D, and as element
subjected to compressive forces, according to the chapter E and section J4.4 of
AISC 360-05.
Design for tensile forces
Tensile yielding:
=
= 0.9
(Re. AISC 360-05, D2-1)
Then, the required thickness, considering that the width of both continuity
plates is = 342 , then:

= 24.66

Use = .
Tensile fracture:
=
= 0.75
(Re. AISC 360-05, D2-2)
Where correspond to the effective area, which in this case is equal to .

Then we have:
= 2885 > 2619
Design for compressive forces
According to section E6.2 and J4.4 of AISC 360-05, the nominal strength is:
6-86
OK
If
25:
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4-6)
=
If
> 25: the design must be made according to chapter E of the AISC 360-05.
Section J10.8 of AISC 360-05 establishes that the effective length for the
buckling verification is 0.75, where is the length of the stiffener; the area of
the stiffener must be considered as a cross section, with the two continuity
plates and an orthogonal section corresponding to 25 for exterior stiffeners or
12 for interior stiffeners (see Figure 6.4-7).
12tw or 25tw
y
x
Stiffener
Stiffener
6.4-7: Design area for the stiffeners.

For the exterior connection analyzed (considering that
thickness of the doubler plates):
includes the
= + 122 = 27750 2
3
12 3
=
+
= 369085312 4
12
12
3
=
+ 4 = 85896850 4
12
= 2 = 450
= 0.75 = 337
Verify only the weak axis, which corresponds to :
= 55.63
6-87
= 6.05
Then, design according to J4.4 of the AISC 360-05.

= 0.9 , =
= 8616 > =
= 3966
OK
AISC 360 J10-8 additional criteria:

The width of the continuity plate plus one half of the thickness of the column
shall be not less than one third of the width of the flange of the beam or
moment connection plate that delivers the force:
+
+
= 175 >
= 175 >
= 100
= 100
OK
OK
The thickness of the continuity plate shall not be less than one half the
thickness of the flange or moment connection that transmits the force and
greater or equal than the width of the continuity plate divided by 15:
= 25 >
= 25 >
= 25 >
= 11
2
/2
15
OK
= 20
OK
= 11.4
OK
Finally the continuity plate shall extend at least one half of the column depth.
18. Lateral Bracing
Following section 7.3.1 of the AISC 358 supplement, lateral bracing must be
provided according to 9.8 for SMF of the AISC 341 Seismic Provisions. Thus,
lateral bracing must be provided at spacing not greater than = 0.086 /
and braces must meet the provisions of Appendix 6 of the AISC 360-05,
considering = and = 1.0:
Resistance required by the brace (nodal bracing):
= 0.02 /
6-88
(Re. AISC 360-05, A-6-7)
Stiffness required by the brace:

=
10
(Re. AISC 360-05, A-6-8)
= 0.75
Where is the distance between flange centroids.
Provide lateral bracing only in the inferior flange of the beam, because it is
supposed that the beam stand a slab that provides lateral bracing for the
superior flange. Furthermore, suppose that the inferior flange has lateral
bracing at both sides of the beam, so design the braces only for tensile force
solicitations.
= 1355194
= 500 22 = 478
= 56.7
Suppose that is the maximum value permitted, which is:
0.086
, = 76.7
= 3823
=
Then:
= 9.88
And the resistance to tensile forces is given by:

Tensile yielding:
=
= 0.9
(Re. AISC 360-05, D2-1)
Then, the required area is:

max
0.9
Considering a distance between adjacent beams of = 4000 :
6-89
189 2
Try a tubular section D1 7/8, with a thickness of 1.5 mm. The area of this
section is 217 mm2.
NCh2369.Of2003 establishes that the lateral bracing must be designed to
withstand a force equal 0.02 , which in this example results 45.5 , that
is less than the requirements of AISC.
OK.
19. Beam column relationship limitations

According to the section 7.4 of the AISC 358 supplement N1, we have that
the column- beam ratio shall conform to the requirements of the section 9.6 of
the AISC 341 Seismic Provisions for SMF. The code establishes the following:
1.0
Then, we have:
2 2 /
=
1.1 +
Where = = 351392 , then:
= 1.61 > 1.0
OK
On the other hand, the provisions of section 8.4.4 of NCh2369.Of2003

establish that the ratio between the sum of the resistance moments of the
columns to the resistance of the beams that arrive to the connection must be
equal or greater than 1.2. The code does not specify how the resistance
moments should be calculated, therefore, we use the same moments of the
AISC specification, so this ratio is OK.
6-90
18 M27 A490
PL 690X300X40
Continuity plate t = 25 mm
6
6
5 M27 A490
PL 450X110X10
Doubler plate t = 16 mm
H 500X300X132.3
H 500X350X165.6
6.4-8: Designed connection.
6.4.c.
2003
1.
Panel zone and continuity plates according to NCh2369. Of
Panel Zone
According to the NCh2369. Of 2003, section B2.2:

=
2
2
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003, B-1)
Where correspond to 0.95 , where is the height of the beam . Consider

only for this example that = 0 and that is (For the use of according
to the Chilean practice see the discussion at the end of this example):
= 3460
According to section B2.2, the available strength of the panel zone is:
= 0.60 1 +
2
3
if 0.75
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003, B-2)
= 0.75
Where is the total thickness of the panel zone, including doubler plates,
then:
= 2 16 + = 40
= 3308 < 3460
6-91
Then, considering the provisions of the NCh2369.Of2003, the thickness of the

doubler plates shall be increased. Use = , then:
= 2 20 + = 48
= 3925 > 3460
2.
OK
Continuity plates
According to the provisions of section B.3, B.4, B.5, B6 and B.7 of

NCh2369.Of2003, Continuity Plates must be designed considering:
The nominal strength is given by:

2
= 6.25
= 0.90
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003, B3.1)
Then,
= 1347
Web local yielding
Considering that the concentrated force is applied at a distance to the end of

the element greater than the depth of the element, the nominal resistance is
given by:
= 5 +
= 1.00
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003, B-5)
Considering that includes the thickness of the doubler plates.

Where is the distance from the face of the flange to the web toe of the fillet.
Then considering that for the column the value of is 30 mm, and the value of
N is the length of bearing that in this case corresponds to the thickness of the
flange of the beam, = 22 . However the value of cannot be less than
for beam end reactions, so we take = = 30 , then:
= 2980
6-92
Web Crippling

from the end of the member greater than half of the depth of the column, the
nominal resistance is:
= 0.802 1 + 3
1.5
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003, B-7)
= 0.75
Them considering = 22 (Thickness of the beam flange):
= 12255
Web Compression Buckling

member, so in this case (a exterior connection), this limit state does not apply.
Then, the force of design for the continuity plates is given by:
= 3460 1347 = 2113
Then, the design force is lesser than the calculated with the AISC
requirements; however the doubler plates of the connections have to be
increased.
Welding of the continuity plates:
According to NCh2369.Of2003 (B3.4,B4.2 and B5.2) the continuity plate to
Note: As seen, the previous provisions are quite similar to AISC provisions.
Plates of Chapter 6.
Additional requirements from appendix B of NCh2369. Of 2003
According to section B7.1 of NCh2369.Of 003:
6-93
The width of each continuity plate plus one half of the column web shall be
greater than one third of the width of the flange of the column or plate of
moment connection that delivers the concentrated load:
= 175 >
OK
= 116
The thickness of the continuity plate shall be greater than the thickness of the
flange of the beam or the flange that transmit the concentrated force and
greater than its own width multiplied by /250, with in MPa:
OK
= 25 > = 22
= 25 >
2 250
OK
= 12.7
Additionally, the thickness of the continuity plate shall be no lesser than the
thickness of the element of the moment connection that transmits the
concentrated force to the column:
NOT OK.
= 25 < = 40
Then, the thickness of the continuity plate has to be increased to = 40 .
The design according to the additional provisions of NCh2369of.2003 is the

following:
18 M27 A490
PL 690X300X40
Continuity plate t = 40 mm
6
6
5 M27 A490
PL 450X110X10
H 500X300X132.3
H 500X350X165.6
6.4-9 Designed connection, with additional criteria from NCh2369Of.2003.
6-94
6.4.d.
Additional comments: Chilean practice and provisions
The BFP moment connection is the most typical connection in the Chilean
practice; because of that, it is important to give some additional comments
regarding this connection.
The BFP connections present advantages for the Chilean construction practice.
Since the number of qualified professionals on steel construction is limited on
Chile, the most favorable connections are the ones that are simple and require
less constructive details to be executed at the construction site. The BFP
connection has the advantage of requiring that the welded parts, such as the
shear tab plate or the connection of the flange plates to the column, can be
done a the shop, which significantly reduces the amount of qualified
professionals required on site, to obtain a connection that has good behavior
under cyclic loads.
1.
Design Forces
NCh2369Of.2003 establishes that the design forces that have to be considered

in the design of moment connections between beam and columns shall be, at
least, equal to the strength of the connected elements (Re. Section 8.5.4).
This is equivalent to say that the design forces for the moment connections are
obtained considering the plastic moment that can be developed at the beam.
The latter does not considers effects such as strain hardening and the actual
expected yield stress of the available steel plates. These effects are considered
by the AISC seismic provisions by amplifying the plastic moment developed at
the beam by the coefficients and .
Therefore, the design moment to design the connection, according to the
Chilean provisions, is at least:
=
In the example developed in this section, the design moment according to the
AISC provisions was:
= 1558473
Whereas the design moment according to the Chilean provision is:
= 1231994
6-95
which is approximately 25% smaller than the design moment obtained with
the AISC provisions.
The shear design force has to be calculated from the plastic moment that can
be developed at the ends of the beam (it is a capacity design), assuming that
plastic hinges develop at certain sections. Also, gravity loads are applied
simultaneously with the seismic loads.
NCh2369.Of2003 does not give any indication regarding the position where the
plastic hinges (neither establishes any criterion for designing a protected zone,
as the AISC provisions does). The only requirement is that the plastic hinge
must be located at a prudent distance from the face of the column (Re.
Section 8.4.1). Since there are no provisions regarding the exact location of
the plastic hinge, the use of the recommendations of the AISC 358-05 seems a
valid alternative. The indication for BFP connections is that the plastic hinge is
located at the end of the bolt group of the connection. Then, the shear design
force would be:
=
= 2
Where is the distance from the plastic hinge to the face of the column, and
is the length of the beam between column faces. The force
corresponds to the shear load calculated from load combinations that does not
include the seismic effect, such as self weight and live loads.
The location of the plastic hinge at a section far from the end of the beam will
induce a larger moment at the face of the column, which corresponds to the
shear design force multiplied by the distance from the face to the plastic
hinge.
Since the design moment according to the Chilean provisions is smaller than
the AISC moment, the required length of the connection will be smaller, and
then the design shear load will be smaller. Therefore, the amplification of the
required moment strength due to the distance between the plastic hinge and
the column will be lesser than the required moment strength obtained in the
case of the AISC provisions.
The use of the Chilean design provisions will result in smallest BFP
connections, mostly because these connections do not take into account the
6-96
possibility of strain hardening and larger expected yield strength. It means

that it is implied in the design standard that it is expected that the
displacement demands of the steel structures due to a Chilean earthquake are
not large. This is supported by observation from the performance of steel
structures during previous earthquakes in Chile.
Anyway, it is important that at the stage of the project, when the basis of
design are established, to have a discussion in order to decide the use of
Chilean practice and provisions or the use of the AISC codes.
2.
Detailing requirements
For the BFP connections, AISC 358-05 establishes some detailing requirements
such as:
Two bolts per row.

Length of the connections limited by the depth of the beam.
Flange plates shall be CJP welded.
Limitations for flange and web width-thickness ratios.
The first two requirements are not established in the Chilean code. The CJP
welding requirement is established in section 8.5.5 of NCh2369.Of2003, and
the limitations for width-thickness ratios are established in section 8.4.3 of
NCh2369.Of2003, which are slightly less demanding than AISC.
3.
Design verifications
General verifications
The Chilean provisions do not establish additional design verifications
compared to the verifications for this type of connection according to the AISC
provisions. The limit states that should be verified according to the Chilean
provisions are:
Flange plates:
Slip critical for bolts (this limit state is not mandatory).

Shear resistance for bolts.
Bearing and tear out of the plate.
Tensile yielding of the plate.
Tensile rupture of the plate.
Block shear rupture of the plate.
6-97
Compression buckling of the plate.
Shear tab:
Slip critical for bolts (this limit state is not mandatory).

Shear resistance for bolts.
Bearing and tear out of the plate.
Tensile yielding of the plate.
Tensile rupture of the plate.
Block shear rupture of the plate.
Welding of the plate.
The main difference between the Chilean and AISC provisions is that the latter
considers, for prequalified BFP moment connections, an additional requirement
in order to ensure the ductile behavior of the connection. The additional
requirement is given by forcing that the tensile rupture limit state has to be
greater than the tensile yielding limit state, considering the factors and
for each limit state respectively, as seen on the solved example previously.
Panel Zone
For the design of the panel zone, the required verifications have to be done
according to the provisions of Appendix B of NCh2369Of.2003. These
provisions are, in general, the same as established in the AISC 341-05 Seismic
Provisions, and in AISC 358-05 Supplement N1.
However, some differences arise from the calculation of the design force that
the panel zone must resist. The design force according, to Appendix B of the
NCh2369Of.2003 is given by:
=
1
1
2
2
(Re. B-1, NCh2369.Of2003)
This design force is obtained from equilibrium of the free body diagram of the
beam-tocolumn connection. 1 and 2 correspond to the moments of the
beams that arrive to the connection, calculated from the load combinations
established in NCh2369Of.2003, considering that the seismic load is amplified
by 2.0, but the moments need not exceed the plastic moments of the beams.
The force corresponds to the shear force in the column.
Although AISC 341-05 considers the same free body diagram than the Chilean
provisions, AISC 341-05 establishes that this free body diagram must be done
6-98
considering the projected moments from the plastic hinges, whereas the
Chilean provisions use the moments provided by the load combinations.
The other difference in the calculation of the design force for the panel zone,
are the values of 1 and 2 , which are recommended to be 0.95 times the
depth of the beams arriving to the connection, whereas the AISC provisions
consider the distance between centers of the flange plates of the beams.
If the panel zone resistance is smaller than the design force , continuity
plates shall be provided. The value of is calculated from the same equations
for both Chilean and AISC provisions (see section 6.4.c and 6.4.d of this
chapter), but the reduction factor considered in the Chilean provision is:
= 0.75
Whereas the AISC provisions establish that = 1.00. Then, the Chilean
provisions use smaller design forces, but considers also a lesser panel zone
resistance.
For the continuity plate design, the limit states considered are the same for
both Chilean and AISC provisions:

Web local yielding
Web crippling
Web compression buckling
Finally, NCh2369.Of2003 and AISC provisions establish additional

requirements for the dimensions of the continuity plates. Both provisions are
quite similar and for more detail see 6.4.c and 6.4.d of this chapter.
Nevertheless, the Chilean code establishes that the thickness of the continuity
plates shall not be lesser than the thickness of the flange plate that transmits
the moment from the beam to the column, whereas the AISC provisions only
require that the thickness of the continuity plates shall not be lesser than half
of the thickness of the plate that transmit the forces to the column. This can
lead to bigger continuity plates, but the Chilean provision considers smaller
design forces for the connection and therefore, the flange plates that transmit
the forces to the column have smaller thicknesses.
6-99
4.
Additional requirements
Lateral bracing
NCh2369Of.2003 requires that the beam at the connection shall be provided
with lateral support on the beam flanges. The lateral support shall be capable
to resist 0.02 . Whereas the AISC provisions establish that the lateral
bracing for the beam shall be designed according to the Appendix 6 of the
AISC 360 (see 6.4.b of this chapter). Both requirements are very similar and
will lead to similar designs.
Column-beam ratios
NCh2369.Of2003 establishes in section 8.4.4 that the summation of the
moment capacities of the columns that arrive to the column-to-beam
connection shall be 1.2 times greater or equal than the summation of the
capacities of the beams arriving to the connection. However, the code does not
give indications for the calculation of these capacities. On the other hand, AISC
358-05 Supplement N1 establishes that the ratio between the capacities of
the columns and beams shall be greater or equal to 1.0, and gives an
expression to calculate those moment capacities (see 6.4.b.19 of this chapter).
6-100
6.5.
Welded Unreinforced Flange-Welded Web Moment Connection
6.5.a.
Design requirements
1.
NCh2369.Of2003
(Re. NCh2369, 8.5.1)
Bolts must be prestressed to a 70% of the nominal strength for slip

critical; however the nominal strength could be calculated as the
corresponding for bearing type connections.
(Re. NCh2369, 8.5.6)
For field joints, see requirements of 8.5.8 section.

(Re. NCh2369, 8.5.8)
The moment connections between columns and beams must have as

minimum, the resistance equal to the connected elements.
(Re. NCh2369, 8.5.3)
In column beams joints, both inferior and superior flange must have
lateral bracing designed for a force equal to 0.02 .
(Re. NCh2369, 8.5.4)
The groove welds joints in seismic connections must be of complete joint

penetration (CJP).
(Re. NCh2369, 8.5.5)
The design of the panel zone must be according to the provisions of the
appendix B of the NCh2369.Of2003 (Beam-column connection design on
rigid steel frames).
6-101
2.
AISC 341-05
For the design of beam-to-column connections of special moment frames

(SMF) it is recommended to see Chapter 9. Some important aspects are:
3.
Requirements of beam-to-column connections: see section 9.2a. The

required shear strength should take into account the plastic hinge flexural
capacity for the earthquake (E) load effect.
Unless otherwise designated by AISC358, CJP groove welds of beam
welds as defined in section 7.3b. (Section 9.2c).
The extent of the protected zone shall be defined on AISC358. For
unreinforced connections, the protected zone will extend from the face of
the column to one half of the beam depth beyond the plastic hinge point
(Section 9.2d).
9.4.
according to AISC358 (Section 9.5)
AISC 358-05: Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel

Moment Frames for Seismic Application and Supplement No1 to AISC
358-05
From chapter 8 of the supplement of the AISC 358-05:
Beam Limitations:
-
6-102
Beams shall be rolled wide flange or welded built-up I shaped

members conforming to the requirements of section 2.3 of the AISC
358.
Beam depth is limited to a maximum of W36 for rolled shapes. Depth
of built up sections shall no exceed the depth permitted for rolled
wide-flange shapes.
Width thickness ratios for the flanges and web of the beam shall
conform to the limits of section 9.4 of the AISC seismic provisions.
The weight of the beam shall not exceed 224 kg/m.
Beam flange thickness is limited to 25 mm.
The clear span to depth ratio of the beam is limited to be greater than
7 in SMF.
Lateral bracing shall be provided at the end of the protected zone
(see Figure 6.5-1) in both inferior and superior flanges of the beam.
The location of the lateral bracing can be vary between d and 1.5d
(with d the depth of the beam) from the face of the column. There is
no need to provided lateral bracing if the beam support a concrete
slab with welded shear connectors spaced at a maximum of 300 mm.
Lateral bracing shall conform section 9.8 of AISC 341 Seismic
Provisions.
6.5-1: Protected zone for WUF-W moment connections.
Column Limitations:
-
Columns shall be any rolled shapes or welded built-up sections

permitted in section 2.3 of the AISC 358.
Rolled shape column depth shall be limited to a maximum of W36.
The depth of the built up wide-flange columns shall not exceed that
for rolled shapes.
Width thickness ratios for the flanges and web of the beam shall
conform to the limits of section 9.4 or 10.4 of the AISC seismic
provisions.
The beam shall be connected to the flange of the column.
Lateral bracing of columns shall conform to section 9.7 of the AISC
Seismic Provisions.
Panel zones shall conform to the requirements of section 9.3 for SMF of
the AISC 341 Seismic Provisions.
6-103
The column beam ratios are limited by the requirements of section 9.6
of the AISC 341 Seismic Provisions. The summation

shall be taken
equal to
( + ), where is computed according to the provisions of
section 8.7 of the AISC 358 supplement and is the additional moment
product of the shear amplification at the plastic hinge to the centerline of
the column.
Beam flanges shall be connected to the column flange using complete

joint penetration groove welds (CJP). Beam flange welds shall conform to
the provisions of the section 7.3 and appendix W of the AISC Seismic
Provisions.
Weld access hole geometry shall conform to the requirements of AWS

D1.8 section 6.9.1.2. Weld access hole quality requirements shall conform
to the requirements of AWS D1.8 Section 6.92.
The single plate connection shall be provided with a thickness equal or

greater than the thickness of the beam web. The height of the single plate
shall allow a 6 mm minimum and 13 mm maximum overlap with the weld
access hole at the top and bottom. The single plate width beyond the end
of the weld access hole must be 50 mm minimum.
The single plate shear connection shall be welded to the column flange
and the welds must stand a shear strength of at least 0.6 , where
is the height of the plate and is the thickness of the plate.
The single plate must be connected to the beam web with fillet welds. The
size of the fillet weld shall be the thickness of the single plate minus 2
mm. The fillets must extend along the sloped top and bottom portions of
the plate and along the full single plate heigth. The fillets must end at a
distance no greater than 25 mm but not less than 13 mm from the edge
of the access hole.
The beam web must be connected with the column flange with a CJP
groove weld. This welds shall be provided over the full length of the web
between the access holes and must comply with the requirements of the
section 7.3 and the appendix W of the AISC Seismic Provisions. Weld tabs
are not required.
6-104
CJP beam web to column

flange web
single plate to column

flange web
Erection bolts in standard holes or horizontal

short slots are permitted as needed for erection
loads and safety
single plate to
beam web weld
6.5-2: Details of the connection.

Adapted from AISC358 Supplement n1, Figure 8.2.
6.5.b.
Example
Design a Welded Unreinforced Flange-Welded (WUF-W) Web Moment

Connection between a column and a beam, shown in Figure 6.5-3. Use
A345ESP steel. Use 70 ksi electrode for welds.
The column and beam are Chilean H500x350x165.6 and H500x300x132.3
built-up sections. The connection transfers shear and moment. The clear span
of the beam is 8000 mm.
The design forces are:
Beam:
= 40
= 20
Column:
= 500
6-105
H500X300X132.3
H500X350X165.6
6.5-3: General view of the connection.
3.
Section properties
H500x350x165.6
= 500 , = 350 , = 8
= 25 , = 4561000 3
H500x300x132.3
= 500 , = 300 , = 8
= 22 , = 3571000 3
Width Thickness ratio limitations
The limitations of the width thickness ratios are given in table I-8-1 of AISC
341-05.
For beam and column flanges:
6-106
< = 0.30
= 7.22
2
For beam and column webs:
< = 2.45
= 58.98
Column flange:
= 7.0 <
OK
= 56.3 <
OK
= 6.8 <
OK
= 57 <
OK
Column web:
Beam flange:
Beam web:
4.
Design forces
Calculation of the maximum probable moment and shear force

The maximum probable moment is calculated according to section 2.4.3 of
AISC 358-05:
=
In this case, according to section 8.7 of AISC 358 supplement, shall be
taken equal to 1.4. For A345ESP according to the table I-6-1 of the AISC 341
Seismic Provisions, considering that the A345ESP is similar to an ASTM A572
grade 50, then = 1.1. Finally = , so the probable moment is:
= 1897271
Since the plastic hinge is located at the face of the column, the effective
moment will be:
6-107
=
Considering that the plastic hinge is immediately adjacent to the face of the
column, the shear force is:
2
+
= 1.2 + 1.0 = 68
= 542
5.
Beam to column moment ratio verification
According to section 8.4 of the AISC 358 supplement n1, the column - beam
ratio shall conform to the requirements of the section 9.6 of the AISC 341
Seismic Provision for SMF. The code establishes the following:
1.0
= ( + )
is permitted to be calculated according to section 8.4 of the AISC 358
supplement as /2, where is the depth of the column. Then:
6.5.c.
1.
2 2 /
1.4 + /2
= 1.44 > 1.0
OK
Single plate shear connection design
Design Force
According to the provisions of the section 8.6 of the AISC 358 supplement, the
shear strength of the single plate shear connection has to be greater than
(0.6 ). To calculate the value of (the height of the plate that resist
shear), we fix the dimension of the access holes.
According to section J1.6 of the Commentary of the AISC 360-05 Specification,
the dimensions of the access hole are given by:
Width: Greater than 1.5 or 38 mm.
Height: Greater than 1.5 or 25 mm, but less than 50 mm.
6-108
Then, the dimensions for the access holes are:

= 38
= 25
= 2 2 = 406
= = 8
Note: For the dimensions of the access holes, conservatively it was not
considered for the design the minimum overlap of 6 mm in access holes.
Therefore:
0.6 = 739
Which is greater than = 585 , so we design for = 739 .
2.
Shear yielding of the plate

= 0.6
= 1.00
(Re. AISC360-05 J4-3)
Consider a plate with a height equal to and a thickness = . The

width of the plate is given by the minimum established by section 8.6 of the
AISC 358 supplement n1:
= + 50 + 12 = 100
The 50 mm come from the AISC 358 supplement n1 provisions and the 12
mm are for tolerance issues.
Then, considering that the gross shear area of the plate is: = = 406
12 = 4872 2 , we have:
= > 739
OK
6-109
3.
Shear rupture of the plate

= 0.6
= 0.75
(Re. AISC360-05 J4-4)
Then, considering = , we have:

= 986 > 739
4.
OK
Weld shear
The weld used for the connection between the plate and the column flange
consist one weld at each side of the plate connection. The eccentricity between
the weld and the line of application of the shear, is taken as a half of the width
of the single plate connection:
= 50
Then, the weld is subject to a shear force and a moment given by:
= 739 , = = 38950
Since there are shear and moment acting on the connection, use the elastic
method for the calculation of the maximum stress for the weld:
(Re. Part 8 AISC Manual of Steel Construction)

2
2 + 2
Where and are the inertia and the effective area of the weld. Use 10
mm fillet weld size, which complies with maximum fillet weld size; the
height of the weld is equal to the length of the plate minus two times the
thickness of the plate, = 382 mm.
= 2 8 0.707 = 14.14
6-110

3
= 65683797 4
12
= = 5401 2
= 113
= 144
= 183
According to the AISC 360-05, table J2.5, the nominal strength for a weld is:
= 0.60
= 0.75
Then,
= > 183
5.
OK
Panel Zone
The panel zone must be verified according to section 8.4 of AISC 358-05
Supplement N1, which refers to sections 9.3 or 10.3 of the AISC 341 Seismic
Provisions.
According to section 9.3 of AISC 341, the required shear strength of the panel
zone shall be calculated from the summation of the projected expected plastic
hinge moments at the column faces.
The shear strength (according to the limit state of shear yielding) is given by
the following:
(Re. Section J10.6 AISC 360-05)
If it is considered frame stability including plastic panel zone deformation, the
nominal strength is:
If 0.75 :
= 0.60 1 +
2
3
(Re. AISC 360-05, J10-11)
If > 0.75 :
= 0.60 1 +
2
3
1.9 1.2
(Re. AISC 360-05, J10-12)
6-111
Where,
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Finally, the nominal resistance is
341, section 9.3a.
, with = 1.0 according to the AISC
If the shear strength is not enough, doubler plates shall be provided, which
must be designed according to AISC 360-05, J10-9, which refers to the
requirements of the chapter G of the AISC 360-05. The doubler plates must
resist .
6.
Calculation of
For the calculation of the shear forces in the panel zone, consider the following
figure.
Vus
(Puf )2
(Puf ) 1
Vu
(M u)2
(M u)1
(Puf ) 1
(Puf )2
Vus
6.5-4: Typical panel zones forces. Figure adapted from AISC Design Guide
N13, Fig. 2-3.
The shear forces in the columns can be estimated assuming that the inflection
point is located at the middle of the story height of the column. However, the
effect of the column shear is neglected, which is a conservative assumption.
The shear design force for the panel zone is:
6-112
= 1 + 2
= 0 (Assumption)
=

is the plastic moment of the beam. For this example, there is only one
beam at the column (exterior connection):
=
1897271
=
= 3969
500 22
Assuming that < 0.75 , the resistance of the panel zone is:
= 0.60 1 +
2
3
= 1099 <

Doubler plates are required; their design will follow the provisions of chapter G
of AISC 360-05:
= 0.6
= 0.9
= 2
= 500 2 25 = 450
Where is the width of the panel zone of the column between column
flanges.
Then,

= 30.81
0.6
> 15.4
We use doubler plates with a thickness = 16 .

7.
Welding of the doubler plates
for Chapter 6.
8.
Thickness of the web of the column
Verify the thickness of the web of the column:

6-113
( + )/90
Where is the depth of the panel zone between continuity plates, then:
= 500 2 22 = 456
456 + 450
= 10
90
Then the column web is not ok. But using doubler plates that are plug welded
to the column web, the thickness considered is the summation of the doubler
plates and the web of the column:
= 2 + = 40 > 10
9.
OK
Continuity plates
Continuity plates must be designed considering chapter 2 of AISC 358-05,

which refers to section J10 of AISC360-05. The continuity plate is not required
complying with the following criterion:
0.4 1.8

(Re. AISC 358-05, 2.4.4-1)

(Re. AISC 358-05, 2.4.4-2)
Where is the minimum thickness of the column flange. Then, we have:

43.6
(Re. AISC 358-05, 2.4.4-1)
50
(Re. AISC 358-05, 2.4.4-2)
Therefore, continuity plates are needed.

The continuity plates have to be designed to a force that is , where
is the nominal strength of the column flange or the column web to the
following limit states:

2
= 6.25
= 0.90
6-114
(Re. AISC 360-05. J10-1)
Then:
= 1347
Web local yielding
Consider that the concentrated force is applied at a distance to the end of the
element greater than the depth of the element; the nominal resistance is given
by:
= 5 +
= 1.00
(Re. AISC 360-05. J10-2)
The value of considers the thickness of the doubler plates.

N is the length of bearing that in our case corresponds to the thickness of the
flange of the beam, = 22 . However the value of cannot be less than
for beam end reactions, so we take = = 30 , then we have:
= 2484
Web Crippling

from the end of the member greater than half of the depth of the column:
= 0.802 1 + 3
1.5
(Re. AISC 360-05. J10-4)
= 0.9
Then, considering = 30 :
= 10321

member, so in this case (a exterior connection), this limit state does not apply.
6-115
Considering all the limit states:

min = 1347
Then,
=
=
= 3969

= 2622
According to the AISC 358-05, the thickness of the continuity plates must
accomplish with the following provisions:
For exterior connections:
1
(Re. AISC 358-05, 2.4.4a)
For two side (interior) connections:

max
(Re. AISC 358-05, 2.4.4b)
This example is an exterior connection. Therefore, the minimum thickness of

the continuity plate must be 11 mm.
According to the AISC 358 provisions, section 2.4.4, continuity plates must
comply with the provisions of section J10 of AISC 360-05. Therefore, the
continuity plate shall be designed as a stiffener, which is designed as an
element subjected to tensile forces according to chapter D of AISC 360-05,
and as an element subjected to compressive forces, according to chapter E
and section J4.4 of AISC 360-05.
10. Design for tensile forces
Tensile yielding:
=
= 0.9
(Re. AISC 360-05, D2-1)
Then, the required thickness, considering that the width of both continuity
plates is = 342 , then:

6-116
= 24.69

Use = .
Tensile fracture:
(Re. AISC 360-05, D2-2)
=
= 0.75
Where corresponds to the effective area, which in this case is equal to .

The result is:
OK
= 2885 > 2622
11. Design for compressive forces

According to the provisions of the section E6.2 and J4.4 of the AISC 360-05,
we have that the nominal strength is:
If
If
25 then =
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4-6)
> 25 then the design must be made according to the provisions of chapter
E of AISC 360-05.
Before proceeding with the verification for compressive forces, it has to be
considered that the section J10.8 of AISC 360-05 establish that the effective
length for the buckling verification is 0.75, where is the length of the
stiffener, and the area of the stiffener must be consider as a cross section,
with the two continuity plates and a orthogonal section corresponding to 25
for exterior stiffeners or 12 for interior stiffeners, of the section of the
column web, including doubler plates (see Figure 6.5-5).
12tw or 25tw
y
x
Stiffener
Stiffener
6.5-5: Design area for the stiffeners.
6-117
For the exterior connection analyzed:

= + 122 = 27750 2
3
12 3
=
+
= 369085312 4
12
12
3

=
+ 4 = 85896850 4
12
= 2 = 450
= 0.75 = 337
Only the weak axis is verified, which corresponds to:
= 55.63
= 6.05
Then, design according to the provisions of the section J4 of the AISC 360-05
results in:
= = 9573
= 8616 > =
= 3969
OK
12. AISC 360 J10-8 additional criteria

The width of the continuity plate plus one half of the thickness of the column
shall be not less than one third of the width of the flange of the beam or
moment connection plate that delivers the force:
= 175 >
= 100
OK
The thickness of the continuity plate shall not be less than one half the
thickness of the flange or moment connection that transmits the force and
greater or equal than the width of the continuity plate divided by 15:
= 25 >
= 25 >
= 11
2
/2
15
= 11.4
OK
OK
Finally the continuity plate shall extend at least one half of the column depth,
which in this case is accomplished because the continuity plate extends in all
the depth of the column.
6-118
13. Lateral Bracing

Following the provisions of section 8.3.1 of the AISC 358 supplement, lateral
bracing must be provided according to 9.8 for SMF of the AISC 341 Seismic
Provision. Thus, lateral bracing must be provided at a spacing not greater than
= 0.086 / , and the braces must meet the provisions of Appendix 6 of
AISC 360-05, considering a design moment equal to = , and = 1.0:
Resistance required by the brace (nodal bracing):
= 0.02 /
(Re. AISC 360-05, A-6-7)
Stiffness required by the brace:

=
10
(Re. AISC 360-05, A-6-8)
= 0.75
Where is the distance between flange centroids.
Provide lateral bracing only at the bottom flange of the beam. Furthermore,
suppose that the inferior flange has lateral bracing at both sides of the beam,
so design the braces only for tensile forces.
= 1355194
= 500 22 = 478
= 56.7
Assume that is the maximum value permitted, which is:
0.086
, = 76.7
= 3823
=
Then:
The resistance to tensile forces is given by tensile yielding:

= 9.88
=
= 0.9
(Re. AISC 360-05, D2-1)
6-119
Then, the required area for the cross section of the brace in tension is (from
strength and stiffness requirements):
max
0.9
Considering a distance between adjacent beams of = 4000 :

189 2
Then a tubular section D1 7/8, with a thickness of 1.5 mm, may be used. The
area of this section is 217 mm2.
NCh2369.Of2003 establishes that the lateral bracing must be designed to
resist a force equal 0.02 , which in this example is equal to 45.5 , which
is 20% less than the requirements from AISC.
14. Verification of shear strength of the beam
The beam is subjected to a shear force = 542 ; then, according to the
provisions of chapter G of AISC 360-05:
= 0.6
= 1.0
= 1.0
= 500 8 = 4000 2
= 828 > 542
(Re. AISC 360-05, G2-1)
OK
Designed Connection
CJP
Contuinity plate t = 25 mm
PL t = 12 mm
10
10
H500X300X132,3
H500X350X165,6
6.5-6: General view of the designed connection.
6-120
6.5.d.
1.
Panel zone and continuity plates according to NCh2369.Of2003
Panel Zone
According to the NCh2369.Of2003, section B2.2:

=
1
1
2
2
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, B-1)
Where corresponds to 0.95 , and is the height of the beam i. Consider

for this example that = 0 and that is :
= 3994
According to section B2.2, the resistance of the panel zone is:
= 0.60 1 +
2
3
0.75
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, B-2)
= 0.75
Where is the total thickness of the panel zone, including doubler plates,
then:
= 2 16 + = 40
= 3308 < 3994
Then considering the provisions of the NCh2369.Of2003, the thickness of the
doubler plates shall be increased. Use = , wich results in the
following verification:
= 4550 > 3994
2.
OK
Continuity plates
According to section B.3, B.4, B.5, B6 and B.7 of NCh2369.Of2003, Continuity

Plates must be designed considering:

2
= 6.25
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, B3.1)
6-121
= 0.90
Then,
= 1347
Web local yielding
Considering that the concentrated force is applied at a distance to the end of

the element greater than the depth of the element, the nominal resistance is
given by:
= 5 +
= 1.00
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, B-5)
Also considering that includes the thickness of the doubler plates.

N is the length of bearing that in our case corresponds to the thickness of the
flange of the beam, = 22 . However, the value of N cannot be less than
for beam end reactions, so it is used = = 30 . Resulting in:
= 3477
Web Crippling

from the end of the member greater than half of the depth of the column, the
nominal resistance is:
= 0.802 1 + 3
1.5
= 0.75
Then, considering = 22 ,
= 15064
6-122
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, B-7)

member, so in this case (a exterior connection), this limit does not apply.
Then, the force of design for the continuity plates is given by:
= 3994 1347 = 2647
Then, the design force increases but does not control the design.
3.
Welding of the continuity plate
According to NCh2369.Of2003 (B3.4, B4.2 and B5.2), the continuity plate to

the stiffener. The continuity plate-to-web welding shall be dimensioned to
Note: As seen, the previous provisions are quite similar to AISC provisions.
Plates of Chapter 6.
Additional requirements of appendix B of NCh2369.Of2003:
According to the provisions of section B7.1 of NCh2369.Of2003:
The width of each continuity plate plus one half of the column web shall be
greater than one third of the width of the flange of the column or plate of
moment connection that delivers the concentrated load:
= 200 >
= 166
OK
The thickness of the continuity plate shall be greater than the thickness of the
flange of the beam or the flange that transmit the concentrated force and
greater than its own width multiplied by /250, with in MPa:
= 25 > = 22
= 25 >
2 250
= 12.7
OK
OK
6-123
Then, the only change is the thickness of the doubler plates.
CJP
Contuinity plate t = 25 mm
PL t = 12 mm
10
10
H500X300X132,3
H500X350X165,6
6.5-7 Designed connection considering additional criteria of NCh2369Of.2003.
6-124
6.6.
Welded Connection Commentary for Continuity Plates and

Doubler Plates
6.6.a.
Welded unions of the continuity plates
There are many solutions for the detailing of continuity plates welding. No
specific design will be shown; but some requirements and information tips are
listed down.
1.
Tension stiffeners
According to AISC360-05, Section J10.9; the welds of the continuity plates to

the flanges shall be sized for the difference between the required strength and
the applicable limit state strength ( ). The stiffener to web welds shall be
sized to transfer to the web the algebraic difference in tensile force at the ends
of the stiffener.
2.
Compression stiffeners
According to AISC360-05, Section J10.9; the welds of the continuity plates to

the flange shall be sized for the difference between the required strength and
the applicable limit state strength ( ). The weld to the web shall be sized to
transfer to the web the algebraic difference in compression force at the ends of
the stiffener.
As said on AISC341-05, Section 7.5; corners of continuity plates placed in the
webs of rolled shapes shall be clipped according to the following figure (for
avoid welding into k-area of rolled shapes):
6-125
Figure 6.6-1: Configuration of Continuity Plates.

Taken from AISC341-05 Commentary, Figure C-I-7.2
At the end of weld adjacent to the column web/flange juncture, weld tabs for
continuity plates shall not be used, except when permitted by the engineer of
record. Unless specified by the engineer of record that they be removed, weld
tabs shall not be removed when used in this location.
As said on AISC358-05, Section 2.4.4b; continuity plates shall be CJP groove
welded to column flanges. The weld between the continuity plate and the
column web shall be CJP groove weld or fillet weld. The required strength of
the sum of the welded joints of the continuity plates to the column web shall
be the smallest of:
6-126
a)
b)
c)
d)
The sum of the design strengths in tension of the contact areas of the
continuity plates to the column flanges that have attached beam
flanges.
The design strength in shear of the contact area of the plate with the
column web
The design strength in shear of the column panel zone
The sum of the expected yield strengths of the beam flanges
transmitting force to the continuity plates.
For seeing examples of different welding configurations for the continuity

plates (to column flanges and at their ends), refer to Section 4.3 of AISC
Design Guide # 13. Also see Ch. 6 (Design Examples).
6.6.b.
Welded unions of the doubler plates
There are many solutions for the detailing of doubler plates welding. No
specific design will be shown; but some requirements and information tips are
listed down.
As said on the commentary of AISC341-05, when web doubler plates extend
between the continuity plates, they may be welded directly to the column
flanges and continuity plates. The welded joint between the doubler-plate and
the column web is required to be configured to transmit the proportionated
load from the continuity plate to each element of the panel zone.
For the doubler-plate to column flange connection, the commentary of
AISC341-05 says that it is anticipated that the panel zone will yield in a
seismic event, and the webs connecting the web doubler plate to the column
flanges are required to be sized to develop the shear strength of the full web
doubler plate thickness. The possible configurations (CJP groove welds of fillet
welds) are shown on the next figure. Note that the column fillet radius and the
plate thickness should be considered before selecting the fillet-welded joint.
6-127
Figure 6.6-2: Web doubler plates.

Taken from AISC341-05 Commentary, Figure C-I-9.3
For seeing examples of different welding configurations for the doubler plates
(to column flanges and at their ends), refer to Section 4.4 of AISC Design
Guide # 13. Also consult Ch.6 (Design Examples).
References:
6-128
Carter, 1999, AISC Design Guide 13: Stiffening of Wide Flange

Columns
at
Moment
Connections:
Wind
and
Seismic
Applications. American Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago
IL.
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
7. COLUMN SPLICES
7.1.
Bolted Column Splice for SCBF
7.1.a.
Connection design requirements
1.
NCh2369.Of2003
Use high strength bolts (ASTM A325 or ASTM A490)

(Re.NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.1)

connection.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.6)
For column splices, meet the following:

(Re.NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.9)
- In buildings, the minimum distance between the splice of the
columns and the top flange of the lower beam must be equal or larger
than the lesser value between 900 mm and half of the clear height
( ) of the column.
- Splices must be dimensioned for the design forces obtained from the
load combinations (NCh2369.Of2003, 4.5) in which the earthquake
must be amplified by 2.0.
2.
AISC 341-05
General requirements:
(Re.8.4, AISC 341-05)
The required strength of a column splice in the seismic load resisting

system (SLRS) shall be equal to the required strength of the columns,
including those calculated from sections 8.3, 9.9, 10.9, 11.9, 13.5 and
16.5b.
7-1
In column bolted splices of SMF, plates or channels shall be used on

both sides of the web.
Location of column splices: the center line of the splice for column
splices made with fillet welds of PJP groove welds shall be located
1200 mm or more away from the beam-to-column connection. When
column clear height between beam-to-column connections is less than
2400 mm, splices shall be located at half the clear height.
Specific requirements (SCBF systems):

(Re.13.5, AISC 341-05)
For SCBF systems: In addition to meeting the requirements of section 8.4,
column splices in SCBF shall be designed to develop 50% of the lesser
available flexural strength of the connected members. The required shear
strength of column web splices shall be at least equal to
/(LRFD)
or /1.5 (ASD), as appropriate, where
is the sum of nominal plastic
flexural strengths of the column above and below the splice.

Most stringent conditions between these two codes will be used for the
determination of the design forces (M, V and N).
7.1.b.
Example
Design an all bolted column splice for a special concentrically braced frame for
the connection shown in Figure 7.1-1 and Figure 7.1-2. Use A250 ESP steel,
required for constructions subjected to dynamic loading, according to
NCh203.Of2006 code, Table 3.
The upper and the lower columns are Chilean H350X350X175.1 built-up
sections. Assume that the column clear height is =3700 mm. The columns
have been designed for resisting the forces given by the load combinations of
the applicable building code (including the seismic load) and the ends are not
prepared for full contact in bearing. Suppose that the loads on the columns
are:
= 290 , = 45 , = 200
= 50 , = 20 , = 60
= 50000 , = 30000 , = 60000
7-2
General view of the connection:

tf
web plate
g
gap
Outter
flange
plate
Inner
flange
plate
tw
d
Figure 7.1-1: Connection to be designed. Frontal and lateral view.

Column Section
b1
t1
t2
b3
tf
t3
b2
bf
Figure 7.1-2: Connection to be designed. Column section.
7-3
1.
Sections and Materials properties
H350X350X175.1
= 350 , = 350 , = 25 , = 16 , = 8
= 22300 2 , = 3204000 3 , = 150 , = 89.5 , = 4090000 4
A250 ESP:
= 250 , = 400 , = 200000
BOLTS: ASTM A490, threads included in the shear planes, STD holes
= 780 ,
= 414
2.
Design forces
Required axial strength:

Use the combinations of NCh2369.Of2003 code, section 4.5b):
i.
1.2D+1.0L 1.1E, but the E term must be amplified by 2.0, according

to NCh2369.Of 2003, 8.5.9; therefore the combination used is: 1.2D
+1.0L2.2E.
ii.
0.9D1.1E, but the E term must be amplified by 2.0, according to

NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.9; therefore the combination used is:
0.9D2.2E.
Therefore, calculate the maximum compressive force (when E term is being

added) for the first load combination and the maximum tensile force (when E
is being subtracted) for these load combinations.
= 833 (Compression).
= 179 (Tension).
According to AISC 341-05, section 8.3, if
> 0.4, without the consideration
of the amplified seismic load, the required axial and tensile strength should
take into account the 0 factor on the load combinations given by the
applicable building code. In this case, the NCh2369.Of2003, has mandatorily
7-4
amplified the earthquake E term by a 2.0 factor, so it is not necessary to do

this check for determine the most stringent condition between these two codes.
Then:
= 833 (Compression)
= 179 (Tension)
Required flexural strength
From NCh2369.Of2003 load combinations (using absolute values):
M1 = max 1.2 + 1.0 + 2.2 ; 0.9 + 2.2 = 222000
In order to comply with AISC 341-05, section 13.5; use 50% of the column
nominal strength . Suppose that the column reaches its plastic capacity
( = = = 801000 ).
Then
2 = 0.5 = 0.5 = 400500
Using as the required moment, the most stringent between NCh2369.Of2003
and AISC 341-05 conditions:
= max 1 , 2 = 400500
Tips:
i.
Note that = 50% > = 1 at the splice location and this

condition meets the requirements of AISC 341-05 (see 8.4 comments
of the code). = 1 is obtained according to NCh2369.Of2003.
ii.
The 100% of (the column strength capacity is always larger than

) could be used for the design of this splice. This is recommendable
for a quick design in a design stage where splice locations are not
defined and the loads are not well known.
Required shear strength

1 = max 1.2 + 1.0 + 2.2 ; 0.9 + 2.2 = 212
7-5
Using AISC 341-05, the lower and the upper column are the same, hence:
2 2
=
= = 801000
V2 =
Therefore, using the most stringent condition between NCh2369.Of2003 and

AISC 341-05:
= max V1 , V 2 = 433
Tips:
i.
Note that =
> = 1 at the splice location and this condition
meets the requirements of AISC 341-05 (see 8.4 comments of the

code). = 1 is obtained according to NCh2369.Of2003.
ii.
It is possible to do a more conservative design using > but

checking always that > =
3.
Forces transferred by the splice
All the forces, including the axial forces (compression) or (tension),

are transferred from the upper shaft to the lower shaft via the bolted splice
plates.
M
M
V
V
Compresion Case
Tension Case
P1
P2
P3
T1
T2
T3
Figure 7.1-3: Forces transferred by the splice.

Compression case and tension case.
7-6
Suppose that the required shear force ( ) will be transferred entirely by the
web splice plate.
Compressive axial force case:
It is assumed that the moment is resisted entirely by the flange splices, and
that the axial load is distributed among the web and flange splices
proportionately to the relative areas.
1,2 =
3 =
(Axial forces transferred through the flanges).
(Axial force transferred through the web).
Tensile axial force case:

Same as above:
1,2 =
3 =
(Axial forces transferred through the flanges).
(Axial force transferred through the web).
With = the area of one flange of the column shape and the total area
of the column shape.
Tips:
i.
ii.
There are other ways of distributing forces. You can use any
reasonable way.
The maximum compression and tension cases on flanges and the
compression and tension cases on the web shall be checked.
7-7
Calculations give the following results (convention is positive for compression

and negative for tension):
5.a.-Compression case
P1 REQ (kN)
1559
P2 REQ (kN)
-905
P3 REQ (kN)
179
5.b.-Tension case
T1 REQ (kN)
1162
T2 REQ (kN)
-1303
T3 REQ (Kn)
-39
Table 7.1-1: Forces transferred by the splices. Refer to Figure 7.1-3

Therefore, the maximum forces to be transferred are:
Through flanges:
= 1559 , = 1303
Through web:
= 179 , = 39 , = 433
On each flange, these flange forces will be transferred by an inner flange splice
plate (total area of the two plates is = 22 2 ) and by an outer splice flange
plate (total area of = 1 1 ). Hence, divide the flange forces using the same
concept of relative areas as shown before.
On the web, there is a symmetrical distribution of web plates at each side
(each plate with area = 3 3 ), so the forces in the web will be simply
divided by 2.
Tip:
Note that as the connection to be designed is a not-bearing type, axial
compression forces need to be transferred by the splice plates, leading to a
larger amount of bolts and dimensions of plates that if the connection is
designed as a bearing type one (for bearing strength between surfaces in
contact, see AISC 360-05 Specification, J7).
7-8
4.
Design of web splice

= 179 , = 39 , = 433
Web bolts:
Calculate the maximum force on a bolt for eccentric shear and axial force (see
Figure 7.1-4).
= 433 , max , = 179
Try M24 bolts, =8 bolts and = 2 rows. Number of bolts per row =4.
Place the bolts at = , = , = , = the web
plate section dimensions (both plates are equal) are:
3 = 24 + 2 = 200 , use 3 = 10
b3
e4
e2
e4
e3
e1
e1
y
x
e1
e3
g
Py
Px
Figure 7.1-4: Bolts positions on web splice plate. Bolt A has the larger load.
Use a gap = . Therefore, using the midline of the gap, the distance from
the line of action of to the gravity center of the bolts arrangement is
= + 3 + 1.51 = 152.5 . Use the classical elastic method for the analysis of
2
the eccentric shear bolted connection.
7-9
= number of bolts = 8.
=
= 90
2
= 217
2
The eccentric shear is analyzed on one of the web plates.

V
F/2 F/2
F
V
Figure 7.1-5: Forces scheme on the web splice. Frontal and lateral view.
= = 33014
2 =
Considering the critical bolt:
2 + 2 = 69000 2
2
2
= 1.51
=
The required force to be transferred by bolt A is:

0
+
= 35
2
0
=
+
= 77
7-10
2
2
+
= 85
Bolts check:
Slip critical failure
For conservative calculations, use for slip-critical connection type check, class
A surface ( = 0.35), and for bearing type connections, consider threads
included on the shear plane.
(Per bolt)
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J3-4)

Use =0.85 (LRFD, connection designed to prevent slip at required strengthlevel), =0.35 (class A surface), =1.13, =1.0 (standard holes), =257
kN (AISC 360-05, Table J3.1M for M24, ASTM A490 bolts) = Number of
slip planes = 1.0.
Therefore:
= 86
> = 85
OK
Note:
It is not an obligation to do the slip critical connection check in bolted connections.
If it is desired to have a rigid connection, slip critical check is recommended. In
this example, we will follow the design with the number of bolts obtained from the
slip critical check.

= 2.4 = 230
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J3-6a)
Use =0.75 (LRFD), = ( , 3 ) = 10 , = 400 ,

diameter = 24 mm.
= 85 < = 173
=nominal bolt
OK
Single shear on bolts:
For single shear on the most loaded bolt, check the following:
7-11
, = 0.75
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3.6)
Use = 452 2 corresponding to M24 bolts to obtain:
OK
= 85 = 140
Web splice plate:
Dimensions from above:
Width = ,
Thickness
= ,
Length
= + 2 31 + 23 =
Compressive force:
= 179
The maximum free length is: 23 + = 95 = 95

Using AISC 360-05, section J4.4:
= 32.91 < 4.71
3
3
3
12
3 3
= 2.89
= 32.91 > 25 Use Ch. E.
= 133 , therefore with =
2
2
= 1823 :
= 0.658 = 236
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. E7-2)
= 0.9 = 0.9 3 3 = 425 >
= 90
OK
Tensile Yielding on splice plate:

= 0.9 = 0.9 3 3 = 450 > =
39
2
= 20
OK
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J4-1)
7-12
Tensile rupture on splice plate:

= 0.75
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J4-2)
For bolted splice plates, = 0.85
(Re. AISC 360-05, D3.2)

= 23
= 27 + 2 = 29
= 1420 2 0.85 = 1700 2
= 426 >
OK
= 20
Block Shear Strength on splice plate:

(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J4-5)
= 0.6 + 0.6 +
= 0.75, = 1.0
e2
e3
e1
e1
e1
T
Figure 7.1-6: Block shear for web splice plate.
= 23 31 + 3 = 5600 2
= 7 3 = 3070 2
= 2 3 3 = 710 2
= 1020 1049 = 766 >
= 20
OK
Shear yielding of the splice plate:

= 1.0 0.6 = 300 >
= 217
OK
7-13
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J4-3)
Shear rupture of the splice plate:

= 0.75 0.6
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J4-4)
= 3 3 2 3 = 1420 2
= 256 >
(Net area subject to shear)
= 217
OK
Combined shear-tension interaction
The required condition is:

/2
/2
1.0
With
= 179 , = 433
= 0.9 = 0.9 3 3 = 450
= 0.6 = 300
Then:
5.
= 0.31 1.0
Design of flange splice

= 1559 , = 1303
Flange bolts:
Split the forces according to the areas of inner and outer plates:
Try the following dimensions:
Outer Plate (1PL): 1 = 340, 1 = 12 . Therefore = =
Inner Plates (2PL): 2 = 150, 2 = 12 . Therefore = =
7-14
OK
Forces on outer plate:

1
= 828
1 + 22
1
=
= 692
1 + 22
=
Forces on the inner plates (for the plates):

22
= 731
1 + 22
22
=
= 611
1 + 22
Bolts design:
Verify the shear on connection for friction type and bearing type failure. Try
M20, ASTM A490 bolts.
Slip critical failure

=
(Per bolt)
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J3-4)
Use =0.85 (LRFD, connection designed to prevent slip at required strengthlevel), =0.35 (class A surface), =1.13, =1.0 (standard holes), =179kN
(AISC 360-05, Table J3.1M for M20, ASTM A490 bolts) = Number of slip
planes = 1.0.
Therefore:
= 60
max ,

= 13.75. Use = bolts in = rows.
(Number of bolts per row, = ).

Note:
7-15
Single shear on bolts
For single shear on bolts, use max , . Therefore:

max , = 828 , = 0.75
(Re. AISC 360-05, J3.6)
Use =16 bolts, = 314 2 corresponding to M20 bolts to obtain:
= 1561 > 828
OK
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J3-6a)
= 1.2 2.4 = 230
Use = 0.75 (LRFD), = clear distance in the direction of the force, between
= (1 , 2 , ) = 12 , = 400 , =nominal bolt diameter = 20 mm.
Place the bolts:
Try:
1 = 65 , 2 = 60 , 3 = 40 , 4 = 45 ,
5 = 1 22 24 = 130 .
7-16
bf
tw
b2
b2
e3
e1
e1
e1
e4
e4
e3
e4 e2
e5
e2 e4
b1
Figure 7.1-7: Bolt positions for flange splice.
Edge bolts: = 3
22
2
= 29 = 1.2 = 167
Interior bolts: = 1 22 = 43 = 1.2 = 247
= 230
Note: The diameter of the standard hole for the bolt M20 is 22mm. See AISC
360-05, table J3.3M.
Considering all the bolts:
= 0.75 4 167 + 12 230 = 2575 > max ,
OK
7-17
Flange plates:
Flange inner plate

Inner
Plates
(2PL):
= , = .
Therefore
= =
, = + + = .
Compressive force:

Per each one of the inner plates:
= 365

3
22
12
2 2
= 3.46
= 24.54 < 25 use Ch. J
= 0.9 = 405 >
OK
Tensile force:
Per each one of the inner plates:
= 305

= 0.9 = 0.9 2 2 = 405 >
= 305
OK
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J4-1)

= 0.75
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J4-2)

(Re. AISC 360-05, D3.2)
= 22
= 22 + 2 = 24
7-18
= 1224 2 0.85 = 1530 2

= 367 >
OK
= 305

(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J4-5)
= 0.6 + 0.6 + ,
= 0.75, = 1.0
e2
e3
e1
e1
e1
T
Figure 7.1-8: Block shear for inner flange plates.
= 22 31 + 3
= 5640
= 7 2 = 3624
2
= 2 2 2 = 432
= 1043 > 1019 = 764 >
= 305
Flange outer plate

Outer
Plate
(1PL):
= , = .
Therefore
= =
, = = .
-
Compressive force:
= 828
7-19
3
11
12
1 1
= 3.46
= 24.54 < 25 use Ch. J

OK
= 0.9 = 918 > = 828

-
Tensile force:
= 692

= 0.9 = 0.9 1 1 = 918 > = 692
OK
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J4-1)

-

= 0.75
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J4-2)

(Re. AISC 360-05, D3.2)
= 41
= 22 + 2 = 24
= 2928 2 0.85 = 3468 2
OK
= 878 > = 692

-

(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J4-5)
= 0.6 + 0.6 +
= 0.75, = 1.0
7-20
e3
e1
e1
e1
T
2e 2 + e5
Figure 7.1-9: Block shear for outer flange plate.

2
= 21 31 + 3 = 5640
= 7 1 = 3624
= 22 + 5 1 3 1 = 2136
= 1724 > 1700 = 1275 > = 692
OK
7-21
7.1.c.
Designed connection
Locate the center of the splice at 1.5 m from the top flange of the bottom
beam.
H 350x350x175.1
A
A-A Section
16 M24 ASTM A490
(gap)
PL 200x605x8mm
32 M20 ASTM A490
PL 340x425x12mm
2PL 150x425x12mm
Final tips:
i.
If the upper column and the lower column of the splice were of
different sizes (specially different heights), filler plates would be
needed for the correct positioning of the flange cover plates.
ii.
The approximation done in this example, for considering that the

bending moment is completely transferred through the flanges of the
column, is not far away from reality. Note that also it has been made
an approximation for the distribution of axial forces, according to
their relative areas principle. Any other reasonable principle or model
for the distribution of forces could be used.
7-22
7.2.
Bolted Column Splice for SMF
7.2.a.
1.
NCh2369.Of2003:
Use high strength bolts (ASTM A325 or ASTM A490)

(Re. NCh2369.Of 2003, 8.5.1)

connection.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.6)
For column splices, accomplish the following instructions:
2.
(Re. NCh2369.Of 2003, 8.5.9)
In buildings, the minimum distance between the splice of the

columns and the top flange of the lower beam must be equal or
larger than the lesser value between 900 mm and half of the clear
height ( ) of the column.
Splices must be dimensioned for the design forces obtained from
the load combinations (NCh2369.Of2003, 4.5) in which the
earthquake must be amplified by 2.0.
AISC 341-05:
(Re. 8.4, AISC 341-05)

16.5b.
In column bolted splices of SMF, plates or channels shall be used on
both sides of the web.
7-23
Location of column splices: the centerline of the splice for column

splices made with fillet welds of PJP groove welds shall be located
1200 mm or more away from the beam-to-column connection. When
column clear height between beam-to-column connections is less than
2400 mm, splices shall be located at half the clear height.
Specific requirements (SMF systems):

(Re. 9.9, AISC 341-05)
For SMF systems: When column splices are not made with groove welds, they
shall have a required flexural strength that is at least equal to R y Fy Zx (LRFD) or
R y Fy Zx /1.5 (ASD), as appropriate, of the smaller column. The required shear
strength of column web splices shall be at least equal to
/1.5 (ASD), as appropriate, where
/ (LRFD) or
is the sum of nominal plastic
flexural strengths of the column above and below the splice.
7.2.b.
Example
The design procedure for this column splice is the same shown in example 7.1.
In this example, the difference is only in the design forces between SMF
systems (more stringent design moments in AISC 341-05) in comparison with
SCBF systems, because in SMF systems the columns resist bigger moments
especially due to earthquake action. Refer to example 7.1 for the design
procedure of a general column splice.
7-24
7.3.
Welded Column Splice for SCBF
7.3.a.
1.
NCh2369.Of2003
See NCh2369.Of2003, section 8.5.1 for electrode requirements.

Groove welds in seismic-resistant unions must be of CJP type.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.5)
For column splices, meet the following:

(Re. NCh2369.Of 2003, 8.5.9)
( ) of the column.
- Splices must be dimensioned for the design forces obtained from the
load combinations (NCh2369.Of2003, point 4.5), in which the
earthquake load must be amplified by 2.0.
2.
AISC 341-05
(Re. 8.4, AISC 341-05)

16.5b.
In addition to the previous point, welded column splices that are
subjected to a calculated net tensile load effect, calculated using the
load combinations stipulated by the applicable building code
(including the amplified seismic load), shall meet the following
requirements:
- For PJP groove welds, the available strength shall at least equal to
200% the required strength.
7-25
- The available strength of each flange splice shall be at least

0.5 (LRFD) or 0.5 /1.5 (ASD).
Note that according to AISC 341 Commentary, a CJP groove weld may
be considered as satisfying this previous requirement.
The centerline of the splice for column splices made with fillet welds
or PJP groove welds shall be located 1200 mm or more away from the
beam-to-column connection. When the column clear height between
beam-to-column connections is less than 2400 mm, splices shall be
located at half the clear height.
Specific requirements (SCBF systems):
For SCBF systems: In addition to meeting the requirements of

section 8.4, column splices in SBCF shall be designed to develop 50%
of the lesser available flexural strength of the connected members.
The required shear strength of column web splices , shall be at least
equal to / (LRFD) or /1.5 (ASD), as appropriate, where
is the sum of nominal plastic flexural strengths of the column
above and below the splice.
Most stringent conditions between these two codes will be used for the
determination of the design forces (M, V and N).
7.3.b.
Example
Design a fully welded column splice for a special concentrically braced frame
for the connection shown in Figure 7.3-1. Use A250 ESP steel, required for
constructions subjected to dynamic loading, according to NCh203.Of2006
code, Table 3. Use E70 electrodes for welded connections.
The upper and the lower columns are Chilean H 350 X 350 X 175.1 built-up
sections. Assume that the clear height of the column is =3700 mm. The
columns have been designed for resisting the forces given by the load
combinations of the applicable building code (including the seismic load).
Suppose that the loads on the columns are:
= 290 , = 45 , = 200
= 50 , = 20 , = 60
7-26
= 50000 , = 30000 , = 60000

d
tf
Design a welded splice
Figure 7.3-1: Connection to be designed. Frontal and lateral view.

1.
Sections and materials properties
H350 X 350 X 175.1

= 350 , = 350 , = 25 , = 16 , = 8
= 22300 2 , = 3204000 3 , = 150 , = 89.5 , = 4090000 4
A250 ESP:
(Re. Table 3, NCh203Of.2003)
= 250 , = 400 , = 200000
WELDS: 70 ksi electrode, = 480 MPa
2.
Design forces
Required axial strength:

Use the combinations of NCh2369 code, section 4.5b):
7-27
i.
1.2D + 1.0L 1.1E, but the E term shall be amplified by 2.0,

according to NCh2369.Of 2003, 8.5.9; therefore the combination used
is: 1.2D + 1.0L 2.2E.
ii.
0.9D 1.1E, but the E term shall be amplified by 2.0, according to

NCh2369.Of 2003, 8.5.9; therefore the combination used is: 0.9D
2.2E.
Therefore, calculate the maximum compressive force (when E term is being

added) for the first load combination and the maximum tensile force (when E
is being subtracted) for the second load combination.
= 833 (Compression).
= 179 (Tension).
According to AISC 341-05, section 8.3, if
> 0.4, without the consideration
of the amplified seismic load, the required axial and tensile strength should
take into account the 0 factor on the load combinations given by the
applicable building code. In this case, the NCh2369.Of2003, has mandatorily
amplified the earthquake E term by a 2.0 factor, so it is not necessary to do
this check for determine the most stringent condition between these two codes.
Then:
= 833 (Compression)
= 179 (Tension)
Note that an axial net tensile load of one combination has been obtained,
considering the amplified seismic load. According to AISC 341-05 code, if
groove welds are used for the splice, the condition of having an available
strength of each flange splice at least of 0.5 (LRFD) is immediately OK.
Required flexural strength
M1 = max 1.2 + 1.0 + 2.2 ; 0.9 + 2.2 = 222000
In order to accomplish AISC 341-05, section 13.5; use 50% of the column
nominal strength . Suppose that the column reaches its plastic capacity
( = = = 801000 ).
7-28
Then
2 = 0.5 = 0.5 = 400500
Using as the required moment, the most stringent between NCh2369.Of2003
and AISC 341-05 conditions:
= max 1 , 2 = 400500
Tips:
iii.
Note that = 50% > = 1 at the splice location and this

condition meets the requirements of AISC 341-05 (see 8.4 comments
of the code). = 1 is obtained according to NCh2369.Of2003.
iv.
The 100% of (the column strength capacity is always larger than

) could be used for the design of this splice. This is recommendable
for a quick design in a design stage where splice locations are not
defined and the loads are not well known.
Required shear strength

1 = max 1.2 + 1.0 + 2.2 ; 0.9 + 2.2 = 212
Using AISC 341-05, the lower and the upper column are the same, hence:
2 2
=
= = 801000
V2 =
Therefore, using the most stringent condition between NCh2369.Of2003 and

AISC 341-05:
= max V1 , V 2 = 433
Tips:
i.
Note that =
> = 1 at the splice location and this condition
meets the requirements of AISC 341-05 (see 8.4 comments of the

code). = 1 is obtained according to NCh2369.Of2003.
ii.
It is possible to do a more conservative design using > but

checking always that > =
7-29
3.
Welds used
As said before, try CJP groove welds for splice webs and flanges.
4.
Check the shear strength for the splice
Assume that the shear force is transferred completely by the web CJP weld
splice. Use weld access holes with a height of 2.0 =32 mm (comply with
recommendations of AISC 360-05, Section J1.6 and Chilean practice) and
depth equal to 25 mm.
For CJP groove welds subjected to shear force, according to AISC 360-05
Table J2.5, the strength of the joint is controlled by the base metal (web
metal). Therefore, according to AISC 360-05 section J4:
Shear yielding:
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J4-3)
= 1.0 0.6 = 0.6 ( 2 64 ) = 566 > = 433
OK
Shear rupture:
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J4-4)
= 0.75 0.6 = 0.6 2 64 = 680 > = 433
5.
OK
Check the axial strength of the splice
It has been assumed that the column sections are designed for the loads given
by NCh2369.Of2003 load combinations. Therefore the sections can resist
= 179 (tension) and also = 833
(compression). CJP
groove welds are capable of developing (). OK
6.
Check the flexural strength of the splice
Assume that the moment is taken entirely by the flanges of the columns,
therefore the required force on each one will be:
=
= 1232

For CJP groove welds subjected to tension force normal to weld axis, according
to AISC 360-05 Table J2.5, the strength of the joint is controlled by the base
metal (flange metal). Therefore, according to AISC 360-05 section J4:
7-30
Tensile yielding:
= 0.9 = 0.9 = 1969 >
OK
= 0.75 = 0.75 = 2625 >
OK
Tensile rupture:
7.
Filler metal requirements
From AISC 360-05 J2.6 section, for A250 ESP steel (similar to ASTM A36) a 70
ksi electrode can be used. The complete information for matching filler metals
for CJP groove welds subjected to tension normal to weld axis is given in AWS
D1.1. The filler metal must also comply with AISC 341-05 Seismic Provisions,
section 7.3.
7.3.c.
Designed connection
Locate the center of the splice at 1.5 m from the top flange of the bottom
beam. The geometry of the access holes is shown on the following figure:
Upper Column
25mm
2,0 tw
Lower Column
CJP
Note: The radius must give a soft transition. Use R > 10mm
Figure 7.3-1: Connection Designed. E70 electrodes are used.
7-31
Notes and final tips:

i.
There are other (welded) solutions instead the one presented in this
example (CJP groove welds for web and flanges). For example, it is
possible to use a welded web plate for transferring the required
shear. Note that according to NCh2369.Of2003, if groove welds are
used; they shall be CJP type.
ii.
Note that this type of solution for the column splice is not very
popular in seismic areas because it is a field welded connection. It is
preferable to use a bolted connection or a shop welded connection.
7-32
7.4.
Welded Column Splice for SMF
7.4.a.
1.
NCh2369.Of2003
See NCh2369.Of2003, section 8.5.1 for electrode requirements.

Groove welds in seismic-resistant unions must be of CJP type.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.5)
For column splices, comply the following instructions:

(Re. NCh2369.Of 2003, 8.5.9)
( ) of the column.
- The splices must be dimensioned for the design forces obtained from
load combinations of the Code (NCh2369.Of2003, point 4.5), in which
the earthquake load must be amplified by 2.0.
2.
AISC 341-05
(Re. 8.4, AISC 341-05)
The required strength of the column splice in the seismic load

resisting system (SLRS) shall equal the required strength of the
columns, including those calculated from sections 8.3, 9.9, 10.9,
11.9, 13.5 and 16.5b.
In addition to the previous point, welded column splices that are

subjected to a calculated net tensile load effect, calculated using the
load combinations stipulated by the applicable building code including
the amplified seismic load, shall meet the following requirements:
- For PJP groove welds, the available strength shall at least equal to
200% the required strength.
7-33
- The available strength of each flange splice shall be at least of

0.5 (LRFD) or 0.5 /1.5 (ASD).
Note that according to AISC 341 Commentary, a CJP groove weld may
be considered as satisfying this previous requirement.
The centerline of the splice for column splices made with fillet welds
or PJP groove welds shall be located 1200 mm or more away from the
beam-to-column connection. When the column clear height between
beam-to-column connections is less than 2400 Mm, splices shall be
located at half the clear height.
Specific requirements (SMF systems):
For SMF systems: Column splices must comply with the requirements
of section 8.4a. Where groove welds are used to make the splice,
they shall be CJP type and must comply with the requirements of
section 7.3b. Weld tabs shall be removed. When column splices are
not made with CJP welds, they shall have a required flexural strength
of (LRFD) or /1.5 (ASD), as appropriate, of the smaller
column. The required shear strength of column web splices, shall be
at least equal to / (LRFD) or /1.5 (ASD), as appropriate,
where
is the sum of nominal plastic flexural strengths of the
column above and below the splice.
7.4.b.
The design procedure for this column splice is the same shown in example 7.3.
In this example, the difference is only in the design forces between SMF
systems (more stringent design moments from AISC 341-05) in comparison
with SCBF systems, because in SMF systems the columns resist bigger
moments especially due to earthquake action. Refer to example 7.3 for the
design procedure of a general welded column splice.
7-34
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
8. BEAM SPLICES
8.1.
Beam Parallel Splice All Bolted Splice Plates
8.1.a.
Design requirements
1.
2.
NCh2369.Of2003
Use high strength bolts (ASTM A325 or ASTM A490).

(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.1)

connection.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.6)
AISC 341
There are no specific provisions for the design of beam splices.

3.
AISC 360
(Re. AISC360-05, J6)
For beam splices:
Groove welded splices: shall develop the nominal strength of the

smaller spliced section.
Other type of splices: shall develop the strength required by forces at
the point of the splice (on the center of gravity of the bolts).
Tip:
(Re. AISC Manual of Steel Construction, chapter 12).
It is convenient to design for a minimum value of the available strength of the
beam section. This is because, since load application and frequency of
application can change during the lifetime of the structure, it is prudent for the
designer to specify some minimum strength requirement at the splice. This
previous statement is also based on the fact that the inflection points (many
splices are located at or near inflection points, zero moment) can change
during an earthquake, and therefore, actual forces could differ significantly
from those assumed.
8-1
Some authors recommend design for at least 50% of the member capacity
(0.5 and 0.5 ), but always check that the design forces are larger than
and from load combinations.
8.1.b.
Example
Design the connection of the all bolted beam splice shown in Figures 8.1-1 and
8.1-2. Use A345 ESP steel, required for constructions subjected to dynamical
loading, according to NCh203.Of2006 code, Table 3.
Both beams are Chilean H450 x 200 x 112.7 built-up sections. Use standard
holes for bolts. Suppose that the beams have been properly designed for
code (including seismic load). These loads, at the location of the splice, are:
= 523000 ,
= 265 , = 0
Suppose that the splice location has been defined previously (many factors
affect the location of beam splices, such as the length of the members limited
by the transportation, or by the capacity of the assembly equipment).
Figure 8.1-1: Connection to be designed. Frontal and Lateral View.
8-2
b1
t1
t2
b2
b2
b3
t3
Figure 8.1-2: Connection to be designed. Beam Section.

1.
Section and Material Properties
H450 x 200 x 112.7

= 450 , = 200 , = 28 , = 8 , = 5
= 14352 2 , = 2674000 3 , = 194 , = 51 , = 3000000 4
A345 ESP:
= 345 , = 450
= 780 ,
= 414
2.
Design Forces
Use conservatively the total capacity of the beam for the shear force and
moment. Assume that the section reaches the plastic capacity. Therefore:
= = 1.0 0.6 = 1.0 0.6 = 745 >
= = 0.9 = 830277 >
Tip:
Note that these design forces are meeting the requirements of AISC360-05
code, J6 section. This is because always > and > . and are
8-3
obtained from the applicable building code load combination; in this case,
NCh2369.Of2003.
The choice of the percentage of the members capacity, in order to calculate
and could be discussed with a seismic reviewer. In a previous design
stage, where the final location of the splice is not well known, it is conservative
to use 100% of the member capacity for the design forces.
Forces transferred by the splice:
Assume that the shear is completely transferred by the web plates, and that
the moment is completely transferred by the flanges, with a couple of tension
and compression forces.
Then, the design forces for the splice are:
= 745
=
(Web splice)
= 1967
(Flange splices)
Tip:
If there is also axial force acting on the beam (neglected in this example), it
should be divided, according to a relative areas principle, among the flanges
and web. A common assumption is that flanges also carry the entire axial load.
3.
Design of the web splice
Tip:
It is always preferable the use of 2 identical web plates at each side of the
beams web, because with this, a symmetrical distribution of shear force in the
plane of the beam web is obtained, the bolts are subjected to double shear
and therefore it is possible to reduce the number of bolts in the connection and
the inherent eccentricity out of the plane.
= 745
Web bolts:
Try M24 bolts. Try = 9 bolts, and = 3 rows. Number of bolts per row:
= 3.Place the bolts:1 = 80 , 2 = 120 , 3 = 45 , 4 = 50 . Then, the
web plate dimensions are:
3 = 22 + 24 = 340 , use 3 = 8 .
8-4
e4
e2
y
V
b3
req
e2
e4
e3
e1
e1
e3
Figure 8.1-3: Bolts positions on the web plate. Bolt A has the larger load.
Suppose a gap between the two parts of the connected beam = . Using
the midline of the gap, the distance from the line of action of to the center
of gravity of the arrangement of bolts is = + 3 + 1 = 127.5 . Use the

2
classical method (elastic) for the analysis of the eccentric shear bolted
connection.
= 0
=
= 373
2
Shear is analyzed in one of the web plates.
0 = = 47507
2 =
2 + 2 = 124800 2
Considering the critical bolt ( = 1 , = 2 ), the required force to be

transferred by bolt A is:
=
0
+
= 46
0
+
= 72
2
2
+
= 85
8-5
Bolts check:
For conservative calculations, use for slip-critical connection type check, class
A surface ( = 0.35), and for bearing type connections, consider threads
included in the shear plane.
(Per bolt)
(Re. AISC360-05, Eq. J3.4)

Use =0.85 (connection designed to prevent slip at required strength level),
=0.35 (class A surface), =1.13, =1.0 (standard holes), =257kN (AISC
360-05, Table J3.1M for M24, ASTM A490 bolts), = number of slip planes =
1.0.
Therefore:
= 86
> = 84
OK
Note:
Check the total shear, with the total number of bolts.

= 2.4 = 207
(Re. AISC360-05, Eq. J3-6a)
Use = 0.75, = , 3 = 8 , = 450 , =nominal bolt diameter =

24 mm.
= 155
8-6
> 84
OK
Single shear resistance check:
For single shear on the most loaded bolt, check the following:
, = 0.75
(Re. AISC360-05, J3.6)
Use = for M24 bolts to obtain:
= 140 > = 85
OK
Web splice plates:

Dimensions taken from above:
Width = ,
.
Thickness
= ,
Length = + 2(21 + 23 ) =
Check the shear force acting on each plate:
= 373
2
Shear yielding of the splice plate:

= 1.0 0.6 = 563 > 373
OK
(Re. AISC360-05, Eq. J4-3)
Shear rupture of the splice plate:

= 27 ( ) + 2 = 29
= 0.75(0.6 )
(Re. AISC360-05, Eq. J4-4)
= 3 3 3 3 = 2024 2 (Net area subjected to shear)

= 410 > 373
OK
8-7
4.
Design of the flange splices
Use inner and outer flange plates. The force will be divided according
to a relative area principle.
Try the following dimensions for the flange cover plates:
Outer plate: (1PL) 1 = 200 1 = 27
1 = 5400 2
Inner plates: (2PL) 2 = 80 2 = 24
2 = 1920 2
Tip:
In small beam sections, typically with one flange (outer) plate, it is possible to
transfer the required flexural strength. In this case, it has been decided to use
100% of the element capacity, leading to the use of two flange plates (outer
and inner plates). With this configuration, the number of bolts is reduced
because they are subjected to double shear.
Forces on the inner plates (for both plates):

=
Force on the outer plate:

=
1
1 +22
22
1 +22
= 818
= 1150
Note that the forces on the outer plate are greater than the forces on the inner
plate (therefore, use the force on the outer plate for the different checks).
Flange bolts
Check the shear on the connections as friction type and also bearing type
connections. Try M24, ASTM A490 bolts.

=
(Per bolt)
(Re. AISC360-05, Eq. J3.4)
Use =0.85 (connection designed to prevent slip critical at required strength

level), =0.35 (class A surface), =1.13, = 1.0 (standard holes), =
257 (AISC 360-05, Table J3.1M for M24, ASTM A490 bolts), = Number of
slip planes = 1.0.
8-8
Therefore:
= 86
= 13.37 .Use = bolts in = 2 rows. (Number of
bolts per row = 7 bolts).

Note:
Bearing type connection check:
For single shear on bolts, use the maximum shear force (between inner or
outer flange plates):

Check the following:

, = 0.75 (LRFD)
(Re. AISC360-05, J3.6)
Use = 14 bolts, = 452 2 corresponding to M24 bolts to obtain:
= 1967
= 1150
OK
(Re. AISC360-05, Eq. J3-6a)

Use =0.75, =clear distance in the direction of the applied force, between
the edge of the hole and the edge of the adjacent hole or edge of the plate,
= ( , 1 , 2 ) = 24 , = 450 , =nominal bolt diameter = 24 mm.
= 1.2 2.4 = 622
Place the bolts:

Try:
1 = 75 , 2 = 120 , 3 = 40 , 4 = 40
8-9
b1
e2
e3
6 @ e1
e3
g
b2
b2
tw
e4
e4
Figure 8.1-4: Bolts positions for flange splice.

Check: 2 = 2 + 24 = 200 .
OK
Edge bolts:
= 3
27
= 31.5 = 1.2 = 408

2
Interior bolts:
= 1 27 = 48 = 1.2 = 622
Note: The diameter of the standard hole for the bolt M24 is 27 mm. See
AISC360-05, table J3.3M.
Considering all bolts:
= 0.75 2 408 + 12 622 = 6211 >

= 1150
OK
Flange splice plates:
Flange inner plates:

Inner plates: (2PL) 2 = 80 , 2 = 24 , 2 = 1920 2 , 2 = + 2(61 + 23 ) =
1085
8-10
Tensile force:
/2 = 408 (Per each one of the inner plates)
Tensile yielding on splice plate

= 0.9 = 0.9 2 2 = 596 > 408
OK
(Re. AISC360-05, Eq. J4-1)

= 0.75
(Re. AISC360-05, Eq. J4-2)
For bolted splice plates:
= 0.85
(Re. AISC360-05, D3.2)
= 2
= 27 + 2 = 29
(Re. AISC360-05, D3.2)
= 1224 2 0.85 = 1632 2
OK
= 413 408
Block shear strength on splice plate:

(Re. AISC360-05, Eq. J4-5)
= 0.6 + 0.6 +
= 0.75, = 1.0
e3
6 @ e1
Figure 8.1-5: Block shear for inner flange plates.
8-11
= 2 61 + 3 = 11760 2
= 6.52 = 7236 2
= 4 2 0.52 = 612 2
= 2229 < 2710 = 1672 > 408
OK
Compressive force
/2 = 408
(Per each one of the inner plates)
The maximum unfixed length is: 23 + = 85 = 85

Using AISC360-05, section J4.4 Strength of elements in compression:
2 23
12
2 2
= 6.93
= 12.26 < 25 .
OK
= 0.9 = 596 > 408
Flange outer plate:

Outer plate: (1PL) 1 = 200 , 1 = 27 , 1 = 5400 2
Tensile force:
= 1150
(On the outer plate)
Tensile yielding on splice plate:

= 0.9 = 0.9 1 1 = 1677 > 1150
OK
(Re. AISC360-05, Eq. J4-1)

= 0.75
(Re. AISC360-05, Eq. J4-2)
For bolted splice plates:
= 0.85
(Re. AISC360-05, D3.2)
= 21
8-12
= 27 + 2 = 29
(Re. AISC360-05, D3.2)
= 3834 2 0.85 = 4590 2
OK
= 1294 1150
Block shear strength on splice plate:

(Re. AISC360-05, Eq. J4-5)
= 0.6 + 0.6 +
= 0.75, = 1.0
e2
e3
6 @ e1
Figure 8.1-6: Block shear for outer flange plates.

= 1 2 61 + 3 = 26460 2
= 131 = 16281 2
= 2 1 1 = 2457 2
= 5502 < 6583 = 4127 > 1150
OK
Compressive force
= 1150
(On the outer plate)
The maximum unfixed length is: 23 + = 85 = 85

Using AISC360-05, section J4.4 Strength of elements in compression:
1 13
12
1 1
= 7.79
= 10.9 < 25 .
= 0.9 = 1677 > 1150
OK
8-13
8.1.c.
Designed Connection
Symmetrical connection
2 PL 340x505x8
18 M24
A - A section
Same connection
on the top flange
28 M24
2PL 80x1085x24
1PL 200x1085x27
BOLTS: ASTM A490
Figure 8.1-7: Designed beam splice.

Note:
The designer should note that bolt holes in flanges (and web) may prohibit the
development of a full strength connection at that point. In the example done,
it has been assumed that the forces are obtained from the beam full capacity
(conservative assumption).
From AISC360-05 Manual, Section F13: Proportions of Beam and Girders:
F13.1: Holes Reductions:
In addition to the limit states specified on other sections of Chapter F, the
nominal flexural strength, , shall be limited according to limit state of tensile
rupture of the tension flange (and therefore it is possible to obtain an <
obtained from the gross section of the beam).
On AISC360-05 Manual, Section G8: Beam and Girders with web openings:
The effect of web openings on the nominal shear strength of steel and
composite beams shall be calculated (there is a reduction on web area ).
Adequate reinforcement shall be provided when the required strength exceeds
the available strength of the member at the opening.
8-14
8.2.
Beam Parallel Splice Bolted End Plate.
8.2.a.
Design requirements
1.
2.
NCh2369.Of2003
Use high strength bolts (ASTM A325 or ASTM A490).

(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.1)

connection.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.6)
AISC 341
There are no specific provisions for the design of beam splices.

3.
AISC 360
(Re. AISC360-05, J6)
For beam splices:
Groove welded splices: shall develop the nominal strength of the

smaller spliced section.
Other type of splices: shall develop the strength required by forces at
the point of the splice (on the center of gravity of the bolts).
Tip:
(Re. AISC Manual of Steel Construction, chapter 12).
It is convenient to design for a minimum value of the available strength of the
beam section. This is because, since load application and frequency of
application can change during the lifetime of the structure, it is prudent for the
designer to specify some minimum strength requirement at the splice. This
previous statement is also based on the fact that the inflection points (many
splices are located at or near inflection points, zero moment) can change
during an earthquake, and therefore, actual forces could differ significantly
from those assumed.
Some authors recommend design for at least 50% of the member capacity
(0.5 and 0.5 ), but always check that the design forces are larger than
and from load combinations.
8-15
Notes:
4.
For Extended End Plate Moment Connection (similar to beam-tocolumn moment connections, but without concerns about the column
part), it has been decided to follow the design procedure presented
on AISC358-05 code: Prequalified Connections for Special and
Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications (and its
supplement AISC358-05s1-09: Supplement No.1 to ANSI/AISC35005). This connection is presented on Chapter 6 of AISC358-05 code.
This beam splice is intended to be at a high seismic demand area,
then the requirements for special moment frames (SMF) will be
followed.
AISC 358 General Requirements (summary)
LRFD Reduction Factors:

For ductile limit states, = 1.0. For non-ductile limit states, = 0.9.
Welding Requirements:
Filler metals and welding procedures shall meet the requirements of section
7.3 and Appendix W of the AISC341-05 code.
For Backing at beam to column and Continuity plate to column joint, see
AISC358-05, section 3.3.
Bolts Requirements:
Use only ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 bolts, and they shall be pretensioned high
strength type. (Re. AISC 358-05, 4.1)
8.2.b.
Example
Design a bolted extended and unstiffened end plate moment splice for the
beam connection shown in Figure 8.2-1. Use A345 ESP steel, required for
constructions subjected to dynamical loading, according to NCh203.Of2006
code, Table 3.
Both beams are Chilean H500 x 200 x 85.7 built-up sections. Use standard
holes for bolts. Suppose that the beams have been properly designed for
8-16
code (including seismic load) and that the sections are compatible with
AISC341 requirements. These loads, at the location of the splice, are:
= 513000 ,
= 550 , = 0
Suppose that the splice location has been previously defined. Many factors
affect the location of beam splices, such as the length of the members, limited
by transportation issues; or by the capacity of the assembly equipment).
Figure 8.2-1: Connection to be designed. (a) Frontal and Lateral View,

(b) Beam Section.
Tip:
According to various authors, this connection is economical for light
constructions (there is less material and bolts than the connection designed on
example 8.1). For bigger beams, the shear force is increased and the endplate splices are more expensive, therefore the connections are replaced for
the all bolted cover plate types.
If the bolts are properly designed, this connection can develop a satisfactory
behavior up to the beam plastic capacity.
1.
Section and Material Properties
H500 x 200 x 85.7

= 500 , = 200 , = 18 , = 8 , = 6
= 10912 2 , = 2166000 3 , = 211 , = 46.9 , = 3010000 4
8-17
A345 ESP:
= 345 , = 450
BOLTS: ASTM A490 Bolts, threads included in the shear planes, STD holes.
= 780 ,
= 414
2.
Design Forces
Conservatively, use the total capacity of the beam for the shear force and
moment. Assume that the section can reach the plastic capacity.
= = 1.0 0.6 = 1.0 0.6 = 828 >
= = 0.9 = 672543 >
Tip:
Note that these design forces meet the requirements of AISC360-05 code, J6
section. This is because always > and > . and are obtained
from the applicable building code load combination; in this case,
NCh2369.Of2003. Even though both of the limit states for calculating the
design forces are ductile, the strength reduction factors are not related with
and shown above; they are related with the factors of AISC 360-05
Specification.
The choice of the percentage of the members capacity, in order to calculate
and could be discussed with the seismic reviewer. In an early design
stage, where the exact location of the splice is not well known, it is very
conservative to use 100% of the member capacity for the calculation of design
forces.
Forces transferred by the splice:
Assume that the shear is completely transferred by the bolts of the end plates,
and that the moment is completely transferred by the flanges, with a couple of
tension and compression forces.
Then, the design forces for the splice are:
= 828
8-18
= 1395

Tip:
If there is also axial force acting on the beam (neglected in this example), it
should be divided according a relative areas principle, among the flanges and
the web. A common assumption is that the flanges also carry the entire axial
load.
3.
Design procedure
Base on the steps listed on Chapter 6 of AISC358-05, also considering

supplement N 1. Although these documents show the design for beam-tocolumn connections, the design of this beam splice is similar to those
connections.
Try a 4 bolt, unstiffened extended end plate for splicing the two parallel
beams, shown in Figure 8.2-1.
Prequalification limits:
(Re. AISC358, Supplement N1 (2009); Table 6.1)
of these connections are shown now (the notation of AISC358 is presented):
13 = 57
178 = 273
102 = 152
38 , 114
=
=
349 = 1400
10 = 19
152 = 235
8-19
bbf
bp
t wb
t fb
de Pfo
Pfi
tp
Figure 8.2-2: Notation (used on AISC 358-05) for the extended end plate
beam moment splice. Adapted from AISC358-05, Fig. 6.2.
Beam Limitations:
(Re. AISC358-05, section 6.4)
Beams shall be rolled or welded built-up sections. For built-up sections, at
moment connected ends, within at least the lesser of and 3 , the beam
web and flanges shall be connected using either CJP groove welds or a pair of
fillet welds, each one having a size of times the beam web thickness, but
not less than 6 mm. For the rest of the beam, the welds size shall not be less
than the size required to accomplish shear transfer from web to flanges.
See also 6.4.5 (Clear span to depth ratio), 6.4.7 (Lateral Bracing) and 6.4.8
(Protected Zone) on AISC358-05.
Pitch Distances:
(Re. AISC358-05, Section 6.9.2)
For the 4 Bolt Extended End Plate Moment Connection:
For bolts up to 25 mm of diameter, the minimum pitch distance is: +
For bolts larger than 25 mm of diameter, the minimum pitch distance
is: + .
Pitch distances are and as shown on Figure 8.2-2.
8-20
End Plate Width:

It shall be greater or equal than the connected beam flange width.
The effective end plate width shall not be taken as greater than the beam
flange width plus 25 mm.
Welding Details:
Weld access holes shall not be used.
Beam web to end-plate joint shall be made using fillet welds or CJP groove
welds. When fillet welds are used, they shall be designed to develop the full
strength of the web in tension, from the inside face of the flange to 150 mm
beyond the bolt row farthest from the beam flange.
The beam flange to end-plate joint shall be made using a CJP groove weld
without backing. The CJP groove weld shall be made such that the root of the
weld is on the beam web side of the flange. The inside face of the flange shall
have a 8-mm fillet weld. These welds shall be demand critical.
Backgouging of the root is not required in the flange directly above and below
the beam web for a length equal to 1.51 . A full-depth PJP groove weld shall be
permitted at this location.
4.
Design steps
(Re. AISC358-05 and supplement No.1, Section 6.10)
Calculate the forces for the connection design:
For this connection, do not follow the step (1) presented on AISC358 code.
Use the values calculated above.
= 828
= 672543
Select the option for the extended end plate moment connection and
establish preliminary values for the connection geometry and bolt
grade.
Use a 4 bolt unstiffened extended end plate moment connection.

8-21
Try the following dimensions:

Parameter
Calculate the
equation:
required
=
Value (mm)
30
225
140
60
60
60
bolt
diameter
using
the
corresponding
(Re. AISC358-05, Eq. 6.9-6)
1 + 0
Where: = , = 780 for ASTM A490 bolts, = 0.9, =distance

from the centerline of the compression flange to the ith tension bolt row. In
this case, the connection is symmetric (because could be positive or
negative, according to the seismic loading). Therefore:
1 = 1.5 = 413
0 = +
= 551
2
Then: = 25.1
2Pt
2Pt
Mnp
h0
h1
Figure 8.2-3: Bolts in tension and distances 0 & 1 .

Adapted from AISC 358-05, table 6.2.
Select a bolt diameter:
Try M27 bolts.
8-22
Calculate the required end plate-thickness:
1.11

(Re. AISC358, Eq. 6.9-8)
Where: = , = 345 (minimum yield stress for the end plate),

= 1.0.
For the calculation of = end-plate yield mechanism parameter, see tables
6.2 of the AISC358-05 code, corresponding to 4 bolt unstiffened end-plate
connections.
bp
g
de
pfo
t bf
pfi
s
t bw
h0
h1
Figure 8.2-4: Yield Line Pattern Model. Adapted from AISC 358-05, Table 6.2.
=
=
1
2
= 89
1
1
1
1
2
+
+ 0
+ 1 ( + )
2 1
(Note that if > = )
Therefore, = 3152 = 26.1
8-23
Tip:
It is prudent to check also the prying effect. According to the AISC Design
Guide N4, if the applied force is less than 90% of the end-plate strength
(calculated using the yield line analysis), the end-plate is considered to be
thick, and no prying forces are considered. When the applied load is greater
than ninety percent of the end plate strength, the end plate is considered to be
thin, and the prying forces are assumed to be at a maximum. For
conservative plate thickness design, assume that no prying force occurs,
therefore:
1.11

2
4
(see Figure 8.2-3).
= = 780 MPa for ASTM A490 bolts.
Calculations give:
= 447 = 861032
Therefore, =29.6 mm
(no prying action effect controls).
Select the end plate-thickness:
The assumed plate thickness = is OK.
Calculate the factored beam flange force:

= =
= 1395

(Re. AISC 358, Eq. 6.9-9)
Check shear yielding resistance of the extended portion of the fourbolt extended unstiffened end-plate (4E):
< = 0.6
2
0.6 = 1397 >

8-24
(Re. AISC 358, Eq. 6.9-10)
= 698
OK
it is satisfied. In this case, there is no need of increasing .
OK
Check shear rupture resistance of the extended portion of the fourbolt extended unstiffened end-plate (4E):
< = 0.6
2
Where:
= 450
1
MPa
(minimum
= 2 + 25.4
8
tensile
(Re. AISC358-05, Eq.6.9-11)
strength
of
the
end-plate).
= 4940 = net area of the end-plate.
Calculations give:
0.6 = 1200 >
OK
= 698
it is satisfied. In this case there is no need of increasing .
OK
The bolt shear rupture strength of the connection is provided by the

bolts at one compression flange:
= < =
(Re. AISC358-05, Eq. 6.9-15)
= 573 2 = bolt nominal area, for M27 bolts.

= = 414 for ASTM A490 Bolts, threads included.
= 4 (number of bolts at compression side).
Calculations give:
= 853 > = 828
OK
Check the bolt-bearing/tear out of the end plate:

= < = + ( )
(Re. AISC358-05, Eq. 6.9-17)
Where: = Number of inner bolts = 2, =Number of outer bolts = 2
8-25
= 1.2 2. 4 for each inner bolt and = 1.2 2.4 for each
outer bolt. The upper limit is 2.4 = 875
Use = 27 , = 450 , = = 30 , and:
Inner bolts:
= + + 30 = 108 = 1.2 = 1750 = 875
Outer bolts:
=
30
= 45 = 1.2 = 729
2
Therefore the resistance is: = 2887 > = 828 OK

Note: The diameter of the standard hole for the bolt M27 is 30 mm. See
AISC360-05, table J3.3M.
Design the flange to end-plate and web to end-plate welds, using the
requirements of section 6.9.7 of the AISC358-05 code.
i) Beam flanges to end-plate weld:

weld.
ii) Beam web to end-plate weld:
Use fillet welds, E70 electrode. For a 30 mm thick end-plate, the minimum
weld size is 8 mm according to AISC360-05, table J2.4.
The weld required to develop the bending stress on the beam web, near the
tension bolts, is (according to AISC Design Guide # 4):
(For E70 electrodes, = 0.6 = 289.5 /2 ):
0.6
= 4.04
2 0.707
With = 345 MPa (beam yield stress), = 8 mm (beam web thickness).
8-26
The weld size required for resisting the shear between the beam and the
end-plate is:

= 8.72
2 0.707
Where is the following effective length:

= min
, 2 + 2 = 232 .
Note: The applied shear is to be resisted by welding between the minimum of

the following distances: the distance between the mid-depth of the beam and
the compression flange or the distance between the inner row of tension bolts
plus two bolt diameters and the compression flange.
(Re. AISC Design Guide # 4 and AISC Manual of Steel of Construction 13th
Ed.).
Use a pair of fillet welds, with = .
8.2.c.
Designed Connection
A - A section
A
CJP
Web
Web
CJP
A
2PL 740x225x30
Bolts: M24 ASTM A490
Notes:
The following assumptions are inherent to the design procedure presented in
this example (see AISC Design Guide # 4). A summary of those assumptions
(not explicit on the document) are presented:
8-27
8.2.d.
All bolts are tightened to a pretension not less than AISC

requirement. However, slip critical connections requirements are not
needed to be checked.
Only permitted bolts are ASTM A325 or ASTM A490.
All the shear force is resisted by the compression side bolts.
Beam web-to-end-plate welds in the vicinity of the tension bolts are
designed to develop the yield stress of the beam web. This weld
strength is recommended, even if the full moment capacity of the
beam is not used to design the beam.
Only the web-to-end-plate weld, between the mid-depth of the beam
and the inside face of the beam compression flange, may be used to
resist the beam shear.
Yield-line analysis is used to calculate end-plate strength.
Bolt prying forces are not a consideration, since the required endplate thickness prevents their development.
References
8-28
Murray and Summer, 2004, AISC Design Guide 4: Extended

End-Plate Moment Connections; Seismic and Wind Applications
2nd Edition. American Institute of Steel Construction, USA.
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 9: STOPPERS
9. STOPPERS
9.1.
Up-lift Clamps
9.1.a.
General Description
Up-lift clamps are intended for systems of mobile equipment over rails with
wheels (for example cranes), as in Figure 9.1-1. The objective of the up-lift
clamps is to prevent falling of the equipment produced by the lifting of it due
to the action of vertical seismic forces. The design of the up-lift clamp is done
only to stand the vertical seismic forces of the equipment or by the use of
minimum up-lift forces, which are provided by the project specifications. Either
case considered, there is no need to consider loads in any other direction.
Figure 9.1-1: Schematic view of an up-lift clamp for a crane.

9.1.b.
Design Forces
For the design of the up-lift clamps there are no specific provisions in the
Chilean code nor in international codes, but, since up-lift clamps are intended
to avoid up-lift of equipment with wheels over rails, the design of these
devices shall be done according to the seismic vertical forces obtained for the
design of support of equipment (Refer to chapter 10, section 10.1 of this
Manual for the calculation of seismic forces on equipment).
According to the mentioned section, we have to distinguish between
equipment mounted on the structure and equipment attached directly to the
ground. For both cases, a seismic coefficient has to be considered to
calculate vertical seismic forces. The design force is:
=
9-1
Where is the weight of the equipment over the rail, including overloads. If
there are mobile loads acting over the equipment (the case of cranes), it is
important to consider the most adverse position of this load for the location of
the up-lift clamp in consideration. However, the probability of having an
earthquake at the maximum operation loads are acting is minimum, and
therefore a minimum operation load, provided by the project specifications
should be considered.
An elastic design of the up-lift clamp should be considered, not taking into
account the possible ductile behavior of the element. Therefore, for the
calculation of the vertical seismic coefficient, , the response modification
factor to obtain must be equal to 1.0.
It is also possible to use alternative analysis procedures to obtain the design
forces, (depending on the project requirements and specifications). One
alternative is to use a given value of , regardless of the peak ground
acceleration the structure location, and the structural properties of the
equipment and its attachments.
9.1.c.
General considerations for the design
As was said above, up-lift clamps must be designed only for vertical forces. To
consider this, it is required to take into account the general disposition of the
up-lift clamp. An example is shown in Figure 9.1-2:
Figure 9.1-2: General schematic disposition of an up-lift clamp, lateral and

frontal view.
Lifting forces acting on the equipment can induce collision between the bottom
part of the up-lift clamp (the hook) and the element of the substructure of the
9-2
equipment to which the rail is attached. Thus, the hook of the up-lift clamp is
subjected to a force equal to the lifting force of the equipment.
For the design, the interaction between the stresses produced by the axial load
(corresponding to the vertical seismic load) and the bending moment on
section A-A (see Figure 9.1-3) must be verified. The bending moment is
produced by the vertical seismic load that it is applied at a distance from the
center of the section A-A.
Figure 9.1-3: Specifications to obtain moment and axial force on the up-lift
clamp.
Then, if as the number of up-lift clamps used:
=
=
(axial force on A-A section)

(bending moment on A-A section)
If is the area of the section A-A and the elastic modulus, the stresses are:
Bending Stress
=
Axial Stress
The calculated stresses have to be checked using allowable design stresses,

and also we have to verify that the interaction is accomplished, which for
example could be a condition like this:
9-3
+
1.0

It is important to verify the possibility of buckling in bending of the uplift
clamp, if it is too slender. In order to avoid this, the slenderness of the uplift
clamp section has to be verified and if does not accomplish with the
slenderness requirements, stiffeners must be provided.
Finally, it is important to consider the only provision of NCh2369.Of2003
related to up-lift clamps, which recommends for cranes distance of 20 mm
between the hook of the up-lift clamp and the rail support (Re. Section 11.1.5
NCh2369.Of2003):
Figure 9.1-4: Recommended separation between up-lift clamp and rail

support. Adapted from NCh2369.Of2003, Figure A.3.
Also, for up-lift clamps that touch stoppers connected to concrete (see Figure
9.1-1), it is important to leave enough space to properly install the adhesive
anchor bolts and develop the ultimate force on concrete, the prying action on
the stoppers as needed and the interference between the head of the anchor
bolts and the up-lift clamp.
9-4
9.2.
Lateral Stoppers
9.2.a.
General description of stopper systems
Stoppers are resistant mechanisms used for controlling displacements of

equipment and piping in certain directions. They allow displacements on the
non-restricted directions for thermal expansion of the equipment. Stoppers are
commonly used on high temperature devices, such as boilers, deareators,
pipes, etc. The idea is to control certain displacements for operation continuity
of the equipment or pipe, and avoid their damage (generally very expensive to
repair or replace) in case of an earthquake. Therefore, stoppers transfer the
inertial forces of the nonstructural component to the support structure.
Unfortunately, there are no clear provisions on Chilean codes for the support
of equipment and, additionally, stopper systems differ from one equipment to
the others, so engineers must take special care in the design process and
adapt to each particular situation. One problem found on the February 27 th
Chile earthquake was the damage of several nonstructural components (for
example, mechanical equipment) due to the poor design of their supports and
the lack of specific requirements for this design (some provisions are found on
NCh2369.Of2003 and NCh433.Of2009).
Currently, a new normative for earthquake-resistance design of nonstructural
components is proposed (MINVU NTM 001-2010) with new recommendations
(mainly based on ASCE 7-10 provisions) oriented to accomplish that the
nonstructural components have a seismic performance compatible with the
support structure. Some recommendations and general provisions are
discussed in this chapter.
9.2.b.
Chilean code related requirements
There are no clear provisions in NCh2369.Of2003 to design stoppers for

equipment. There are only some general provisions that are mentioned now:
9.2.b.1. Anchorage
When seismic stoppers that are anchored to concrete are needed, refer to
dispositions of section 8.6 of the NCh2369.Of2003 code.
9-5
9.2.b.2. Large suspended equipment

(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 11.4)
Boilers, metallurgical furnace reactors, and other large suspended equipment
shall be attached to the structure with connectors that transmit the seismic
forces without restraining the free vertical and/or horizontal thermal dilatation.
This is explained graphically with Figure A.7 of Appendix A shown below:
Figure 9.2-1: Typical details of large suspended equipment, seismic connectors

and anchor bolts. The detail shown corresponds to stopper joints. Taken from
NCh2369.Of2003, Figure A.7 (b).
9-6
9.2.b.3. Piping and ducts

(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 11.5)
Section 11.5.1: Pipe systems and ducts of large dimensions shall be equipped
with expansion joints and supports that warrant their seismic stability and that
simultaneously allow for thermal deformations.
9.2.b.4. Rotatory kilns and dryers
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 11.9)
Section 11.9.1: Longitudinal earthquake must be resisted by rims and thrust
rollers installed at both sides of the rims, and placed in only one support to
allow for longitudinal expansions.
Between the thrust rollers and the rims, a free space shall be left in order to
facilitate the operation. The design of the rim and the rollers must consider the
possibility of longitudinal impact when this free space is closed. It is allowed to
design the rollers and their mechanisms as sacrifice elements that can fail
during an earthquake; in this case the manufacturer must provide detailed
repair instructions in a reduced time to prevent damages of the kiln in the
cooling process.
Section 11.9.2: Transverse earthquake must be resisted by rims and lateral
rollers placed in several supports. The width of the rollers shall be greater than
the width of the rims, to prevent them from falling due to thrust roller failure.
9-7
Figure 9.2-2: Typical details of kilns and rotatory dryers. Taken from
NCh2369.Of2003, Figure A.11.
9-8
9.2.c.
Other recommendations and discussion of some examples
According to ASCE7-10 code, the transfer of the seismic inertial forces shall be
such that a continuous load path of sufficient strength and stiffness between
the component and the supporting structure shall be provided. Local elements
of the structure, including connections, shall be designed and constructed for
the component forces that control the design of the elements or their
connections.
The idea is that if damage due to the control of large seismic displacements is
expected at the stoppers, then they shall be easily replaceable elements
(stoppers are seismic fuses). For example, for the February 27th earthquake,
some boiler stoppers were subjected to inelastic behavior and they dissipated
a large amount of energy, which is very good according to the seismic design
philosophy. If stoppers were not reparable or inspectable, their design should
be done considering larger seismic forces (for example using a smaller R
reduction factor than the value used for the design of steel members).
ASCE 7-10, summary of requirements:
It is important to note that requirements of MINVU NTM 001-2010 are
principally based on ASCE 7-10 provisions. According to section 13.4 of ASCE
7-10 (Nonstructural Component Anchorage), the nonstructural components
and their supports shall be attached or anchored to the supporting structure
using bolted connections, welded connections, or otherwise positively fastened
without consideration of frictional resistance produced by the effects of gravity.
The attachment of nonstructural components shall resist the design forces of
that code (or another design forces, for example,
the loads indicated on
Section 10.1 of this Manual) and anchors in concrete must satisfy the
requirements of Appendix D of ACI318.
For multiple attachments, the calculation of force distribution at one location
shall take into account the stiffness and ductility of the component, component
supports, attachments and structure, and the ability to redistribute loads to
other attachments in a group. Also, supports shall be designed for seismic
relative displacements shown on that code, and, if talking about seismic
stoppers, they shall control those seismic displacements and accommodate
thermal displacements of the equipment. Seismic supports shall be
constructed so that support engagement is maintained during a seismic event.
9-9
Other general requirements for support of equipment are listed on section 13.6
of ASCE 7-10 (Mechanical and Electrical Components).
FEMA E-74 document (2011):
This document has some examples of typical causes of damage and the
corresponding seismic protective measures for nonstructural components
(mechanical, electrical and plumbing components) on chapter 6, section 6.4. It
may be in the readers interest to study those examples of risk mitigation for
different equipment or piping.
9.2.c.1. Piping supports
In FEMA E-74 document, in the Pressure Piping Section (6.4.3), Floor Mounted
Supports Subsection (6.4.3.5), there are several examples of damage of
piping and adjacent supports due to poor seismic restraint. A picture is
presented below:
Figure 9.2-3: Damage to piping, stud wall and finishes due to movement of
poorly restrained floor-mounted piping in the 1994 magnitude-6.7 Northridge
Earthquake. Taken from FEMA E-74, Figure 6.4.3.5-2.
As seismic mitigation consideration, the document states that horizontal or
vertical pipe runs need vertical, lateral and longitudinal restraints (it is
important to have in mind the thermal expansion if it is present on the pipe).
For example, floor-mounted supports can be used to provide restraint for any
combination of vertical, lateral and longitudinal loads; and they can be used
with or without vibration isolation. Longitudinal supports require positive
support to the pipe with a pipe clamp or welded lug.
9-10
Figure 9.2-4: Floor-mounted supports for industrial piping in Chile; piping

undamaged in the 2010 Chile Earthquake.
Taken from FEMA E-74, Figure 6.4.3.5-5.
Another example is the use of guide plates as part of the supporting structure
for pipes. These guide plates slide in one direction and hold the pipe on the
perpendicular direction. As pipes may be subjected to thermal expansion,
principally on the longitudinal direction due to their length, stoppers and
support structures must accommodate these movements, but limit the seismic
movements of the pipe in order to avoid damage.
9-11
Figure 9.2-5: Pipe support structure. Guide plate is item 8.

Taken from Posco E&C. information of Campiche Thermoelectrial Power Plant
DWG N: WD380-EP146-HRS04.
9-12
It is a good practice to do a detailed model of the pipe supports for the

analysis. They typically include: support conditions, element type used and
material properties, loads and their point of application.
9.2.c.2. Boiler lateral stoppers
Boiler can be roughly described as a large suspended mass hanging from the
roof of the boiler supporting structure. Stoppers connect the boiler with
lateral resisting frames in order to restrain seismic displacements in the
horizontal plane (lateral motion of the boiler). They are designed to provide
energy dissipation through nonlinear behavior when large seismic events
occur. Therefore, stoppers transmit those inertia lateral forces to the structure
and they are expected to be seismic fuses, in a way that they can easily
reach plastic behavior and therefore they should be easy replaceable
elements.
The complete system that restrains the lateral movement between the boiler
and the support structure is composed of guideposts (supporting columns),
buckstays (beams pararallel to boiler casing) and the stoppers. Stoppers are
fixed to buckstays and they have a restraint with the guideposts on the
corresponding lateral direction.
Boiler stoppers are beam-type elements that restraint displacements in only
one direction. They do not take axial forces; their behavior is purely flexural so
they are an excellent source of energy dissipation. Because boilers are
equipment that work under high temperature ranges, they exhibit thermal
expansion. Stoppers must therefore, control or limit relative horizontal
displacements between the equipment and the structure, without inhibiting the
relative displacements due to temperature changes.
Special careful must be taken when modeling these devices: it is of special
interest to evaluate the internal forces acting on the stoppers between the
boiler and the supporting structure. The common modeling practice is to
assume the restricted directions as connected points in that direction and
without friction. Sometimes stoppers are composed of two or more elements
(for example, one element for restraining movement in one direction and
another element for the movement in the opposite direction); in that case
sometimes a mistake is made: both elements are modeled and both are
restrained, so in the analysis they take approximately half of the load that
corresponds them in the reality.
9-13
Figure 9.2-6: Seismic stoppers damage details. (a) General view, 2 levels. (b)
Detail of Damage at buckstay connection. Taken from EQCO Report: NVTS
Boiler System Damage Report.
Figure 9.2-7: Retrofitted stopper at Angamos Thermoelectric Power Plant.

Taken from Posco E&C Seismic Retrofit Report. 2011/03/04. Complete
BQ307L.
If ductile behavior is expected on the load path of the seismic loads due to the
inertial forces coming from the boiler, stoppers are the appropriate elements
to dissipate energy. The recommended design procedure of the stoppers, their
connections and surrounding elements should be the following:
a) Design the stopper with the loads obtained from analysis (integrated
model). If the stopper cannot be easily replaced, use R=1.
b) Compute capacity of the stopper.
c) Use the capacity of the stopper as the forces to design the guide post, the
buckstays and all the connections between the different elements. Therefore,
9-14
all the other elements connected to the stoppers shall be at least capable to
transfer this load.
9.2.d.
References
Cruz, E. F., and Valdivia, D., (2011). Performance of industrial
facilities in the Chilean earthquake of 27 February 2010, Structural
Design Tall Special Buildings, 20, pg. 83101.
FEMA E-74, 2011, Reducing the Risk of Nonstructural Earthquake
Damage. A Practical Guide, 4th Edition. FEMA, Washington D.C.
http://www.fema.gov/plan/prevent/earthquake/fema74/
FEMA 412, 2002,Installing Seismic Restraints for Mechanical
Equipment. VISCMA, FEMA & ASCE.
FEMA 413, 2004, Installing Seismic Restraints for Electrical
Equipment. VISCMA, FEMA & ASCE.
FEMA P-414, 2004, Installing Seismic Restraints for Duct and Pipe.
VISCMA, FEMA & ASCE.
Ministerio de Vivienda y Urbanismo (MINVU), 2010, Estructuras:
Diseo Ssmico de Componentes y Sistemas No Estructurales
(Anteproyecto de norma NTM 001-2010).
EQCO Earthquake Engineering Consultants, NVTS Boiler SystemDamage Report.
Posco E&C, Campiche Thermoelectrical Power Plant, DWG N:
WD380-EP146-HRS04 (Figure 9.2-5).
Posco E&C, Angamos Seismic Retrofit Report, 2011-03-04.
American Society of Civil Engineers, 2010, Minimum Design Loads
for Buildings and Other Structures (ASCE 7-2010). ASCE, Virginia.
9-15
9-16
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
10. SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT

10.1.
Calculation of seismic forces on equipment
In this section we will discuss the provisions for calculation of seismic forces
acting on equipment as defined in the Chilean Seismic Code for Industrial
Structures, NCh2369.Of2003.
The provisions for calculation of seismic forces on equipment can be found on
section 7 of NCh2369.Of2003. For additional provisions regarding seismic
forces and support requirements on equipment also see sections 5 and 11 of
the code. An overview of this provisions and a guide for their use is provided
as follows.
It is important to remark that the seismic analysis must be done in at least
two approximately perpendicular directions (Re. NCh2369.Of2003 section
5.1.1).
Additionally, it is important to consider that the design of the equipment must
be made considering the total horizontal seismic force in a given direction and
the simultaneous total vertical seismic force. The combination of horizontal
and vertical seismic effects must be done directly, and no modal superposition
method can be used (for example CQC).
10.1.a. Equipment mounted on the structure
Mounted equipment must comply with section 11.3.2 of NCh2369.Of2003,
which indicates that equipment on buildings extending more than one story
high, shall have a support system that does not increase the seismic stiffness
of the building. If this is not possible, equipment must be included in the
model of the seismic-resistant system.
For the calculation of the design force, the code establishes several
alternatives, according to the mathematical model of the structure.
If the equipment or its secondary structure is included in the structural

model, the horizontal seismic force for the equipment is: (Re.
NCh2369.Of2003 section 7.2.1)
= 1.2
<
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003 7-1)
10-1
Where:
:
Shear force in the base of the equipment or secondary structure,
according to the structural analysis of the building, including seismic
forces reduced by the R factor defined in NCh2369.Of2003.
1 :
Response modification factor defined in the section 6.1 of the

disposition. It corresponds to:
1 =
if
1 =
if
1 = 0.5
if
<1
>1
< 0.5
is the shear force on the base of the structure and is the minimum
value for the base shear force, established in section 5.4.5 of the code.
:
Corresponds to the weight of the equipment.
:
Response modification factor taken from table 7.1 of the code:
Secondary Element or equipment
- Equipment or elements, flexible or stiff, with non-ductile materials or

appendages.
1.5
- Precast secondary elements or equipment, cantilever elements,

partitions.
- Electrical and mechanical equipment in general
- Chimneys, tanks, steel towers.
- Other cases not specified in this table
- Storage Racks
- Secondary structures
Table 10.1.a-1: Value of according to the type of structure.

Taken from the NCh2369.Of2003, table 7-1.
This value of the seismic force corresponds to an equivalent static analysis of
the equipment for the seismic effects, independent of the structure of its
support. Nevertheless, this considers that the equipment was included in an
appropriate way in the building model, i.e. the stiffness and mass of the
equipment are well considered in the structural model of the whole building.
10-2
For the case of elastic behavior, can be used as 1.0. The values of the table
7-1 of the NCh2369.Of2003 Chilean code are maximum values; some cases
may require lower values.
Also, the reason for including the factor 1 / is to change the response
modification factor for the design of the equipment from to .
The decision of considering or not the effect of the equipment on the structure
depends of the influence that the equipment produces on the response of the
building. There is influence of the equipment on the response if the stiffness or
the inertia of the equipment is determinant for the behavior of the whole
structure or for a local part of it. So, even if the stiffness and inertia of the
equipment are small in comparison with the whole structure, if they influence
locally in the structure, then they have to be included in the building model.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003 section C5.3.1.5).
Unfortunately, the code does not give any guidance for this purpose and only
establishes the fact that it must be considered (Re. NCh2369.Of2003 section
5.3.1.5).
It is important to notice that the horizontal force acting on the equipment is
located at the center of gravity of the element, so accurate calculation of this
property must be done.
If the equipment does not have to be considered in the structural model of

the building, the horizontal seismic forces must be calculated according to
the following provisions (Re. NCh2369.Of2003 section 7.2.2):
a)
When the acceleration at the base level of the equipment, , is known,
obtained from a modal dynamic analysis of the building, including the response
modification factor of the structure, then:
= 3.0
<
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003 7-2)
Where and were defined in the previous section. Note that values for this
equation are different for each direction of analysis.
The value of can be calculated by two ways, depending if the information of
the fundamental periods of the equipment/secondary structure ( ) and the
main structure ( ) are available or not.
10-3
- If and are known, ( corresponds to the period that has the highest
equivalent translational mass in the direction of analysis) in which the
secondary element may enter in resonance. cannot be less than 0.06
seconds for the calculations shown:
= 0.5 +
0.5
1 2 + 0.3 2 2
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003 7-4)
Where:
if
=1
= 1.25
= 0.91
0.8 1.1
if
if
< 0.8
> 1.1
- If you do not know the fundamental period of the equipment/secondary

structure and the period of the structure, use:
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003 7-3)
= 2.2
b) When a modal dynamic analysis of the building has not been done, the
horizontal seismic force can be calculated as:
= 0.7
<
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003 7-5)
The value of is calculated in the same way as the previous section.

Finally, for the calculation of the horizontal force, the value of is needed,
which, in this case, has not being obtained from a modal dynamic analysis of
the structure without considering the equipment mass on the main structure,
so use the following expression that the Chilean code recommends:
If the level height (location of the equipment) is known (Re.
NCh2369.Of2003 section 7.2.4):
=
1+3
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003 7-6)
Where 0 is the maximum effective acceleration defined in the section 5.3.3 of

NCh2369.Of2003; is the height of the level with respect to the base level;
and is the total height of the building with respect to the base level.
10-4
- If the level height (location of

NCh2369.Of2003 section 7.2.3), use:
= 4
the
equipment)
is
unknown
(Re.
The expressions of ASCE 7 could also be used to define the horizontal seismic
force for equipments.
The horizontal seismic force is given by:
=
0.4
1+2
(Re. ASCE 7 Equation 13.3-1)
Where is the component amplification factor, which varies from 1.0 to 2.5
(for the selection of this value, see tables 13.5-1 or 13.6-1 of ASCE 7); is
the short period spectral response acceleration, which is defined in section
11.4 of ASCE 7; is the importance factor, which varies from 1.0 to 1.5; is
the operating weight of the equipment; is the response modification factor
for the equipment, which varies from 1 to 12; is the height of the point of
attachment between the equipment and the structure; and is the height of
the structure with respect the base.
ASCE 7 considers the height of the structure as the average roof height with
respect to the base level.
The determination of the height of the structure is an important issue, which
seems obvious at first sight but it is not always simple, as the example shown
at the left of Figure 10.1.a-1. For example, if the equipment is located in a
substructure attached to the ground inside the main building (see right of the
Figure 10.1.a-1), the height for the calculation of the horizontal seismic force
is the height of the substructure and not the height of the main building.
10-5
Figure 10.1.a-1: Examples of height determination for horizontal seismic

forces.
For both cases of including or not the equipment/secondary structure in

the main structural model of the building, which are described above and
correspond to sections 7.2.1 and 7.2.2 of NCh2369.Of2003, the horizontal
seismic force calculated must be greater than:
=
0.80
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003 section 7.2.5)
If the structure and the equipment have been integrated in the same model,
which considers satisfactorily the interaction between the building and the
equipment and the dynamical properties of the equipment, there is no need of
using sections 7.2.1 and 7.2.2 of the NCh2369. Of2003.
10.1.b. Vertical Seismic Forces
According to the provisions of section 5.1.1 of NCh2369.Of2003, vertical
seismic accelerations must be considered in hanging bars of suspended
equipment (section 5.1.1a of the disposition) and in the case of foundations
and anchorage elements and support of structures and equipment (section
5.1.1c of the disposition). In section 5.5 it can be found provisions for the
calculation of the vertical seismic force.
According to the 5.5.1 of NCh2369.Of2003 the seismic vertical acceleration
can be considered as static, considering a seismic coefficient which depends of
the type of element to be designed. In the case of the elements that fall on the
category of section 5.1.1c, which is the case of interest, the seismic coefficient
is:
=
10-6
2 0
3
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003 section 5.5.1b)
Then, the vertical seismic force for the support of the equipment is:
=
The seismic coefficient for the cases that fall on the category of the section
5.1.1a of the code is also of our interest since in those cases the suspension
bars and support elements for equipment (in the case of hanged equipment)
can be included. In those cases the seismic coefficient can be obtained from:
=
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003 section 5.5.1a)
And the vertical seismic force must be calculated according to the following
expression:
=
Where is the sum of the permanent loads and live loads on the support and
is the importance coefficient which is defined according to the 4.3.1 and 4.3.2
of the NCh2369.Of2003.
As an alternative for the previous analysis, it is possible to use the same
procedure used for horizontal forces applied to the vertical direction. This is
more precise since considers the dynamical properties of the equipment for the
vertical direction.
Finally, the provisions of section 5.5 establish an alternative calculation
method for the vertical seismic loads, which consist in the development of a
vertical dynamic analysis using spectral accelerations obtained from expression
5-5 of the code, considering = 3 and = 0.03. The spectral acceleration does
not have to be greater than 0 . The problem with this option is that the code
does not consider how to use the accelerations or the forces obtained from this
type of analysis in order to obtain design forces for equipment.
10.1.c. Stiff and robust equipment directly supported to the ground
In the case of equipment directly supported to the ground, and also if the
equipment is sufficiently stiff and robust (this considers a fundamental period
for the equipment less than 0.06 seconds, including the effects of the
connection to the respective foundation), it is possible to design using a static
analysis, with forces obtained from the following seismic coefficients:
10-7
Horizontal Seismic Coefficient:

= 0.7
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003 section 5.6)
Vertical Seismic Coefficient:

= 0.5
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003 section 5.6)
Then, the seismic forces for the equipment are:

=
=
Also, it can be possible to calculate seismic forces with the same input as if the
equipment/secondary structure were a main structure on the ground.
10.1.d. Additional comments
Future provisions that will be used in Chile, (based on ASCE 7 code) are the
MINVU NTM 001-2010 for the seismic design of nonstructural components. It
has other expressions (but similar) than those presented on this section for
the calculation of seismic forces on equipment, and with detail in the
calculation procedure.
10.1.e. References
10-8

10.2.
Skid-mounted equipment
10.2.a. General description and recommendations

Sometimes, for cleaning or easiness of transportation, equipment is resting
over skid beams (typically on Channel or H sections). These skids are
connected to a concrete foundation (by anchor bolts) or to the steel structure
(by standard bolts). A scheme of a skid mounted equipment is shown on the
following figure:
Figure 10.2.a-1: Skid-mounted equipment.

For designing the anchorage of the skids it is important to take note of the
following tips:
The skid to foundation connection must be designed in order to

minimize sliding, tilting or overturning of the equipment. In many
situations, the equipment operability could be compromised, and the
intention of the seismic design philosophy is to guarantee continuous
operation.
The design loads for the equipment can be calculated using section
10.1 of this Manual (or similar reasonable provisions). Note that it is
important to do a review of the equipment drawing (from vendor) and
define values of some important parameters like: plan dimension of
the equipment base frame; height of the equipment; location, size,
and embedment length of the anchor bolts; weight of the equipment
(distinguish between operating and non-operating conditions); and
location of the center of gravity of the equipment (where design
forces are applied). It is also important to take into account any other
forces due to the interaction with other components (for example,
with pipes attached to the equipment).
A recommendation of FEMA E-74 Document is to place two or more

anchors on each side of the equipment. Another recommendation is
10-9
to use shims or grout to level the equipment. If grout is used, it

should be continuous with the contact surface.
If anchoring skids to steel framing members, it is important to take

into account the integrity of these structural members when drilling
them. When anchoring to concrete (slab or foundation) it is important
to check that the height of the concrete pedestal or thickness of the
concrete slab is greater than the required embedment length for the
anchor rods.
Design forces from load combinations shall be used to check the skid
beams, the anchorage of these skids and the supporting structural
element. Note that the skids for the equipment must have enough
strength and stiffness to resist those forces and minimize
deformations that could be dangerous for the mounted equipment. If
needed, stiffeners may be added to transfer large loads.
10.2.b. Some important skid and anchor bolts related aspects

When there is an overturning moment due to a lateral force and/or an uplift
force acting on the equipment, the anchor bolts generally will be subjected to
tension and shear. The corresponding interaction must be checked for
calculating the required strength of the anchors. All other limit states present
on the bolts and the attaching members must be included in the verification,
depending if the anchorage is made with concrete or steel.
Note that if bolts are under tension, then the prying effect usually needs to be
considered to calculate the required thickness of the skid flange and the bolt
diameter, so there is sufficient stiffness and strength in the connecting
elements and in the bolts. A reference for this topic is the AISC Manual of
Steel Construction (13th Ed.), Chapter 9: Design of Connecting Elements.
Prying action calculations have been made for other examples of this Manual.
If ductility is needed on the anchor bolts (when there are large seismic forces),
it may be necessary to provide an exposed length for the bolts (same as the
column base plate requirement when large seismic effects are expected) and
add a stiffener on the skid member to resist the tension force that is being
developed on the anchors. Note that skid steel members must resist the
seismic design forces due to the presence of the equipment. If anchorage is
made on concrete, the design must be made according to ACI code (ACI358
and/or ACI349) and it must provide a ductile behavior, avoiding brittle
10-10
(concrete related) controlling failure modes. Remember that the concrete

foundation must also be dimensioned and designed.
Figure 10.2.b-2: Prying action in angle scheme.

Adapted from AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13th Ed.
Figure 10.2.b-3: Example of exposed length for anchor bolt when ductility is
required.
When none of the details from Figure 10.2-3 (exposed length for the anchor
bolts or stiffeners on the channel skid beam) are present, the head of the
anchor is tightened to the top surface of the bottom flange of the skid beam.
When this occurs, force amplification has to be considered on the design
verification of flanges and anchor bolts due to prying effect and the lack of
exposed length required by section 8.6.2 of NCh2369.Of2003. These
10-11
amplifications of forces will directly affect the diameter of the bolts and the
detailing and anchoring of them, even more if ductile behavior is necessary.
For transferring the seismic shear, typically the friction force shall not be
considered to help the shear base resistance. If needed, shear keys (for
concrete foundation) must be designed, or seismic stoppers could be included.
Grout thickness shall not be considered on the bearing lateral resistance of a
concrete foundation.
10.2.c. References
10-12

Construction. 13th Edition. Chapter 9: Design of Connecting
Elements, AISC, USA.
10.3.
Post-Installed Anchor Bolts
This section refers to post-installed anchor bolts for equipment or other

elements anchored to concrete. Anchors are the most important part to
transfer the load from the superstructure or the equipment to the supporting
structure. There must be a continuous load path with enough strength and
stiffness between the superstructure and the supporting structure.
It is important to pay attention to the design of these elements as a load
transfer mechanism. Otherwise, super structure and sub-structure, designed
separately, will not behave as a single structure and this situation will lead to a
non desired failure.
10.3.a. General description of post-Installed anchor bolts
When an anchor rod is installed after placing concrete, making a hole in the
hardened concrete with a drill-bit, it is called "Post installed anchor". Some
types of post-installed anchor bolts are presented in the following figure:
Figure 10.3.a-1: Different Types of Post-Installed Anchor Bolts: (a) Adhesive

Anchor; (b) Undercut Anchor; (c) Torque-Controlled Expansion Anchor: (c1)
Sleeve type and (c2) Stud type; (d) Drop-in Type Displacement-Controlled
Expansion Anchor. Taken from ACI318-11 Code, Figure RD.1.1.
The most widely used anchors for seismic restraints are the undercut and the
adhesive anchors.
Basic working principles of anchor bolts.
According to HILTI Manual (2009), there are 3 basic principles which make an
anchor rod hold in a base material when subjected to a tensile force:
Friction (when expansion forces are present, friction between anchor and hole
wall is provided), keying (anchors rely on the interlock of the anchor with
deformations in the hole wall to resist the applied tension), and bonding (when
adhesive bonding is provided between the anchor and the hole wall). These
principles are generally combined in real situations.
10-13
Figure 10.3.a-2: Friction, keying, and bonding principles on anchor bolts.

Taken from HILTI Manual (2009).
When anchor bolts are subjected to shear forces, most of them develop their
shear resistance due to bearing against the hole wall near the surface of the
base material.
Other important definitions
(Re. ACI318-11, D.1)
Attachments: are structural assemblies (external to the base material and
embedment surface) that transmit loads to or receive loads from the anchor.
An example of attachment is a base plate.
Ductile Steel Element: is an element with a tensile test elongation of at least
14% and reduction in area of at least 30% (when the element does not meet
any or both of the previous conditions, it is considered a brittle element). A
steel element that meets the requirements of ASTM A307 (and ASTM F1554)
shall be considered ductile.
10.3.b. Failure modes of anchorages
requirements for strength of anchors
in
concrete
and
general
In this section the different possible failure modes will be presented but not
specific code requirements will be shown.
This chapter is not meant to explain in detail the different failure modes (and
their corresponding equations) of the anchor bolts and the concrete. The
reader is encouraged to study them with attention. According to ACI318-11,
Appendix D, the following failure modes (where applicable) shall be
considered:
(Re. ACI318-11, D.4.1)
10-14
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Steel strength of the anchor in tension.

Concrete breakout strength of the anchor in tension (applicable to all
anchor types).
Pullout strength cast-in, post-installed expansion or undercut anchor
in tension.
Concrete side-face blowout strength of headed anchor in tension.
Bond strength of adhesive anchor in tension.
Steel strength of anchor in shear.
Concrete breakout of anchor in shear (applicable to all anchor types).
Concrete pryout of anchor in shear (applicable to all anchor types).
ACI318-11 references on commentary RD.4.1 discuss in more detail the

different anchor failure modes. It is important to note that anchors shall satisfy
the required edge distances, spacing, and thicknesses to preclude splitting
failure, as required in section D.8 of ACI318-11.
Figure 10.3.b-3: Failure modes for anchors in tension.

Taken from ACI 318-11, Figure RD.4.1a.
Figure 10.3.b-4: Failure modes for anchors in shear.

Taken from ACI 318-11, Figure RD.4.1b.
10-15
The design of the anchors shall meet table D.4.1.1 of ACI318-11 and, for
earthquake loading, the design shall satisfy D.3.3. Note that when both tensile
and shear forces are present, proper tension-shear interaction must be
considered according to D.7. For more general provisions and strength
reduction factors for the different limit states, see section D.4 of the code.
For calculating the design tensile and shear strengths (considering the various
applicable limits states), see section D.5 and D.6 of Appendix D.
An additional reference that contains a summary of the limit states according
to the 2008 version of ACI318 code, properties for different types of HILTI
anchors and worked examples is the HILTI Manual (2011). Also HILTI Manual
(2009) has a brief description of some failure modes. See the references of
this chapter.
10.3.c. Seismic design philosophy for anchorages
The underlying seismic design philosophy in the design of anchors in concrete
is to ensure ductile failure modes of the anchor. If damage occurs, it should be
in an easily replaceable element. Note that any concrete failure is a brittle
mode of failure.
As said on NEHRP 2009 Recommended Seismic Provisions, anchors must be
designed to have ductile behavior (or to have a specified degree of over
strength). Depending on the specifics of the design condition, ductile design of
anchors in concrete may satisfy one or more of the following objectives:
1.
2.
3.
Adequate load redistribution among anchors in a group (to adjacent

anchors).
Allowance for anchor overload without brittle failure.
Energy dissipation.
NEHRP 2009 Recommended Seismic Provisions state the following:

Achieving deformable, energy-absorbing behavior in the anchor itself is often
difficult. Unless the design specifically addresses the conditions influencing
desirable hysteretic response (adequate gauge length, anchor spacing, edge
distance, steel properties, etc.), anchors cannot be relied upon for energy
dissipation. Simple geometric rules, such as restrictions on the ratio of anchor
embedment length to depth, are not adequate to produce reliable ductile
behavior. For example, a single anchor with sufficient embedment to force
ductile tension failure in the steel body of the anchor bolt may still experience
10-16
concrete fracture (a non-ductile failure mode) if the edge distance is small, the
anchor is placed in a group of tension-loaded anchors with reduced spacing, or
the anchor is loaded in shear instead of tension. In the common case where
anchors are subject primarily to shear, response governed by the steel
element may be non-ductile if the deformation of the anchor is constrained by
rigid elements on either side of the joint. Designing the attachment so that its
response is governed by a deformable link in the load path to the anchor is
encouraged. This approach provides ductility and over strength in the
connection while protecting the anchor from overload. Ductile bolts should only
be relied upon as the primary ductile mechanism of a system if the bolts are
designed to have adequate gauge length (unbonded strained length of the
bolt) to accommodate the anticipated nonlinear displacements of the system
at the design earthquake.
10.3.d. NCh2369.Of2003 code requirements for anchorage on concrete
Refer to section 8.6 of NCh2369.Of2003 code for anchorages (of steel
structures). A summary of the basic requirements is presented:
Section 8.6.2: When anchor bolts are subjected to tension, they must
meet some minimum lengths in order to make easier their inspection
and reparation, and the thread must have enough length to be able to
tighten the nuts. See the following figure:
Figure 10.3.d-5: Definition of minimum lengths for anchor bolts according to

Chilean Code. Adapted from NCh2369.Of2003 code, Figure A.1: Column Bases.
When anchor bolts do not meet the previous requirement, they must
be designed to stand load combinations in which the seismic forces
have been amplified by the maximum value between 0.5R and 1.5
10-17
times with respect to the value indicated on sections 5 and 7. (See

also sections 7.3.2 and 7.3.3 of the code). In section 7.3.2 it is also
mentioned that when the anchor rods are superficial (length < 8
diameters), seismic forces must be increased.
Note that the value of R mentioned above is the same value used for
the analysis and design of the structure or the design of an
equipment anchored by bolts. Also note that only seismic forces must
be amplified, not all the loads in the load combination. The mode of
failure of the each system must be of ductile type; if not, the R value
shall be reduced.
For important equipment and in the structure of large suspended

equipment, ductile, easily fixable and eventually replaceable bolts
shall be used. An example of this type of anchors is the hummer head
bolt, as shown in Figure A.7 of NCh2369.Of2003.
Section 8.6.3: Column and equipment base plates must be provided

of shear plates or seismic stoppers designed to transmit 100% of the
base shear. See 8.6.4 to 8.6.6 for additional requirements related
with shear force.
Section 8.6.8: The concrete of the foundations must be designed to

resist the vertical and horizontal forces transmitted by the steel
anchoring elements. The concrete and the reinforcement strength
shall be such that the failure is produced on the steel anchoring
elements and not on the concrete (ductile design concept).
10.3.e. ACI318 code requirements for anchorage on concrete

Refer to Appendix D of ACI318-11 and ACI318-08 Code.
Basic requirements for post-installed anchor bolts
In order to use the requirements of Appendix D, post-installed, undercut, and
expansion anchors must meet the assessment criteria of ACI355.2 code
Qualification of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete. When high
seismic forces are present, post-installed anchor bolts must show a capacity to
resist large deformations. Provisions for adhesive anchors were added in the
2011 code; they shall meet the assessment criteria of ACI355.4 code
Qualification of Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete.
10-18
Force calculation
D.3.1: Anchors and anchor groups shall be designed for critical effects of
factored loads obtained from an elastic analysis. Plastic analysis approaches
are permitted where nominal strength is controlled by ductile steel elements,
provided that deformational compatibility is taken into account.
Note that if the strength of the anchorage is governed by breakage of the
concrete, the behavior is brittle and there is little ductility. In that case, the
code recommends use the theory of elasticity, and assume that the
attachment that distributes the loads to the anchors is very stiff.
On the other hand, if the anchor strength is governed by ductile yielding of the
anchor steel, the analysis based on the theory of elasticity is conservative.
Some references for plastic analysis approaches are shown in the Commentary
of the code.
See D.3 provisions for other general requirements.
Requirements for anchor bolts in seismic zones
(Re. ACI318-08 and ACI318-11, D.3.3)
Note that provisions of Appendix D do not apply at plastic hinge zones of
concrete structures (D.3.3.1).
One main objective of this chapter is to focus on the ductile design of the
anchorage to concrete. There were some changes between the 2008 and 2011
ACI 318 provisions. The most important provisions will be summarized. The
reader is encouraged to carefully study the provisions of Appendix D and its
commentary.
ACI318-08
Section D.3.3.3:
Anchor design strength related to concrete failure modes must take into
account an additional reduction factor of 0.75 (therefore, tensile resistance is
. and shear resistance is . ). The resistance must be calculated
assuming cracked concrete (unless proven otherwise).
10-19
Sections D.3.3.4, D.3.3.5 and D.3.3.6: In these provisions, the ductile failure
behavior is achieved designing in two ways:
Section D.3.3.4: Anchors shall be designed to be governed by the steel
strength of a ductile steel element (of the anchor itself) in accordance with
D.5.1 (tensile loading design requirements) and D.6.1 (shear loading design
requirements). Therefore, anchor rods must be ductile steel elements as
defined previously.
Section D.3.3.5: Instead of D.3.3.4, the attachment that the anchor is
connecting to the structure shall be designed so that the attachment will
undergo ductile yielding at a force level corresponding to anchor forces no
greater than the design strength of the anchors, as specified in D.3.3.3
Also, the code provides a third option when ductile behavior could not be
achieved (for example due to geometrical or material restrictions):
Section D.3.3.6: As an alternative to D.3.3.4 and D.3.3.5, it shall be permitted
to take the design strength of the anchors as 0.4 times the design strength
determined with D.3.3.3 (this reduced strength is made for minimize the
possibility of brittle failure).
ACI318-11
In this version of the code, the requirements are separated between tensile
and shear loading. The code requirements for ductile behavior are now clearly
specified and these provisions are more explicit than the ones presented on
2008 version. According to the seismic design philosophy, it is advisable to use
those provisions, because it is expected that they will lead to ductile behavior
of the connection.
D.3.3.4.-Requirements for Tensile Loading (summary):
ACI318-11, section D.3.3.4.2:
Where the tensile component of the strength-level earthquake force applied to
anchors exceeds 20% of the total factored anchor tensile force associated with
the same load combination (i.e. the earthquake seismic force is significant),
anchors and their attachments shall be designed in accordance with D.3.3.4.3
and the anchor design tensile strength shall be calculated in accordance with
D.3.3.4.4. When the previous condition is not met, see D.3.3.4.1 on the code.
10-20
ACI318-11, section D.3.3.4.3:

Anchors and their attachments shall satisfy one option from (a) trough (d).
a)
For single anchors, the concrete-governed strength shall be greater

than the steel strength of the anchor. For anchor groups, the ratio of
the tension load of the most highly stressed anchor to the steel
strength of the same anchor shall be equal or greater than the ratio
of the tensile load on tension loaded anchors to the concrete
governed strength of those anchors. There are several additional
provisions for increasing ductility and energy dissipation that are
listed on the code (points 1 to 6 of D.3.3.4.3(a)). Note that according
to the commentary on RD3.3, if these ductility requirements are not
satisfied, then the attachment to the anchors should be designed for
yielding.
b)
The anchor or group of anchors shall be designed for the maximum

tension that can be transmitted to the anchor or to the group, based
on the development of a ductile yield mechanism in the attachment,
in flexure, shear or bearing (or a combination of those conditions),
considering both material over strength and strain hardening effects
for the attachment. The anchor design tensile strength shall be
calculated with D.3.3.4.4 (discussed below).
In option (a), the ductile failure mechanism of the anchor is controlled by

requiring yielding of the anchor prior to a brittle concrete failure. On option
(b), the ductile behavior is achieved by designing the attachment (secondary
element) to yield before the failure of the anchors. For example, if the strength
of a base plate is less than the anchor bolts strength, it means that the failure
mode will occur at the base plate and, because it yields, the controlling limit
state is ductile.
c)

tension that can be transmitted by a non-yielding attachment. Anchor
tensile design strength shall be calculated with D.3.3.4.4 (discussed
below).
d)

tension obtained from the design load combinations that include the
earthquake load E, with E increased by (over strength factor
10-21
defined on ASCE 7 code). The anchor tensile design strength shall

satisfy the tensile strength requirements of D.4.1.1.
When to use each option of the above?
According to the commentary in RD.3.3.4.3 of ACI318-11:
Option (a) should be used only when the anchor yield behavior is well
defined and where the interaction of the yielding anchor with other
elements in the load path has been adequately addressed.
In option (b), the force associated with the steel attachment (for
example an angle, base plate or web tab), should be the expected
strength rather than the specified yield strength of the steel.
Option (c) shall apply to a variety of cases, particularly when AISC

341 provisions are used, which specify the use of loads based on
member strengths.
ACI318-11, section D.3.3.4.4:

This section refers to the calculation of the anchor tensile design strength for
resisting earthquake forces, for the limit states listed in table D.4.1.1
including concrete (brittle) limit states. It shall be assumed for the calculations
that the concrete is cracked, unless it can be demonstrated that the concrete
remains uncracked (see RD.3.3.4.4 commentary).
ACI318-11, section D.3.3.4.5:
This section refers to anchor reinforcement.
D.3.3.5.- Requirements for Shear Loading (summary):
ACI318-11, section D.3.3.5.2:
Where the shear component of the strength-level earthquake force applied to
anchors exceeds 20% of the total factored anchor shear force associated with
the same load combination (i.e. the earthquake seismic force is significant),
anchors and their attachments shall be designed in accordance with
D.3.3.5.3. The anchor design shear strength shall be calculated in accordance
with D.6. When the previous condition is not met, see D.3.3.5.1 at the code.
10-22
ACI318-11, section D.3.3.5.3:

Anchors and their attachments shall satisfy one option from (a) trough (d). A
summary is presented:
Note: There is no corresponding option to option (a) of D.3.3.4.3, because the
cross section of the steel element of the anchor cannot be configured so that
steel failure in shear provides any meaningful degree of ductility.
a)

shear that can be transmitted to the anchor or to the group, based on
the development of a ductile yield mechanism in the attachment in
flexure, shear, or bearing (or a combination of those conditions)
considering both material over strength and strain hardening effects
for the attachment.
b)

shear that can be transmitted to the anchors by a non-yielding
attachment.
c)

shear obtained from the design load combinations that include E, with
E increased by (over strength factor defined on ASCE 7 code). The
anchor design shear strength shall satisfy the tensile strength
requirements of D.4.1.1.
ACI318-11, section D.3.3.5.4:

This section refers to anchor reinforcement.
D.3.3.6.- Requirements for tension-shear forces:
When anchor bolts are subjected to both tension and shear forces, they shall
be designed to satisfy the requirements of D.7 (tension-shear interaction),
with the anchor design tensile strength calculated from D.3.3.4.4.
10.3.f. Additional Tips and Warnings
It is recommended to do the design verifications taking into account

bolt supplier recommendations (for example, checking HILTI Manuals
if using that type of bolts). Sometimes, those recommendations are
not conservative compared to code requirements, so it is
10-23
recommended to also check code requirements. The commonly used

and selected reference for the design of anchor bolts in concrete is
the Appendix D of the ACI318 Code.
HILTIs PROFIS Anchor software could be helpful for analyzing and
designing anchor bolts according to ACI318 provisions. This software
performs a simplified finite element analysis to establish anchor load
distribution on an elastic basis. It is recommended to use good
engineering judgment when introducing input data and when
analyzing the results given by the software. The final design made by
the software may not be 100% accurate and, if needed, it must be
modified.
Field inspection during the installation of post-installed anchor bolts is
of high importance, especially for chemical anchors. Provisions of ACI
318-2011 code are listed on section D.9, and for adhesive anchors
there are additional requirements included on D.9.2.1 through
D.9.2.4.
In construction drawings, it is important to leave hold marks in
order to wait for the drilling of the anchor holes until the supporting
structure of the equipment is mounted, so as to not cause
interferences between the anchors and the concrete reinforcement.
10.3.g. References
10-24
Cook and Klingner, 1992, Ductile Multiple Anchor Steel-to-Concrete

Connections. ASCE Journal of Structural Engineering, Vol. 118, N6,
June, 1992.
HILTI, 2009, Anchor Fastening Technology Manual. Edition February
2009.
HILTI, 2011, North American Product Technical guide. Vol.2: Anchor
Fastening Technical Guide 2011.
American Concrete Institute, 2011, Building Code Requirement for
Structural Concrete (ACI318-11) and Commentary, Appendix D. ACI,
USA.
American Concrete Institute, 2008, Building Code Requirement for
Structural Concrete (ACI318-08) and Commentary, Appendix D. ACI,
Farmington Hills, USA.
FEMA, 2009 FEMA P-750: NEHRP Recommended Seismic Provisions
for New Buildings and Other Structures, C13.4: Nonstructural
Component Anchorage. Building Seismic Safety Council, Washington
D.C.
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 11: EXPANSION JOINTS
11.
EXPANSION JOINTS
In this chapter we discuss the general provisions regarding expansion joints

according to the Chilean code NCh2369.Of2003, and some other general
recommendations.
11.1.
Seismic Displacements
One of the most common mistakes in seismic design is to consider that the
seismic displacements are produced by seismic forces modified by the
response modification factor R. This common mistake leads to
underestimations of the actual displacements that the structure will undertake,
thus, when the expansion joint design is made, this design is for an smaller
level of displacement. It is important that the calculation of displacements
shall be done according to the provisions of the applicable code, in this case
the Chilean code.
According to the NCh2369.Of2003, displacements shall be calculated in the
following way when the analysis considers R-factor reduced seismic loads (Re.
Section 6.1 of the NCh2369.Of2003):
(Re. 6-1 on NCh2369.Of2003)
= 0 + 1
Where is the seismic displacement, 0 corresponds to the displacement

produced by non-seismic service loads. 1 is:
1 =
0.5
0.5 <
< 1.0
0.5
1.0
Finally, is the seismic displacement calculated in the structural analysis

considering the response modification factor . Note that it is always
conservative to use 1 = . In some codes and specifications 1 is called .
This provision takes into account the fact that the reduction of the seismic
forces because of the ductile behavior of the structure, which is expressed with
the factor , is not applicable to deformations, which are calculated
considering the elastic response of the structure, but without the use of a
11-1
reduction factor. Also, if anelastic methods are used, deformation shall be

obtained directly from the analysis.
Consider the following situation:
s
i
Figure 11-1: Schematic disposition of two separated structures.

Two structures separated by a gap . To avoid the impact between the two
frames produced by the seismic displacements, the minimum gap that has to
be provided is given by the greater of the following values (Re. Section 6.2.1
of the NCh2369.Of2003):
=
+ 1
+ 0 + 0
= 0.002 +
= 30
(Re. 6-2 NCh2369.Of2003)

(Re. 6-3 NCh2369.Of2003)
Where and are the seismic displacements of each structure calculated

considering the response modification factor (which can be different for each
structure); 1 and 1 are the response modification factors for each structure
as defined in section 6.1 (explained above); 0 and 0 are the non-seismic
deformations for service loads; and and are the heights of the considered
level for each structure, measured from their respective base levels.
The first expression takes into account the fact that the maximum seismic
displacements for each building will not generally occur at the same time, so
that expression is a less conservative alternative than using:
= 1 + 1 + 0 + 0
11-2
This above expression is considered in some codes like the New Zealand code.
The application of the rule
+ 1
is of common practice in Chile
and is a better estimate of probable relative displacements between structures

than the summation of the maximums values of the seismic displacements.
(Re. C6.2 of the NCh2369.Of2003).
For rigid or fragile nonstructural components, their separation with respect to
the structure (to avoid impacts) must be larger than the relative deformation
between the levels where the element is located. It has to be calculated with
the corresponding values, but not less than 0.005 times of the element
height (Re. NCh2369.Of2003, section 6.2.2).
Note that when the relative displacement between two points of a system is
needed (e.g. story drifts, allowable deformation between boiler and the
structure of the boiler support) and dynamic analysis is used, that relative
displacement cannot be estimated as the difference of the maximum
displacement at each point; it has to be calculated using the combination of
the relative deformation for each mode or, if it is not possible to do the latter,
as the addition of the maximum displacement of each point, which is a
conservative alternative.
11.2.
Expansion Joint
If the two structures are connected, an expansion has to be considered for the
connection, which must be capable to withstand demand of seismic
deformations, but also the thermal expansion effects (and also deformations
from other sources, different from seismic origins).
Expansion joint
Connection
Figure 11-2: Scheme of a connection between two structures and location of

an expansion joint.
In this case is important to notice the difference between a stiff connection
and a flexible connection between the structures.
11-3
11.2.a. Flexible connection

In the case of a flexible connection there is no need to consider the connecting
element in the structural analysis, the expansion joint must stand
displacements according to section 6.1 of the Chilean code (meeting the
minimum separation of 6.2), calculated from the analysis of each structure
separately, without considering the structural properties of the connection.
11.2.b. Stiff connection
If the connection has a significant stiffness with respect to the structures which
it is attached to, the response of the buildings, and therefore, the relative
displacement between them, will depend of the properties of the connection.
Therefore, the connection and thus, the two structures connected with the
proper stiffness and inertia of the connection, have to be part of the structural
analysis. In this case, it is not possible to use directly the expressions of
section 6.1 of the Chilean code without considering the connection; the
displacement and the design force in the expansion joint must be obtained
directly from the structural analysis (use section 6.1 of the Chilean code).
K ej
Figure 11-3: Schematic representation of the location of the stiffness of a

connection between two structures.
Unfortunately, the Chilean code does not give any criterion to establish the
flexibility or stiffness of the connection. In the case of pipes, the code only
says that if the weight of the pipes is small in comparison with the structures
that they connect, it is not necessary to consider the pipe in the analysis;
otherwise, it must be done an analysis that includes the properties of the pipe
(Re. section 11.5.2 of the NCh2369.Of2003).
Summarizing:
11-4
If the connection is flexible, it is not necessary to consider it in the

structural analysis and the design of the expansion joint is done
according to the displacements calculated according to section 6.1 of
the Chilean code.
If the connection is stiff, it shall be included in the structural analysis,

and the design of the expansion joint must be done according to the
displacements that result from the analysis considering section 6.1 of
the Chilean code.
Tip:
The design of the expansion joint must be done for all seismic displacements
simultaneously; this is longitudinal, vertical and transverse displacement.
Also, consider that the calculated seismic displacement that is used for the
design does not have sign, so it has to be considered as positive or negative
(in all possible combinations between the calculated displacements). If it is
possible, more accurate analysis, like time-history analysis, is encouraged to
use in order to calculate more realistic displacements between the structures.
11.3.
Design of the expansion joint
Once the displacements are known, the design of the expansion joint will
depend on the properties of it. If the expansion joint is only a sliding support
between the structures, the design must be concentrated in calculating the
required dimensions of the support. If, for example, in a pipe that connects
two structures, the design will depend of the requirements established by the
pipe supplier.
For example, if a metallic bellow is used, EJMA (Expansion Joint Manufacturers
Association) use a design criterion of allowable expansion for the bellow.
Figure 11-4: Metallic bellow.

Taken from Introduction to Metallic Expansion Joints, EJMA.
11-5
11.3.a. Allowable expansion amount according to EJMA document:

Allowable axial displacement:
Single system: =
Double system: = 2
Allowable lateral displacement:
Single system:
Double system (universal type):
= 2 1
Double system (hinged, gimbal type):
= 2 2
Allowable bending angle

= 2 180
Allowable bending radius
=
Where the difference between a single system and a double system is given by
the number of bellows used. is the diameter of the bellow, is the allowable
expansion amount per one corrugation of bellows; is the number of
corrugations of the bellow; is the length of the bellow; is the distance
between corrugations; 1 is the total length of bellows containing intermediate
pipe of double system; 2 is the distance between hinge pins of hinged type
and is the factor depending on the ratio of bellows length of double system
bellows to total on.
The expressions shown above correspond to allowable displacements in the
case of independent displacements, but if we have combined displacements
the design methodology that EJMA uses is:
+ +
11-6
Single system:
=
= 3
=
180
2
Double system:
= 1
2
32 3
= 2
3 6 + 4 2
=
Figure 11-5: Displacements on the bellow.

Taken from Introduction to Metallic Expansion Joints, EJMA.
11-7
11.4.
References
Expansion Joint manufacturers Association, EJMA, Introduction to
metallic Expansion Joints. Mega Flexon. Expansion Joint & Flexible
Products.
The document that presents the future provisions that will be used in Chile,
(based on the ASCE 7 code) is MINVU NTM 001-2010 for the seismic design of
nonstructural components. Additional tips for expansion joints and seismic
damage mitigation can be found on the FEMA E-74 document.
11-8

MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 12: CRANES
12.
CRANES
12.1.
General description of bridge cranes
A Bridge Crane consists of an assembled structure which spans between

parallel rails or runway tracks, and is adapted to carry a suspended load
horizontally along the runway. Bridge cranes can be top running or under-hung
with single or double girder configurations. They also incorporate hoists on
trolleys to move the load laterally as well as vertically. Bridge cranes can be
mobilized via push trucks, geared or motorized end trucks (Re. J. Herbert
Corporation webpage). In crane supporting structures, the geometry of the
building is commonly defined by the dimensional characteristics of the crane.
A bridge crane consists of three principal components:
The bridge crane which traverses across the runway.
Trolley and hoist, which traverse across the bridge crane and lift or
lower the load.
The runway girder (crane girder), which is supported to the building

structure (attached to the columns).
Figure 12-1: Bridge crane scheme.

Taken from Dearborn Overhead Crane.
The objective of this chapter is to briefly explain the most important aspects
on the design of the supporting structures for crane bridges (classification of
the systems, design loads, design process, etc.), introducing some code
provisions and references, and also some tips that could be helpful for the
designer. It is expected that the reader closely examine the various references
that are presented, when looking for more detail in the subject.
12-1
12.2.
Systems Classification
As indicated on AISC Design Guide N 7, the main difference between crane

buildings and other industrial buildings is the frequency of loading produced by
cranes. Therefore, crane buildings should be classified according to the
frequency of loading. Note that there is a crane building classification (AISE
Technical Report N13) and a crane classification (CMAA 70).
The crane building classification, as indicated on AISE Technical Report N13
(based on ASD), is based primarily on the number of cycles or repetitions of a
specific loading case anticipated for portions of the structure. Based on the
expected service life (generally 50 years is recommended) and the rate of load
repetitions, the owner shall specify the classification for all or any portion of
the industrial building. Classes groups go from A to D.
Once classified, the report shows the loading conditions and the approximate
number of loading cycles for each class (see table 5.1 of the report). Then the
document refers to the allowable stress range for repeated loads, as specified
on AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (ASD) 1989.
The crane classification as stated on CMAA 70 document is based on the load
spectrum reflecting the actual service conditions as closely as possible. For
the definition of the load spectrum, it is encouraged to read the document. In
simple words, cranes classification is made according to the service conditions
of the most severely loaded part of the crane. The individual parts which are
clearly separated from the rest or forming a self-contained structural unit, can
be classified into different loading groups if the service conditions are fully
known.
Crane classes go from A (standby or infrequent service) to F (continuous
severe service). It is important to note that when the crane service is higher,
more severe fatigue conditions will be presented. As indicated on AISC Design
Guide 7, the fatigue associated with crane class is especially critical for the
design of crane runways and connections of crane runway beams to columns.
Tables 11.2.1 and 11.2.2 on the Design Guide, help to relate the CMAA 70 with
the AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (1989) Loading Conditions
and thus, with the approximate range of number of loading cycles. On later
editions of AISC Specifications, there are no longer references to loading
conditions. For example, on AISC360-05 (LRFD), Appendix 3 Design for
Fatigue, equations are used for determining the design stress range for a
given number of stress range fluctuation in the design life (), properly
defined by the designer. LRFD fatigue provisions are the most up to date AISC
12-2
provision and they are recommended for use by the authors of the Design
Guide. A more detailed discussion about fatigue damage and crane runway
fatigue considerations is written on sections 12.1 and 12.2 of AISC Design
Guide 7.
12.3.
Chilean code provisions
There are not specific requirements in Chilean codes for the design of crane
supporting structures. There are only some few related references on chapter
11 Specific Structures of NCh2369.Of2003.
12.3.a. Industrial Mill Buildings (summary of important aspects)
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 11.1)
The provisions presented on this section shall apply to industrial

buildings with or without travelling cranes.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 11.1.1)
When travelling cranes are present on buildings with transverse

frames (namely, permanent loads do not result only from selfweight), buildings shall have a continuous brace system on the roof.
When there are roof trusses, the continuous bracing system shall be
placed on the plane of the lower chord of the truss. See the following
figure:
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 11.1.2)
Figure 12-2: Roof bracing. Taken from NCh2369.Of2003, Figure A.2.
In buildings with travelling cranes, the seismic analysis must be made

for the most probable magnitude and height of the suspended load
present during the design earthquake. For these effects, the
12-3
frequency of the design earthquake and the operation conditions of

the cranes must be considered.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 11.1.3)
Note that according to commentary C.11.1.3, some recommendations that can
be considered safe are:
In cranes of maintenance, fabrication and similar operation, in which

on rare occasions the maximum load is lifted and the operation is not
continuous, the lifted load can be neglected for the seismic analysis.
For cranes of heavy and continuous operation with maximum load, it

is recommended to use this load at the highest level on the seismic
analysis. See figures corresponding to C.11.1.3.
If various cranes are present, either in a bay or in parallel bays, a

seismic load combination with all the cranes unloaded and parked on
the worst position must be considered.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 11.1.4)
The lateral connection between the crane girders (runway girders)

and the columns must be flexible in the vertical direction.
Additionally, safety devices (uplift clamps) to prevent bogie falling in
case the wheels run out of the rails must be considered. See the
following figure:
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 11.1.5)
Figure 12-3: Detail of crane girders and columns.

Taken from NCh2369.Of2003, Figure A.3.
12-4
12.3.b. Light steel bays

(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 11.2)
No specific provisions for cranes are mentioned in this section. The only
requirement is that travelling cranes must have a nominal capacity lesser or
equal than 100 kN (cranes without operator cabin), or 50 kN (cranes with
operator cabin).
12.3.c. Large mobile equipment
12.4.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 11.6)

Large mobile equipment (for example, travelling portal cranes) must
be subjected to a dynamic analysis, considering the magnitude and
the most unfavorable positions of the loads. The analysis can be
performed assuming that the wheels are pivoted on rails or the
ground; but if significant uplifting is involved, counterweights must be
placed in order to avoid it. See Figure A.8 of Appendix A.
To avoid the possibility of impact between the rail flanges and the
wheels, the system shall be self-centering. See Figure A.9 of
Appendix A.
Special attention shall be laid to the eccentricity effects that occur on
these systems for seismic loads.
Loads and load combinations
In service, cranes supporting structures are subjected to repeated loads that

vary over time and generate stresses on all the members and connections
present on the load path of the crane.
Crane loading conditions generally are not well defined in building codes.
There are some code provisions that specify the manner of calculating different
crane induced loads and load combinations. It has to be noted that different
results when using different design codes, so the designer should use
judgment, and project specifications must provide the specific code provisions
to be used in a given project. In this section, some general and common
provisions are shown.
Some common international provisions for crane loads are specified on ASCE 7
code and AISE Technical Report N13. The first document can be used with the
Strength Design and the Allowable Stress Design methods, and the second
recommendations are based on ASD.
12-5
According to ASCE 7 C4.9 Commentary, all support components of the moving

bridge cranes and monorail cranes, including runway beams, brackets, if
present, bracings and connections, shall be designed to withstand the
maximum wheel load of the crane and the vertical impact, the lateral and
longitudinal forces induced by the crane . The runway beam shall be designed
for crane stop forces.
12.5.
Crane Induced Loads
12.5.a. Vertical Impact

Because of the motion of the crane and the lifting and lowering of the
suspended load, additional vertical inertia forces shall be included. Two
different provisions of common crane design related documents are presented:
ASCE 7
(Re. ASCE 7-2010, 4.9)
Increase the maximum wheel load by the following percentages to obtain the
vertical impact force:
Crane type
Monorail cranes (powered)
Cab-operated or remotely operated bridge cranes (powered)
Pendant-operated bridge cranes (powered)
Bridge cranes or cranes with hand-geared bridge, trolley, and hoist
Percentage
25
25
10
0
Table 12-1: Increase applied to the maximum wheel loads to obtain the
vertical impact force, according to ASCE 7-2010.
As defined on ASCE 7, maximum wheel loads shall be the ones produced by
the weight of the bridge crane, plus the sum of the rated capacity (or crane
live load as indicated on ASCE 7) and the weight of the trolley, with the trolley
positioned on its runway at the location where the resulting load results in
maximum effect.
AISE Technical Report N 13
(Re. AISE Technical Report N13, 3.4.2)
Vertical impact increase, according to table 3.2 of AISE Technical Report N13,
is 25% for all types of cranes; excluding motor room maintenance cranes,
etc.; with a 20% percentage.
12-6
12.5.b. Side Thrust (Lateral Force)

As indicated on AISC Design Guide N 7 horizontal forces exist due to various
factors such as runway misalignment, crane skew, trolley acceleration, trolley
braking and crane steering.
ASCE 7
(Re. ASCE 7-2010, 4.9)
The lateral force on crane runway beams with electrically powered trolleys
shall be calculated as 20% of the sum of the rated capacity of the crane and
the weight of the hoist and trolley. The lateral force shall be assumed to act
horizontally at the traction surface on a runway beam, and shall be distributed
with due regard to the lateral stiffness of the runway beam and supporting
structure.
The total side thrust shall be distributed among the resisting members with
according to the lateral stiffnesses of the structures supporting the rails. These
forces shall be the greatest among the following options: the load specified in
table 3.2 of the report; 20% of the combined weight of the lifted load and
trolley; and 10% of the combined weight of the lifted load and the crane
weight (see the report for stacker cranes exception).
According to this report, the lifted load is the total weight lifted by the hoist,
including working loads, all the hooks, the lifting beams, magnets and other
appurtenances required for service, but excluding the weight of the column,
ram or other material handling device which is rigidly guided in the vertical
direction during hoisting action. For pendant operated cranes, side thrust is
taken as 20% of the maximum wheel load on the driving wheels (typically half
of the total wheels). Also, radio-operated cranes shall be considered the same
as cab-operated cranes for vertical impact, side thrust and traction
determination.
12-7
12.5.c. Longitudinal or Tractive Force

ASCE 7
(Re. ASCE 7-2010, 4.9)
The longitudinal force on the crane runway beam (except for bridge crane with
hand-geared bridges) is calculated as 10% of the maximum wheel loads of the
crane. This force shall be assumed to act horizontally at the traction surface of
the runway beam in either direction parallel to the beam.
The traction shall be taken as 20% of the maximum load on the driving wheels
for all type of cranes, according to table 3.2 of this report.
12.5.d. Crane Stop Forces
According to section 3.4.3 of AISE Technical Report N 13, the load applied to
the crane stop shall be included in the design of the runway girders, their
connections and the supporting framework. The bumper force is dependent on
the energy-absorbing device used in the crane bumper. Generally, the crane
supplier provides the bumper force.
12.5.e. Seismic Loads
According to section 3.9 of AISE Technical Report N13, the seismic mass of
cranes and trolleys that lift a suspended load need to be considered in the
calculation of the seismic load, including only the empty weight of the
equipment. This is different from the requirements of NCh2369.Of2003 shown
above in this document. It is important to take into account the interaction
between the equipment and the crane building, and that there are vertical
accelerations present on large seismic events, so special attention must be
considered to avoid the uplifting of the cranes. Other considerations with
respect to seismic loads must be discussed within each project specifications.
12-8
12.6.
Cranes Load Combinations
In general, building codes do not indicate how to combine different crane

loads, and how many cranes should be considered simultaneously loaded at a
given time. The engineer must use his judgment for these cases or proper
discussion shall be previously had to define the project specifications.
As indicated on AISC Design Guide N7, when one crane is being analyzed,
each span must be designed for the most severe loading with the crane in the
worst position for each element that is affected.
Chilean code NCh2369.Of2003, for example, only indicates that if various
cranes are present, they must be analyzed unloaded and parked for the worst
effects. If considering the crane loads as service live loads (SC) or special
operating live loads (SO), the combinations with other effects (wind,
earthquake, live loads, etc.) are addressed on section 4.5 of the Chilean code.
When various cranes are present, and where it is desired to make a
differentiation between the different crane induced loads (also including other
loads such as dead, live, and earthquake loads), a recommendation is to take
a view at AISE Technical Report N13, section 3.10 (based on ASD). It must
be noted that on this report, building classifications were based upon the most
frequently encountered situations, so they should be used with engineering
judgment. Some other loads combinations that have been commonly used by
engineers are shown on AISC Design Guide N7, section 13.7. Note that the
critical case for a specific element may occur when one or more loads are not
acting. Additionally, special loads combinations could be discussed on project
specifications.
Other references for cranes induced loads and load combinations are the CMAA
Specification N70 and N74, and the MBMA Low Rise Building Systems
Manual.
As examples indicated showed in the AISC Design Guide N7, other load
combinations (not shown on AISE Technical Report N13) that have been used
by engineers include:
1.
2.
A maximum of two cranes coupled together with maximum wheel

loads, 50 percent of the specified side thrust from each crane, and 90
percent of the specified traction. No vertical impact.
One crane in the aisle and the other one in an adjacent aisle with
maximum wheel loads, specified vertical impact, and with 50 percent
combined specified side thrust and specified traction for each crane.
12-9
3.
12.7.
A maximum of two cranes in one aisle and one or two cranes in an

adjacent aisle with maximum wheel loads, and 50 percent of the
specified thrust of the cranes in the aisle producing the maximum
side thrust, with no side thrust from the cranes in the adjacent aisle.
No vertical impact or traction.
Previous considerations for the design process
Some basic information that has to be taken into account for the design
process is listed below:
Type of crane to be used.
Operating conditions.
Building type and the dimensions of the place where the bridge crane
is going to be installed in order to size the length of the principal
beam (bridge crane) and have some other required dimensions (for
example, the head-room clearance available above the specified
crane level).
Consider properties and location of safety and maintenance devices

for the service condition of the crane: railings, access routes and
stairs, adequate walkways, etc.
Crane required characteristics: number of cranes required, lifting

height, maximum rated load, self-weight, length of the bridge crane,
estimated number of lifts in time period , hoisting speed, travelling
speed, method of crane control (for example cabin on crane, pendant
control unit, remote control, etc.), system of power supply, support
conditions and details, details of the clearances required between the
crane and the structure, runway length, runaway girder spans, etc.
Vendors should give the specific information required by the project

engineer. For example, maximum wheel loads, wheel spacing, trolley
weight, etc.
12.8.
Design aspects
12.8.a. Crane Runway Girders

Crane runway girders will be subjected to the following internal forces and
moments that must be considered on the design:
12-10
Biaxial bending due to vertical actions and transverse horizontal

actions.
Axial compression or tension due to longitudinal horizontal actions.
Torsion due to eccentricities of vertical actions and transverse

horizontal actions, relative to the shear center of the cross section of
the beam.
Vertical and horizontal shear due to vertical actions and transverse
horizontal actions.
Note that when fatigue is critical on any limit state (especially on higher
service levels for the crane, according to CMAA 70 classification), it must be
considered because this type of elements and their connections are subjected
to repeated cycles of loading during their life time. There are also serviceability
limit states, used to control relative and absolute lateral movements of the
runways that will be discussed later on this section.
Generally, crane runway girders are made from rolled or welded H sections (W
sections), and when required, a channel cap is added on the top flange to
increase the strength of the section. There are other options also for the cross
section of the runway girder, for example a plate or triangulated box girder.
Note that fatigue restrictions are more severe for built-up shapes. As indicated
on AISC Design Guide N7, the difference between a rolled shape vs. a builtup member using continuous fillet welds is a reduction in the allowable fatigue
stress.
Runway beam design procedure:
(Re. AISC Design Guide N7)
The basic steps will be shown according to the AISC Design Guide N7 but with
some additional information included. Internal forces and moments which
affect the crane runway girders must be taken into account. For additional
guidance and solved examples, see section 18.1 of the Design Guide.
1. - Serviceability limit states: calculate the required moments of inertia and
to satisfy deflection control criteria. Vertical deflection (due to wheel loads
without impact) is limited to L/600 to L/1000 , depending on the CMAA 70
crane class and the type of crane. Horizontal deflections are limited up to
L/400 for all cranes.
Other recommendations from other documents that limit vertical and
horizontal deflections on the runway beam can be found in ICHA Manual for
the Design of Steel Structures, table 15.3.1; and in Eurocode 3, Part 6 (ENV
1993-6), tables 7.1 and 7.2. It is recommended to discuss before the design,
all the limits that are going to be controlled.
12-11
2. - Obtain the worst load conditions (moving the crane to various positions)
for the runway beams and their connections.
3. - Calculate the bending moments ( and ) considering the effects of
impact. Note that the moment can be calculated applying the lateral cranes
forces on the top flange, but increased due to the fact that the force is applied
at the top of the rail, as indicated on AISE Technical Report N 13 .
4. - Check bending about the x-x axis ignoring , considering appropriate
support and bracing conditions. If needed, channel caps could be added to the
top flange. If desired, bending about the y-y axis ignoring could be also
evaluated. Note that chapter F of AISC 360-05 Specification can be used for
these verifications.
5.- Check the bi-axial-bending interaction on the top flange. Typically, axial
forces on the beam girder due to longitudinal force generate stress levels that
can be neglected (if desired, an additional check could be done for the
longitudinal stress, considering the full cross sectional area of the beam).
Chapter H of AISC 360-05 can be used to verify interaction. A typical design
assumption is that only the top flange resists the lateral crane loads.
6.- Check web sidesway buckling (see AISC 360-05, section J10.4) in order to
prevent buckling in the tension flange of a beam where the flanges are not
restrained by bracings or stiffeners and are subjected to concentrated loads.
This failure mode can be prevented by an adequate design of the lateral
bracing or stiffeners located at the load point.
7.- Additional checks (not specified in the Design Guide, but that could be
performed)
12-12
Applicable limit states of section J10 of AISC360-05 Specification.

Verify shear stress on the runway beam check.
Crane uplift: design of uplift clamps (required by NCh2369.Of2003 as
indicated above on this document) for vertical uplift forces (especially
when earthquake effects are considered, modeled for example, as
static forces on the crane).
Geometry of the top flange and its reinforcements should be chosen
from those alternatives that offer the best torsional resistance
(torsion can also be checked) and the best lateral stiffness.
According to the Design Guide, if the fatigue is a consideration, the above

procedure should be altered so the live load stress range for the critical case
does not exceed the fatigue limit stresses.
Other design tips for runway beams are included in the AISC Design Guide
N7. See sections 18.2 (Plate Girders), 18.3 (Simple Span vs. Continuous
Runways), 18.4 (Channel Caps), 18.5 (Runway Bracing Concepts), 18.6
(Crane Stops), 18.7 (Crane Rail Attachments) and 18.8 (Crane Rails and Crane
Joints); in the AISE Technical Report N13, section 5.8 (Crane Runway
Girders); and in CMAA Specification N 70, section 3.5 (Design Limitations).
There are additional recommendations for the design of these elements, their
bracings, welding, stiffeners, etc.
12.8.b. Column Design
There are different options for the type of column that supports a runway
girder. They can be bracketed, stepped, laced or battened as shown in the
following figure:
Figure 12-4: Bridge Crane Columns Types.

Taken from AISC Design Guide N7, Figure 20.1.1.
Overhead travelling crane runway girders are typically supported by stepped
columns. According to AISE Technical Report N13, built-up step columns
made of two or more segments tied together by solid web plates, lacing, or
intermittent vertical diaphragms, shall have the connecting segments and
their connections designed to provide integral behavior of the combined
column section. When intermittent vertical diaphragms or diagonal lacing are
used, column shafts between panel points and the intermediate web member
shall be designed for all the forces derived from analysis. By recommendation,
12-13
brackets shall not be used to support runway girders with total reactions at the
column larger than 50 kips (222 kN).
As said on AISC Design Guide N 7, the eccentric crane loads (the critical
bending case occurs generally when the crane is not centered over the column
but located just to one side) and lateral loads produce moments in the column.
The calculation of the moments in the columns requires a complete frame
analysis in order to obtain reliable results. Two parameters that have marked
effect on column moments are the base fixity and the amount of load sharing
with adjacent bents (discussed and exampled on the Design Guide).
According to Design Guide, a frame analysis to obtain an exact solution will
contain the following:
It accounts for sidesway.

It properly handles the restraint at the top (generally, 2 supports due
to the intersection of the column with the truss chords of the roof)
and at the base of the column.
It accounts for non-prismatic member geometry (for example, on
stepped columns).
Some preliminary design methods and final design procedures for this type of
columns, including solved examples, are shown on sections 20.2 and 20.3 of
the AISC Design Guide N7.
12-14
According to Chilean practice, the following column shapes are recommended

in a predesign stage:
Bridge crane type
Small: Lifts up to 10 ton.
Column shape recommended

Use IP ore even IN shapes with global slenderness about the strong axis
not greater than 100.
Two options are recommended:
1- Use an IP shape with slenderness lesser than 80 if a bracket system
which receives the crane bridge beam is used.
Medium: Lifts up to 30 ton.
2- If a column which changes of section after supporting the crane

bridge beam is used, study the dimensions so that the column is an H
shape with enough depth for placing the crane bridge beam and giving
free space for operation. Besides, at least 250 mm must stay free so to
continue the column upward.
Big: Lifts more than 80 ton
Normally special sections are used, or a section composed by two H

shapes.
Table 12-2: Recommended column shapes according to Chilean practice, for

different types of bridge cranes.
12.9.
Additional information
On chapter 15 of the AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13th Edition, titled

Design of Hanger Connections, Bracket Plates and Crane-Rail Connections,
there are some recommendations for the design of:
-Bracket plates connections (sometimes used for supporting the crane runway
girder), including simplified equations for the limitation of the load on the
bracket, flexural yielding, rupture and local buckling recommendations.
-Crane rail connections: includes a general description of bolted and welded
splices on rail connections. Also, this chapter contains a description a various
recommendations related to different rail fastenings (hook bolt fastenings, rail
clip fastenings, rail clamp fastenings and patented rail clip fastenings).
12-15
12.10. References
J. Herbert Corporation webpage:

http://www.jherbertcorp.com/crane-bridge.htm
Dearborn Overhead Crane webpage:

http://www.dearborncrane.com
12-16
Association of Iron and Steel Engineers, 2003, Technical Report N

13, Guide for the Design and Construction of Mill Buildings (AISE
Technical Report N 13). AISE, Pittsburgh, PA.
Metal Building Manufacturers Association, 2022, Low Rise Building
Systems Manual. MBMA, Cleveland, OH.
American Institute of Steel Construction, 2004, Steel Design Guide
N7, Industrial Buildings. Roofs to Anchor Rods, 2nd Ed. (AISC
Design Guide N7). James Fisher, AISC, USA.
Crane Manufacturers Association of America, 2000, CMAA
Specification N70 , Revised 2000, CMAA, Charlotte, NC.
Crane Manufacturers Association of America, 2000, CMAA
Specification N74 For Electric Overhead Travelling Cranes, CMAA,
Charlotte, NC.
Instituto Chileno del Acero, 2000, Manual de Diseo para Estructuras
de Acero, Mtodo de Factores de Carga y Resistencia, Tomo I (ICHA
ARA Manual), ICHA, Santiago, Chile.
European Committee for Standardization (CEN), 1999, Eurocode 3:
Design of Steel Structures Part 6: Crane Supporting Structures
(ENV 1993-6). CEN, Brussels.

Posco E&c - Manual of Seismic Steel Connections v1.1

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Posco E&c - Manual of Seismic Steel Connections v1.1

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

POSCO E&C CO.

MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL

MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS

Manual of Seismic Steel Connections Vs. 1.0

MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS

3. Base Plate Connections

MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS

MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS

10. Support of Equipment

11. Expansion Joints

MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION

MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION

The chapters are as follows:

Stoppers, which includes up-lift clamps and lateral stoppers.

In Chapter 2, general information about current international and Chilean

MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION

ANSI/AISC 341-05 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings

MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION

ANSI/AISC 358-05 Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, American Institute of Steel

Regarding seismic design, the Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel

MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION

Special Moment Frames (SMF) or Special Concentric Brace Frames

Life must be protected: protect life by avoiding the collapse of the

Maintain the continuity of operation of the industry: keep the

Ensure ductile behavior of elements and connections, and avoid

Provide redundancy to the earthquake resistant system.

MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION

Avoid asymmetry and unneeded complexity of the structure.

Limit incursions in non-elastic behavior, if those are going to stop

Emergency and control equipment shall be properly qualified

Chapter 8 of the standard defines special requirements for steel structures.

Load and Resistance Factor Design Specifications for Structural Steel

design, the Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel

NCh3171.Of2010 Structural design - General dispositions and combinations

MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION

2.2 Material properties

Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION

Table 2.2-1: Structural steels defined by ASTM.

MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION

Table 2.2-2: Structural steels defined in NCh203.Of2006.

The maximum allowable value of the ratio Fy/Fu is 0.85.

MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION

2.3 Comments on the performance of steel structures during the

MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION

construction practices, performed well. Damage was limited mostly to older

Cruz, E. F., and Valdivia, D., (2011). Performance of industrial

Earthquake Engineering Research Institute (EERI), (2010). EERI

USGS. Magnitude 8.8 Offshore Bio-Bio, Chile. Retrieved April 15th,

MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION

In bolted connections, the transmission of forces is made by the action of the

Figure 2.4-1: Bolt parts.

Commonly used bolts

AISC360-05 authorizes the use of ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 high-strength

Table 2.4-1: Gross section area for commonly used bolts.

MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION

(a) Clearance provided allows the use of a 1-in. bolt if desirable

MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION